WO2021006314A1 - Manufacturing method for roll body, and roll body - Google Patents

Manufacturing method for roll body, and roll body Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021006314A1
WO2021006314A1 PCT/JP2020/026863 JP2020026863W WO2021006314A1 WO 2021006314 A1 WO2021006314 A1 WO 2021006314A1 JP 2020026863 W JP2020026863 W JP 2020026863W WO 2021006314 A1 WO2021006314 A1 WO 2021006314A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sheet
winding core
roll body
gap
winding
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/026863
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
将宏 鳥本
恵 大石
亮 秋山
遼 中澤
博大 馬橋
章 谷口
橋本 浩二
隆介 長町
雅允 中野
勇二 大原
Original Assignee
大日本印刷株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 大日本印刷株式会社 filed Critical 大日本印刷株式会社
Priority to KR1020227003825A priority Critical patent/KR20220029738A/en
Priority to CN202080054223.XA priority patent/CN114223081A/en
Publication of WO2021006314A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021006314A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H18/00Winding webs
    • B65H18/28Wound package of webs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01MPROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
    • H01M10/00Secondary cells; Manufacture thereof
    • H01M10/05Accumulators with non-aqueous electrolyte
    • H01M10/058Construction or manufacture
    • H01M10/0587Construction or manufacture of accumulators having only wound construction elements, i.e. wound positive electrodes, wound negative electrodes and wound separators
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H75/00Storing webs, tapes, or filamentary material, e.g. on reels
    • B65H75/02Cores, formers, supports, or holders for coiled, wound, or folded material, e.g. reels, spindles, bobbins, cop tubes, cans, mandrels or chucks
    • B65H75/04Kinds or types
    • B65H75/08Kinds or types of circular or polygonal cross-section
    • B65H75/10Kinds or types of circular or polygonal cross-section without flanges, e.g. cop tubes
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H75/00Storing webs, tapes, or filamentary material, e.g. on reels
    • B65H75/02Cores, formers, supports, or holders for coiled, wound, or folded material, e.g. reels, spindles, bobbins, cop tubes, cans, mandrels or chucks
    • B65H75/18Constructional details
    • B65H75/28Arrangements for positively securing ends of material
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01MPROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
    • H01M50/00Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the non-active parts of electrochemical cells other than fuel cells, e.g. hybrid cells
    • H01M50/40Separators; Membranes; Diaphragms; Spacing elements inside cells
    • H01M50/403Manufacturing processes of separators, membranes or diaphragms
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01MPROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
    • H01M50/00Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the non-active parts of electrochemical cells other than fuel cells, e.g. hybrid cells
    • H01M50/40Separators; Membranes; Diaphragms; Spacing elements inside cells
    • H01M50/463Separators, membranes or diaphragms characterised by their shape
    • H01M50/469Separators, membranes or diaphragms characterised by their shape tubular or cylindrical
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P70/00Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
    • Y02P70/50Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for producing a roll body and a roll body.
  • a fixing member such as double-sided tape is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core to fix a part of the sheet (for example, the winding start end).
  • a step may be generated due to this fixing member.
  • the present invention includes the following inventions.
  • the step of filling is provided, and the coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the winding start end portion is performed so that the coating material is in contact with or close to the tip surface of the winding start end portion located in the longitudinal direction.
  • the manufacturing method wherein the first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the tip surface.
  • a step of applying the coating material along the width direction of the core and a step of winding the sheet around the winding core again after applying the coating material and interposing the coating material between the sheets are provided.
  • the first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first circumference and is in contact with the tip surface located at the winding start end in the longitudinal direction, and the coating material is the coating material.
  • a manufacturing method which is applied to a first region corresponding to the first gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body.
  • a fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface is arranged on the surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core.
  • the sheet After applying the coating material and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, the sheet is wound around the winding core to fill at least one of the second gap and the third gap with the coating material.
  • the coating material In the coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the fixing member, the coating material is located on the first end surface side or the second end surface side, and the coating material is the first end surface or the said.
  • the coating material is placed in contact with or close to the second end face, or the coating material is located on the first end face side and the second end face side, respectively, and the coating material is in contact with or in close contact with the first end face and the second end face.
  • the second gap is a gap between the core and the sheet on the first lap and is in contact with the first end surface
  • the third gap is the winding.
  • a manufacturing method which is a gap located between the core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface.
  • a fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface is arranged on the surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core.
  • a step of rewinding the sheet is provided, and the second gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member.
  • the third gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member, and the coating material is the outer periphery of the intermediate roll body.
  • a manufacturing method which is applied to at least one of a second region corresponding to the second gap and a third region corresponding to the third gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the surface.
  • a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, and said.
  • the first gap in contact with the tip surface located in the longitudinal direction at the winding start end of the sheet in the longitudinal direction on the first lap, and the first filling that fills the first gap and extends in the width direction of the winding core.
  • a roll body that includes a part.
  • the winding is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, has a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core, and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface.
  • a fixing member that fixes a part of the sheet to the core, a second gap that is located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and is in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and the winding core.
  • a third gap located between the sheet and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member, and a second filling portion filled in the second gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
  • the roll body according to the above [11] further comprising at least one of a third filling portion filled in the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
  • a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, and said.
  • the first region corresponding to at least the first gap between the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap
  • a roll body provided with a first intervening portion extending in the width direction of the winding core.
  • a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, which is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and is wound.
  • a fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, and the winding core and the first circumference.
  • a second gap located between the sheets and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and between the winding core and the sheet on the first circumference, and the second end surface of the fixing member.
  • a roll body comprising at least one of the parts.
  • a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, which is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and is wound.
  • a fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, and the winding core and the first circumference.
  • a second gap located between the sheets and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap, and the second end surface of the fixing member.
  • a second intervening portion provided in a second region corresponding to the second gap between the third gap in contact with the winding core and the sheet after the first lap, and extending in the width direction of the winding core, and the first lap and after.
  • a roll body comprising at least one of a third intervening portion provided in a third region corresponding to the third gap between the sheets and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
  • a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively alleviating a step caused by a winding start end portion of a sheet and such a roll body. Further, according to another aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively alleviating a step caused by a fixing member and such a roll body.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view of a sample for specifying a position for measuring the in-plane phase difference.
  • FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tip end portion of the first filling portion of the roll body of FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a region R1 and a region R2 in the roll body of FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view of a sample for specifying a position for measuring the in-plane phase difference.
  • FIG. 9 is a plan view of the roll body for specifying the measurement position by the laser displacement meter.
  • FIG. 10 is an image graph of the amount of displacement with respect to the position created based on the measurement of the laser displacement meter.
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a part of the image graph of FIG. 10 in order to obtain the areas S1 and S2.
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 16 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 17 (A) and 17 (B) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 18 (A) and 18 (B) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 19 (A) to 19 (C) are diagrams schematically showing a manufacturing process of another roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 20 (A) and 20 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 21 (A) and 21 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 22 (A) to 22 (D) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 (A) to 23 (C) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • 24 (A) and 24 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram when measuring the maximum thickness and length of the second interposition portion shown in FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional area S3.
  • FIG. 30 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • 38 (A) to 38 (C) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 40 (A) is a graph showing the amount of displacement of the roll body according to the seventh embodiment with respect to the position around the first filling portion
  • FIG. 40 (B) is the first filling of the roll body according to the eighth embodiment
  • FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the portion
  • FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the first filled portion of the roll body according to the ninth embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a roll body according to the present embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view of a sample for specifying a position for measuring an in-plane phase difference
  • FIG. 3 is a roll body of FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a part of the above
  • FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 5 is a view showing the tip of the first filling portion of the roll body of FIG. It is an enlarged view around the part.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a region R1 and a region R2 in the roll body of FIG. 1, FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a plan view of the roll body for specifying a measurement position by a laser displacement meter
  • FIG. 10 is a laser displacement. It is an image graph of the displacement amount with respect to the position created based on the measurement of the meter
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a part of the image graph of FIG. 10 in order to obtain the areas S1 and S2.
  • FIG. 8, and FIGS. 12 to 16 are enlarged views of a part of another roll body according to the present embodiment.
  • 17 to 19 are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the present embodiment.
  • 20 to 24 are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the present embodiment.
  • the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 1 includes a winding core 11 and a long sheet 12 wound around the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. As shown in FIG. 3, the roll body 10 is located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 and the first filling portion 14 filled in the first gap 13 located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12. A second filling portion 16 filled in the second gap 15 and a fixing member 17 for fixing a part of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11 are further provided. Further, the roll body 10 is further provided with a fourth intervening portion 18 which is connected to the first filling portion 14 and is interposed between the sheet 12 on the first lap and the sheet 12 on the second lap. Although the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 3 includes the fourth intervening portion 18, it does not have to include the fourth intervening portion as in the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 7. The sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 by a plurality of turns, for example, two or more turns.
  • the shape of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but is preferably cylindrical or cylindrical from the viewpoint that the sheet 12 can be easily wound.
  • the winding core 11 shown in FIG. 1 has a cylindrical shape.
  • the winding core is cylindrical, the roll body 10 can be held by inserting the chuck member of the winding device into the hole 11B of the winding core 11 in the width direction DR1.
  • the winding core includes a shaft member penetrating the winding core, and by attaching the shaft member to the winding device, the roll body can be held by the winding device.
  • the width W1 of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.1 m or more and 50 m or less.
  • the lower limit of the width W1 of the winding core 11 may be 0.2 m or more, 0.3 m or more, 0.7 m or more, 1.0 m or more, 1.5 m or more, or 2 m or more, and the upper limit is 30 m or less. It may be 20 m or less, 10 m or less, 7 m or less, 5 m or less, 3.5 m or less, 3 m or less, or 2.5 m or less.
  • the width of the winding core can be obtained by measuring the width of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the width of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured widths of the 10 points.
  • the outer diameter of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 30 mm or more and 8000 mm or less.
  • the lower limit of the outer diameter of the winding core 11 may be 90 mm or more or 100 mm or more, and the upper limit is 5000 mm or less, 3500 mm or less, 2000 mm or less, 1000 mm or less, 700 mm or less, 500 mm or less, 350 mm or less, or 300 mm or less. There may be.
  • the outer diameter of the winding core is obtained by measuring the outer diameter of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the outer diameters of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured outer diameters of the 10 points. be able to.
  • the inner diameter of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but may be 20 mm or more and 7500 mm or less.
  • the lower limit of the inner diameter of the winding core 11 may be 50 mm or more, 80 mm or more, 120 mm or more, 150 mm or more, and the upper limit may be 4500 mm or less, 3000 mm or less, 1500 mm or less, 900 mm or less, 600 mm or less, 400 mm or less, 250 mm or less. , Or 200 mm or less.
  • the inner diameter of the winding core can be obtained by measuring the inner diameter of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the inner diameters of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured inner diameters of the 10 points.
  • a step may be formed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core where the sheet contacts so that the position of the sheet winding start end is lowered by the thickness of the sheet.
  • a step is not formed in the portion of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in contact with the sheet 12.
  • "a step is not formed in the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the winding core in which the sheet contacts” means the central portion of the winding core and the circumference of each portion separated from the central portion by 100 mm or more in the width direction of the winding core. In, it is assumed that there is no portion where the difference in height is 3 ⁇ m or more.
  • a step may be formed on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 where the sheet 12 is in contact, so that the height difference is less than 3 ⁇ m.
  • the material constituting the winding core 11 is not particularly limited.
  • Examples of the material constituting the winding core 11 include paper, plastic, metal and the like. Paper also includes paper impregnated with resin.
  • Examples of plastics include fiber reinforced plastics (FRP / Fiber Reinforced Plastics), polyolefins such as polyethylene (PE) and polypropylene (PP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polystyrene (PS), and acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (ABS). ), Phenolic resin, nylon and the like.
  • FRP fiber reinforced plastic
  • FRP fiber reinforced plastic
  • fiber-reinforced plastics include those obtained by hybridizing fibers such as glass, epoxy, polyester, carbon, and aramid with a main body made of epoxy resin or phenol resin.
  • the metal include iron, stainless steel (SUS), aluminum and the like.
  • the sheet 12 has a long shape. Specifically, the sheet 12 is sufficiently thin with respect to the width and sufficiently long in length.
  • the width W2 of the sheet 12 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.1 m or more and 50 m or less.
  • the "sheet width" in the present specification means the length of the sheet in the lateral direction (width direction of the winding core).
  • the lower limit of the width W2 of the sheet 12 may be 0.2 m or more, 0.3 m or more, 0.5 m or more, 1.0 m or more, or 2.0 m or more, and the upper limit may be 30 m or less, 20 m or less, 10 m or more. Below, it may be 7 m or less, 5 m or less, 3.5 m or less, or 3 m or less.
  • the width of the sheet can be obtained by measuring the width of the sheet at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the widths of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured widths of the 10 points.
  • the width W2 of the sheet 12 is preferably smaller than the width W1 of the winding core 11. As a result, the sheet 12 can be reliably held by the winding core 11.
  • the length of the sheet 12 may be, for example, 20 m or more and 10000 m or less.
  • sheet length means the length of a sheet in the longitudinal direction.
  • the lower limit of the length of the sheet 12 may be 30 m or more, 40 m or more, or 50 m or more, and the upper limit may be 9000 m or less or 8000 m or less.
  • the thickness of the sheet 12 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 3 ⁇ m or more and 600 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 may be 10 ⁇ m or more, 15 ⁇ m or more, 20 ⁇ m or more, or 30 ⁇ m or more, and the upper limit is 500 ⁇ m or less, 400 ⁇ m or less, 300 ⁇ m or less, 200 ⁇ m or less, 110 ⁇ m or less, or 80 ⁇ m or less. May be good.
  • a thin film it is not limited to this, and it is preferably 3 ⁇ m or more and less than 50 ⁇ m, and further preferably 40 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the sheet can be obtained by measuring the thickness of the sheet at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thickness of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses of the 10 points.
  • the step is less likely to occur when the sheet is thick, but becomes more remarkable as the sheet becomes thinner.
  • the present invention is particularly effective when the thickness of the sheet is thin (80 ⁇ m or less, less than 50 ⁇ m, and further 40 ⁇ m or less).
  • the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably 15 ⁇ m or more and 300 ⁇ m or less.
  • the step becomes more remarkable as the thickness of the sheet becomes thinner, but when the thickness of the sheet becomes extremely thin, the step tends to become smaller on the contrary.
  • the heating step 50 ° C. or higher in the subsequent step, if the sheet is thin, the deformation due to the step may be eliminated.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more, 35 ⁇ m or more, or 50 ⁇ m or more, and the upper limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is 250 ⁇ m or less and 200 ⁇ m or less. , 150 ⁇ m or less, or more preferably 100 ⁇ m or less. When any of these resins is included, it is particularly effective at a thickness that is neither too thin nor too thick.
  • the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less
  • the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably thin, and therefore the upper limit thereof is preferably 130 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 90 ⁇ m or less.
  • the fixing member is an adhesive tape
  • the thickness of the fixing member exceeds 15% of the thickness of the sheet, the influence on the step is more likely to occur. Therefore, the thickness of the sheet 12 should not be too thin, and the lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably, for example, 20 ⁇ m or more or 35 ⁇ m or more.
  • the sheet examples include film, metal leaf, paper and the like.
  • the film may be, for example, a resin film.
  • the resin film preferably has light transmission.
  • the resin constituting such a resin film is not particularly limited as long as it has light transmittance, but for example, acrylic resin, polyolefin resin (polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, cycloolefin polymer resin), polycarbonate.
  • polyacrylate resin polyester resin (polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, etc.), aromatic polyether ketone resin, polyether sulfone resin, acetyl cellulose resin (for example, triacetyl cellulose resin),
  • acetyl cellulose resin for example, triacetyl cellulose resin
  • resin films having relatively high flexibility for example, acrylic resins, polyolefin resins, polyester resins, acetyl cellulose resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, or resin films containing polyamide resins are available.
  • the technique of the present invention is effective because it is easily deformed by a step caused by the winding start end of the sheet and a step caused by the fixing member. Further, in recent years, a low moisture permeable resin having less distortion and low water permeability has been preferably used for large displays. In the case of a large display, the entire seat width is often a product, so if any deformation due to a step remains, the entire sheet must be discarded.
  • acrylic resins, polyester resins, and cycloolefin polymer resins are preferably used for large displays, but according to the technique of the present invention, deformation due to steps can be satisfactorily prevented and mass productivity can be improved. Therefore, the technique of the present invention is particularly effective for sheets made of these resins. Further, when thinness is required in the final product, for example, when a film having a thickness of less than 50 ⁇ m is used, the technique of the present invention is suitable for a film of any material.
  • the in-plane retardation (retalation: Re) of the sheet 12 may be 10 nm or less. preferable.
  • the fact that the in-plane retardation Re of the sheet 12 is 10 nm or less means that the optical strain is small, and it can be said that there is almost no residual stress during the manufacture of the sheet 12. That is, the fact that the in-plane retardation Re of the sheet 12 is 10 nm or less means that the polymer in the sheet 12 is uniform. Therefore, when the sheet 12 is made into a long roll, the sheet 12 is caused by some step. It is preferable because it is less likely to cause a new step due to the polymer state inside.
  • the upper limit of the in-plane phase difference Re of the sheet 12 is more preferably 8 nm or less or 4 nm or less from the viewpoint that color unevenness and blackout, which are problems when used in combination with a polarizer, are unlikely to occur in display applications. preferable.
  • the haze value total haze value
  • the haze value is 1% or less or 0.5. It is preferably as small as% or less.
  • the polymer in the sheet 12 is uniform as described above because new steps are less likely to occur due to the internal polymer state.
  • the sheet 12 contains a polyester resin, stretching is indispensable in order to obtain physical strength. Therefore, in order to make the polymer state as uniform as possible, the sheets 12 are sequentially or simultaneously biaxially stretched at substantially the same magnification in the vertical and horizontal directions. Good to manufacture. As a result, a sheet containing a polyester resin having a smaller in-plane phase difference than the conventional one can be obtained.
  • the small in-plane retardation means that the thickness of the sheet is 10 ⁇ m to 90 ⁇ m and the in-plane retardation is 1500 nm or less, preferably 1200 nm or less, more preferably 1000 nm or less, and further preferably 800 nm or less. is there.
  • the in-plane phase difference should not be too small, preferably 200 nm or more, more preferably 400 nm or more.
  • the index is the Nz coefficient. Since the Nz coefficient is affected by the crystallinity and orientation inside the film, it is related to the characteristics of the entire sheet.
  • the Nz coefficient is usually 2 to 4 in the case of polyethylene terephthalate, for example, but it is said that a new step is unlikely to occur due to the polymer state in the sheet due to some step, especially in the case of a long roll. In terms of points, it is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and most preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit of the Nz coefficient is about 80, preferably 70 or less, and most preferably 50 or less.
  • the in-plane phase difference (Re) is the refractive index nx in the slow-phase axial direction, which is the direction in which the refractive index is maximum in the in-plane of the sheet, and the phase-advancing axial direction, which is the direction orthogonal to the slow-phase axial direction in the in-plane. It is expressed by the following formula (1) by the refractive index ny of and the thickness t (nm) of the sheet. From the following mathematical formula (1), it can be seen that a small in-plane phase difference tends to improve bending resistance because the degree of orientation is low.
  • the in-plane phase difference (Re) can be measured by, for example, the product name "RETS-100” manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., the product name "KOBRA-WR” manufactured by Oji Measuring Instruments Co., Ltd., and "PAM-UHR100".
  • In-plane phase difference (Re) (nx-ny) x t ... (1)
  • Nz coefficient (nx-nz) / (nx-ny) ... (2)
  • the stage becomes an inclined rotation stage.
  • the device will be a closed system and this will be done each time the light source is turned on.
  • the shape of the sample may be any shape, for example, a rectangular shape.
  • the size of the sample may be 50 mm ⁇ 50 mm. If there are multiple samples, they must all be installed in the same orientation. For example, it is preferable to mark all samples in advance so that all the samples are placed in the same orientation.
  • the in-plane phase difference Re is a value measured with light having an incident angle of 0 ° and a wavelength of 589 nm.
  • the in-plane phase difference Re is measured at five points at different positions. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG.
  • two orthogonal virtual lines IL1 and IL2 passing through the center A1 of the sample SA are drawn.
  • the sample is divided into four sections. Then, in each section, one point equidistant from the center A1 and a total of four points A2 to A4 are set, and measurement is performed at a total of five points of the center A1 and points A2 to A4. Then, the arithmetic mean value of 3 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured values of 5 points is defined as the in-plane phase difference Re.
  • the "functional layer” in the present specification may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure. However, in the present specification, the "functional layer” is a layer that exists even when the sheet 12 is used, and does not include a release liner that is peeled off at the time of use. If the release liner is present on the sheet, defects are likely to occur, and a new step different from the above step is likely to occur. If the release liner is provided on the sheet 12, the release liner is wound around the winding core 11 in a peeled state.
  • the sheet 12 includes a winding start end portion 12A (see FIG. 3) and a winding end end portion 12B (see FIG. 1).
  • the winding start end portion 12A is located on the inner side (winding core 11) side of the winding end end portion 12B.
  • the tip surface 12A1 located in the longitudinal direction DR2 at the winding start end portion 12A has a cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11. , It is almost aligned with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, which will be described later.
  • “almost aligned” means that the distance between the tip surface 12A1 and the second end surface 17B in the longitudinal direction DR2 of the winding start end portion 12A is ⁇ 20% of the width W3 (see FIG. 4) of the fixing member 17. It means that it is within.
  • the "+” means that the tip surface 12A1 protrudes from the second end surface 17B, and the “-” means that the tip surface 12A1 is recessed from the second end surface 17B (that is, the second end surface 17B). Protrudes from the tip surface 12A1).
  • the fixing member 17 is for fixing a part of the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the fixing member 17 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. As a result, a part of the sheet 12 can be fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the fixing member 17 is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 and the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, and the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Is fixed. If it is the first lap of the sheet 12, the sheet 12 may be fixed at a portion other than the winding start end portion 12A. In FIG. 3, all the surfaces of the fixing member 17 are in close contact with the winding start end portion 12A, but as shown in FIG. 8, the winding start end portion 12A does not cause a problem when winding the fixing member 17.
  • the first filling portion 14 may be inserted between the winding start end portion 12A and the fixing member 17 as long as the winding start end portion 12A is fixed to the extent that the winding start end portion 12A does not peel off from the fixing member 17 at the time of winding. ..
  • the fixing member 17 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an adhesive member and an adhesive member such as double-sided tape.
  • the fixing member 17 may have elasticity (cushioning property).
  • the adhesive member has adhesiveness on both sides.
  • the thickness of the fixing member 17 is preferably 3 ⁇ m or more and 600 ⁇ m or less. If the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 ⁇ m or more, a part of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 can be reliably fixed, and if it is 600 ⁇ m or less, the deformation of the sheet 12 can be further suppressed.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the fixing member 17 is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, 10 ⁇ m or more, or 20 ⁇ m or more, and the upper limit is preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, 100 ⁇ m or less, or 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the fixing member can be obtained by measuring the thickness of the fixing member at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thickness at the 10 points.
  • the first gap 13 is a gap in contact with the tip surface 12A1 located in the longitudinal direction DR2 (see FIG. 3) at the winding start end 12A.
  • the first gap 13 shown in FIG. 3 includes an outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, a back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, a tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A, and a fixing member 17. It is a gap surrounded by the second end surface 17B of the above.
  • the first gap is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, the back surface of the sheet on the first round, and the tip surface of the winding start end portion.
  • the first gap 13 is a gap that is in contact with the tip surface 12A1 and is also a gap that is located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 on the first lap and is in contact with the second end surface 17B. is there.
  • the second gap 15 is a gap in contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17.
  • the second gap 15 shown in FIG. 3 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17. is there.
  • the first filling portion 14 is filled in the first gap 13. That is, the first filling portion 14 is formed on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A, and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. I'm in contact.
  • the first filling portion is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, the back surface of the sheet on the first round, and the tip surface of the winding start end portion.
  • the term "filling” means a state in which the gap is substantially filled with the material constituting the filling portion. However, there may be voids (for example, air bubbles) inside the filling portion.
  • the sheet 12 has an effective area used as a product and an ineffective area located on both sides of the effective area in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 and is not used as a product. At least in the effective domain. Since the effective region is a region used as a product, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 exists over the entire width of the effective region in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. The first filling portion 14 may be present in the ineffective region as long as it is present in the effective region, but when the first filling portion 14 is present in the ineffective region, the first filling portion 14 is present.
  • the first filling portion 14 does not exist in the ineffective region because there is a possibility that it may protrude from the sheet 12, and the ineffective region is an region that is not used as a product in the first place and it is not necessary to alleviate the above-mentioned step. May be good.
  • the non-effective area varies depending on the intended use of the sheet and the width of the sheet, but is usually an area within 10 mm to 30 mm inward from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet.
  • the first filling portion 14 may be present at both ends of the sheet in the lateral direction, but from the viewpoint of suppressing protrusion, from both ends thereof. It is preferable that they are present at a distance of 1 mm or more, preferably 5 mm or more, and more preferably 10 mm or more toward the central portion of the sheet.
  • the "deformation relaxation length” is used to mean the length until the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the winding start end is alleviated, and the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the fixing member is used. It is sometimes used to mean the length until it becomes invisible.
  • the deformation relaxation length is used to mean the length until the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the fixing member becomes invisible, the deformation relaxation length is caused by the step from the winding start end 12A to the fixing member 17. It is the distance to the point where the deformation to be made is no longer visible.
  • the deformation relaxation length is preferably short, and specifically, it is preferably 100 m or less, 75 m or less, 60 m or less, 50 m or less, or 35 m or less, 20 m or less, 15 m or less. If the deformation relaxation length is 75 m or less, there are more parts where the sheet deformation is not visible, which is good.
  • the deformation relaxation length is the length until the sheet deformation due to the step is not visible as described above, but whether or not there is a step is determined as follows. First, in an indoor environment of 800 Lux or more and 2000 Lux or less, a white light source tube (white LED lamp, white fluorescent lamp, etc.) is reflected on a long sheet, and the contour line of the white light source tube reflected on the sheet is formed.
  • the white light source tube itself may or may not be lit. At the time of observation, it is important that the white light source tube is reflected on the sheet and the contour line can be seen. Therefore, as the observation condition, the one in which the contour line of the white light source tube can be clearly seen is appropriately selected. For example, if the outline of the white light source tube is more visible on the back surface of the sheet than on the front surface of the sheet, the white light source tube may be projected on the back surface of the sheet to check if there is a step. ..
  • an antiglare layer is laminated on the base material as a functional layer, it is possible to judge by the fact that the uneven shape that exerts the antiglare function by pressure is crushed and the shadows appear to be colored in the part where the step exists. is there.
  • various functional layers are laminated and it is difficult for the white light source tube to be reflected on the visible side surface of the roll body or the opposite surface, coloring different from other parts can be seen due to the shape change as described above. It can be judged by that.
  • the edge thickness T1 is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 7 ⁇ m or less, 5 ⁇ m or less, and further preferably 1 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of minimizing the deformation relaxation length.
  • the edge thickness T1 is preferably the above-mentioned thickness, but the surface of the winding core is surface-finished and may have irregularities. Since the material constituting the first filling portion is embedded along the unevenness at the tip portion of the first filling portion, a portion where the edge thickness T1 exists and a portion where the edge thickness T1 does not exist may occur, resulting in unevenness. .. However, if the edge thickness T1 is thin, even if such unevenness occurs, there is no actual harm. Therefore, when unevenness is present and unevenness occurs, it is preferable that the edge thickness T1 is thin. Specifically, for example, the edge thickness T1 is 15 ⁇ m or less, 10 ⁇ m or less, 5 ⁇ m or less, and further 1 ⁇ m. The following is preferable.
  • the edge thickness T1 there is also an effect due to the presence of the edge thickness T1.
  • the winding core is often reused after the roll body is used.
  • the winding core is required to have a reworkability to reuse the winding core by peeling the filling portion in contact with the winding core such as the first filling portion from the winding core, or removing it by cleaning or wiping. .. Therefore, for example, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11 as described later. Further, it is preferable that the sheet 12 can be neatly peeled off from the first filling portion 14 at the portion where the first filling portion 14 is in contact with the winding core 11 and the sheet 12, respectively.
  • the edge thickness T1 is intentionally present.
  • the edge thickness T1 is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the preferable thickness of the edge thickness T1 varies depending on the material of the winding core and the sheet, and the edge thickness T1 may be 1.5 ⁇ m or more, further 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the edge thickness is preferably 30 ⁇ m or less because a new step may be formed due to the thickness.
  • the edge thickness T1 can be measured using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine.
  • a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine examples include the "New View” series manufactured by Zygo.
  • the edge thickness T1 can be obtained as follows using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). First, when all the sheets are fed out, the first filling portion 14 may adhere to the sheet 12 side and peel off from the winding core. When the first filling portion 14 is attached to the fed-out sheet 12 side, one or more samples having a size of 0.5 mm square or more including the tip portion 14A of the first filling portion 14 are obtained from the sheet.
  • the sample is not limited to a square but may be a rectangle (for example, 2 mm ⁇ 5 mm) as long as it has a size of 0.5 mm square or more.
  • the sample shall be cut out from an arbitrary portion containing the first filling portion 14 and to which dirt, fingerprints, etc. are not attached. Then, the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion 14 is measured under the following measurement conditions.
  • the edge thickness T1 can be obtained by measuring the edge thickness at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thicknesses at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses at the 10 points.
  • the thickness T2 (see FIG. 4) of the first filling portion 14 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 is thicker than the total thickness of the fixing member 17 and the sheet 12 when the fixing member 17 is present, and the fixing member When 17 is not present, it is preferably thicker than the thickness of the sheet 12.
  • the thickness T2 is preferably 52 ⁇ m or more and 220 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 52 ⁇ m or more and 150 ⁇ m or less, and the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 ⁇ m or more and less than 50 ⁇ m. In some cases, the thickness T2 is preferably 50.5 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness T2 at the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1 can be measured as follows.
  • the thickness T2 may be measured differently depending on whether the fourth intervening portion 18 is present or not.
  • the measurement can be performed using a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope, and when the fourth interposition portion 18 is present, the measurement can be performed using a stereomicroscope.
  • the thickness T2 is measured by a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope in an environment of a temperature of 23 ⁇ 5 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50 ⁇ 20%.
  • the thickness T2 can be measured with a laser displacement meter as follows. Since the following measurement method utilizes the reflection of laser light, it is particularly effective when the sheet 12 is transparent and the first filling portion is not transparent (for example, when it is colored). First, a jig for rotating the roll body 10 and a laser displacement meter (for example, product name "LK-G30", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) are prepared and arranged at predetermined positions. The jig is inserted into the hole 11B of the winding core 11 in the width direction DR1 and is configured to rotatably hold the roll body 10. Although the LK-G30 is mentioned as the laser displacement meter, an equivalent laser displacement meter such as a successor model may be used instead of the LK-G30.
  • LK-G30 is mentioned as the laser displacement meter
  • an equivalent laser displacement meter such as a successor model may be used instead of the LK-G30.
  • the laser displacement meter includes a laser source and a light receiving element.
  • the laser light emitted from the laser source and reflected on the surface of the first filling portion 14 is received by the light receiving element, and the displacement is determined by the light receiving position of the light receiving element. It is a device that can measure.
  • the location of the laser displacement meter is as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 9, the first position B1 and the second position B2 that divide the width of the sheet 12 into three equal parts are determined. The first position B1 is located on the first end 12G1 side in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 (the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11), and the second position B2 is the second end 12G2 on the opposite side of the first end 12G1. Located on the side.
  • the first laser displacement meter is arranged so that the laser beam is applied to the midpoint C1 of the first position B1 and the first end 12G1, and the second laser displacement meter is arranged at the first position B1 and the second position.
  • the midpoint C2 of position B2 is arranged so that the laser beam is irradiated
  • the third laser displacement meter is arranged so that the midpoint C3 of the second position B2 and the second end 12G2 is irradiated with the laser beam.
  • the roll body 10 is attached to the jig, and the sheet 12 is fed out from the roll body 10 until the first filling portion 14 is exposed.
  • the displacement amount was continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 ⁇ s while rotating the winding core 11 at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s, and the horizontal axis was positioned (mm). ), And a graph (see FIG. 10) in which the vertical axis is the displacement amount (mm) is obtained. This measurement is performed from the tip portion 14A of the first filling portion 14 to the position in contact with the tip end surface 12A1.
  • the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is defined as the height of the winding core 11, and is defined as the reference height.
  • the difference in the amount of displacement of the first filling portion 14 is defined as the thickness of the first filling portion 14. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
  • the displacement amount increases from the tip portion 14A at the location where the first filling portion 14 exists, but the displacement amount sharply decreases after the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1. Therefore, the position E1 on the position displacement curve where the displacement amount starts to decrease sharply is found in the graph. Then, by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount at the position E1, the thickness T2 at the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1 is obtained.
  • the thickness T2 can be measured with a stereomicroscope as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the first filling portion 14, and the sheet 12 on the second lap is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the thickness T2 of the first filling portion 14 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION). Although the digital microscope VHX-7000 is mentioned as the stereomicroscope, an equivalent stereomicroscope such as a successor model may be used instead of the VHX-7000.
  • a stereomicroscope for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
  • the length of the first filling portion 14 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 is the length of the roll body 10. It may be smaller than the width W2 of the sheet 12 as long as it is equal to or larger than the effective area for commercialization.
  • the first filling portion 14 preferably contains a coloring material or a light emitting material. Since the first filling portion 14 contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, it is easy to visually confirm when the first filling portion 14 protrudes from the roll body 10. In addition, it becomes easy to check the thickness, length, and the like of the first filling portion 14.
  • the color of the first filling portion 14 is not particularly limited, but the existence of the first filling portion 14 can be surely grasped, and the components of the first filling portion 14 are wound.
  • White or gray is preferable from the viewpoint that it is inconspicuous even if it adheres to the taking device.
  • the first filling portion 14 When the first filling portion 14 is colored, the first filling portion 14 contains a coloring material. When the first filling portion 14 is a cured product of the coating material, it is preferable that the coloring material does not inhibit the curing.
  • the coloring material may be either a pigment or a dye, and may be either an organic coloring material or an inorganic coloring material. Examples of specific coloring materials include titanium oxide, carbon black, or a mixture thereof.
  • the content of the coloring material in the first filling portion 14 is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less. If the content of the coloring material is 0.1% by mass or more, the first filling portion 14 can be visually confirmed, and if it is 50% by mass or less, the coloring material is an inorganic material or an organic material. However, the reworkability can be maintained well.
  • the light emitting material is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a fluorescent material and a phosphorescent material.
  • the fluorescent material or the phosphorescent material in the first filling portion 14 is emitted by irradiating the first filling portion 14 with light such as ultraviolet rays or visible light. Can be made to.
  • the shape of the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is preferably convex upward. If the shape of the surface 14B is convex upward, the sheet 12 can be lifted more than concave downward, so that the step can be alleviated. Whether or not the shape of the surface 14B is convex upward can be determined from the graph of the position displacement curve as in the thickness T2. Specifically, first, in the above graph, since the position is higher than the height of the winding core 11 at the position where the first filling portion 14 exists, the displacement amount increases. The position E2 (see FIG. 10), which is the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the point where the displacement amount starts to increase, is grasped. Then, a virtual line IL3 (see FIG.
  • the shape of the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is It can be judged that it is convex upward, and the number of peaks located below the virtual line IL3 among the number of peaks of 50% or more of the number of peaks of the position displacement curve existing between the positions E1 and E2. If the ratio is less than 50%, it can be determined that the shape of the first filling portion 14 is concave downward. If the virtual line IL3 and the position displacement curve overlap, it is determined that the virtual line IL3 is concave downward. In the graph for determining the shape of the first filling portion 14, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
  • the average distance D1 from the virtual line IL3 to the position displacement curve in the vertical axis direction is preferably 0.003 mm or more.
  • the sheet 12 can be effectively lifted, so that the above-mentioned step can be further alleviated.
  • the lower limit of the average distance D1 is more preferably 0.01 mm or more.
  • the upper limit of the average distance D1 is preferably 0.1 mm or less, more preferably 0.07 mm or less, because if it is excessively convex, it may cause a new step.
  • the average distance D1 is defined by using the virtual line IL3 as a reference line, reading 7 points of peaks that are convex above the virtual line IL3, and averaging the values of 5 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value. It is a thing.
  • the peak to be read is the mountain part, and a large part is selected.
  • the slope of the virtual line IL3 with respect to the horizontal axis of the graph of the position displacement curve is preferably 0.0020 or more and 0.0130 or less, more preferably 0.0030 or more and 0.0070 or less, and 0.0050 or more and 0. It is more preferably .0060 or less. If the inclination is 0.0050 or more, the filling material can be filled without dents, and if it is 0.0060 or less, the filling material can be filled without large protrusions.
  • the lower limit of this inclination is preferably 0.0020 or more, 0.0030 or more, or 0.040 or more, and the upper limit is preferably 0.0130 or less, 0.0120 or less, or 0.0100 or less. ..
  • the thickness of the first filling portion 14 gradually increases from the vicinity of the separation position P1 toward the tip surface 12A1.
  • the thickness of the first filling portion 14 By changing the thickness of the first filling portion 14 in this way, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in height of the winding core 11 in the sheet 12 in the radial direction DR3 (normal direction of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the outer peripheral surface 11A). , The step caused by the winding start end 12A can be alleviated.
  • the deformation will remain due to this change in thickness, and there is a risk that the step caused by the winding start end will not be sufficiently alleviated. Therefore, it is preferable to secure a sufficient length of the first filling portion with respect to the thickness of the sheet.
  • the length of the first filling portion is increased to have other effects such as winding, the length of the first filling portion is intentionally made shorter than the optimum state to obtain the optimum first.
  • the deformation relaxation length is longer than that of the state having the length of the filling portion, but the deformation relaxation length can be shortened as compared with the case where the first filling portion is not provided. Therefore, when the fourth intervening portion 18 is present as shown in FIG.
  • the 7) along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 in the first filling portion 14 to the thickness T2 is preferably 90 or more.
  • the lower limit of these ratios is preferably 100 or more, 110 or more, 120 or more, or 140 or more from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length.
  • the upper limit of these ratios is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1200 or less, 1000 or less, 800 or less, 500 or less, or 300 or less.
  • the length L1 is the length from the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14 along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 to the end on the separation position P1 side.
  • the length L2 is the length from the position directly above the tip surface 12A1 along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 to the end on the position side where the sheet 12 on the first lap and the sheet 12 on the second lap come into contact with each other.
  • the length L1 and the length L2 can be obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve in the same manner as the thickness T2. Specifically, first, the existence of the fourth intervening portion is confirmed by the method described later. When the fourth intervening portion is present, the position E1 and the position E2 are found from the graph of the position displacement curve.
  • a virtual line IL4 (see FIG. 10) that passes through the above position E2 and is perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line is drawn. Then, assuming that the intersection of the virtual line IL4 and the displacement amount 0 mm line is the position E3, the total length of the length L1 and the length L2 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the position E2 and the position E3. Further, when the fourth intervening portion does not exist, the length L1 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the position E2 and the position E3 by the above method.
  • the length L1 is better from the viewpoint of alleviating the step.
  • the length L1 is preferably 110 ⁇ m or more, and the deformation mitigation is further improved. In order to shorten the length, it is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more.
  • the length L1 is too long, it becomes difficult to form the first convex filling portion upward due to processing, and the first filling portion may have wavy thickness unevenness. Therefore, the length L1 The upper limit is preferably 100 mm or less from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the upwardly convex first filling portion 14 and suppressing wavy thickness unevenness.
  • the above (length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2 and length L1 / thickness T2 can roughly represent the shape of the first filling portion 14, but more appropriately convex upward in the first filling portion 14.
  • the longitudinal direction DR2 and the winding core 11 of the sheet 12 with respect to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14.
  • Area S1 see FIG.
  • the total ratio ((area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2) of the area S2 (see FIG. 6) of the region R2 sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface 11A and the surface 18A of the fourth intervening portion 18 is 3.0 or more. Is preferable.
  • the area S1 of the region R1 in FIG. 6 represents the cross-sectional area of the first filling portion 14. Further, the area S2 of the region R2 in FIG.
  • FIG. 6 represents the total of the cross-sectional area of the fourth intervening portion 18, the cross-sectional area of the sheet 12 in the region R2, and the cross-sectional area of the fixing member 17 in the region R2.
  • FIG. 6 shows a state in which the sheet 12 on the first filling portion 14 and the fourth interposing portion 18 is peeled off to expose the first filling portion 14 and the fourth interposing portion 18.
  • the winding in the plane (the plane represented by FIG. 7) including the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11 with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion 14.
  • the ratio of the area S1 of the region R1 sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface 11A of the core 11 and the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 3.0 or more.
  • the step can be further relaxed.
  • the lower limit of these ratios is preferably 4.0 or more, 5.0 or more, 6.0 or more, 7.0 or more, or 8.0 or more from the viewpoint of further alleviating the step.
  • the upper limit of these ratios is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 50.0 or less, further 17.0 or less.
  • the sum of the areas S1 and the area S2 and the area S1 are the products of the thickness t at each measurement point MP and the width d between the measurement points MP in the region from the position E2 to the position E3 as shown in FIG. It can be calculated by calculating and summing it.
  • the width between the measurement points can be obtained from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core. Specifically, the width between the measurement points can be obtained by the following mathematical formula (3).
  • d ( ⁇ m) is the width between measurement points
  • ⁇ T (s) is the sampling period
  • r (rpm) is the rotation speed of the winding core
  • ⁇ (mm) is the winding core. It is the outer diameter
  • is the pi.
  • d ⁇ T ⁇ (r / 60) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 1000...
  • the winding core is often reused after the roll body is used, so reworkability is required. Therefore, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11. If the reworkability is good, the winding core can be reused after the roll body is used.
  • the "state in which the winding core can be reused" in the present specification means a state in which the entire outer peripheral surface of the winding core is visually observed and there is no deposit that causes a step. The method of removal depends on the filling material used for the first filling portion. When the crosslink density is high and hard as in the hard coat layer used for display devices, the thinner the edge thickness T1, the easier it may be removed.
  • the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11, the first filling portion 14 can be easily peeled off, and thus has good reworkability.
  • the first filling portion 14 is formed by cleaning or wiping the winding core 11 or at the end of the first filling portion 14 with a blade-shaped object so as not to damage the winding core 11, and the winding core 14 is slowly wound with a finger or the like. It is more preferable that it can be peeled off from 11. Further, it is more preferable that the first filling portion 14 does not substantially contain an adhesive component.
  • the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 When a 90 ° peeling test is performed in which the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is peeled perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, it may be peeled from the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 with a tensile force of less than 2.0N. preferable.
  • the constituent material When the constituent material is peeled off with a tensile force of less than 2.0 N, the first filling portion 14 can be easily peeled off, so that it has good reworkability and has a tensile force of 0.3 N or less.
  • the constituent material When the constituent material is peeled off, the first filling portion 14 can be peeled off more easily, so that it has excellent reworkability.
  • the 90 ° peeling test can be performed using a sample and a spring type tension gauge (manufactured by Oba Keiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. Then, the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is cut out to a size of 20 mm ⁇ 100 mm by a cutting machine or the like to obtain 10 samples provided on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • a spring type tension gauge manufactured by Oba Keiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.
  • one end of the sample is held by a spring type tension gauge, and the tensile force is measured in an environment where the temperature is 25 ° C. and the relative humidity is 30% or more and 70% or less, and the winding core 11 is perpendicular to the outer peripheral surface 11A.
  • the one end is pulled up to peel the sample at a peeling speed of 10 mm / sec.
  • the arithmetic mean value of the tensile force of 8 samples excluding the sample having the maximum tensile force and the sample having the minimum tensile force was calculated as the tensile force of the above constituent materials. And.
  • the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 3.0 MPa or more.
  • the lower limit of the tensile strength of the constituent material is more preferably 3.2 MPa or more or 3.4 MPa or more from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability.
  • the upper limit of the tensile strength of the constituent material is 16.0 MPa or less, 8 in order to obtain good cushioning property. It is preferably 0.0 MPa or less, or 5.5 MPa or less.
  • the tensile strength of the above constituent materials can be measured using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. .. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. After that, the material layer is removed from the mold, and a punching blade (for example, a tension No.
  • a punching blade for example, a tension No.
  • dumbbell-shaped punching blade manufactured by Polymer Instruments Co., Ltd.
  • the sample is then held in an environment of 25 ° C. for 24 hours.
  • both ends of the sample in the longitudinal direction are gripped by the pair of grippers of the Tencilon universal testing machine, and the initial grip distance between the grippers is 20 mm and the tensile speed is 100 mm in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%.
  • the arithmetic mean value of the tensile strengths of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the tensile strength of the constituent material.
  • the elongation of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 during cutting is preferably 200% or more.
  • the lower limit of the elongation during cutting of the constituent material is more preferably 250% or more, 300% or more, or 350% or more from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability.
  • the upper limit of the elongation at the time of cutting of the constituent material may be 850% or less, 600% or less, or 500% or less.
  • the elongation during cutting of the above constituent materials is measured by measuring the tensile strength using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. It can be measured in the same manner as the method.
  • the tear strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 1.0 N / mm or more.
  • the lower limit of the tear strength of the constituent material is 2.0 N / mm or more, 4.0 N / mm or more, 6.0 N / mm or more, 8.0 N / mm or more, or 10 N from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability. It is more preferably / mm or more.
  • the upper limit of the tear strength of the constituent material may be 35 N / mm or less, 30 N / mm or less, or 25 N / mm or less.
  • the tear strength of the above constituent materials can be measured using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6252: 2007. ..
  • the sample shall be prepared by the method described in the column of tensile strength.
  • the hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 measured by the durometer type A is preferably 95 ° or less.
  • the pressure at the time of winding is always applied to the tip of the first filling portion, and the pressure may be further applied due to aging and environmental changes (temperature, humidity and / or pressure).
  • the tip of the first filling it is effective that the tip of the first filling is thin, but the hardness of the constituent material measured by the durometer type A is 95 ° or less.
  • a soft resin such as the above, the first filling portion is deformed by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet, and the step caused by the tip portion of the first filling portion can be suppressed.
  • the upper limit of the hardness is more preferably 95 ° or less, 80 ° or less, 70 ° or less, or 50 ° or less.
  • the lower limit of the hardness is preferably 10 ° or more, 15 ° or more, 20 ° or more, or 25 ° or more.
  • Hardness measurement with durometer type A is performed in accordance with JIS K6253: 1997. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. Then, the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is cut out by a cutting machine or the like to obtain 10 samples having a size of 100 mm ⁇ 100 mm and a thickness of 10 mm.
  • the hardness is measured in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%.
  • the arithmetic mean value of the hardness of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the hardness of the constituent material.
  • the coating material flows so as to alleviate the step caused by the winding start end, but when the coating material is a curable polymer composition, if it shrinks during the subsequent curing, In particular, when the fourth intervening portion does not exist, the step is not sufficiently relaxed at the first filling portion, and the sheet may be slightly deformed. Therefore, the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 1.5% or less. When the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material is 1.5% or less, the first filling portion having excellent dimensional stability can be formed, so that the step can be sufficiently relaxed at the first filling portion.
  • the upper limit of the linear shrinkage rate of the first filling portion 14 is more preferably 1.3% or less, 1.0% or less, 0.7% or less from the viewpoint of more sufficiently relaxing the step. Further, the lower limit of the heat shrinkage rate may be 0% or more.
  • the linear shrinkage rate of the above constituent materials can be measured as follows. First, a mold having a thickness of 2 mm and a size of 130 mm square or more is prepared, and a coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into the mold and cured to obtain a sample (molded product). After the sample is completely cured, the size of the sample is measured and compared with the inside size of the mold to obtain the linear shrinkage ratio based on JIS K6249: 2003. The arithmetic mean value of the linear shrinkage rate of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material.
  • the first filling portion 14 can be formed by flowing or deforming the filling material.
  • the filling material exhibits fluidity, it does not necessarily have to always exhibit fluidity if it exhibits fluidity before winding the sheet or at the time of winding the sheet.
  • the filling material include a coating material or a filling tape.
  • the coating material is a material that can be coated, and has fluidity at the time of coating or winding, for example.
  • the coating material having fluidity include not only a liquid but also a material that changes from a liquid to a solid, a solid that has fluidity by heating or the like, or a curable material.
  • the coating material is a curable material
  • the first filling portion 14 is formed from a cured product of the curable material.
  • coating material examples include curable polymer compositions, thermoplastic resins, oils, starches, adhesives, adhesives, sol and the like.
  • the curable polymer composition examples include a curable resin composition and a curable rubber composition.
  • a thermoplastic resin is used as the coating material, it is necessary to make it fluid by heating at the time of coating and winding.
  • the filling tape is a tape that becomes the first filling portion 14 by being filled in the first gap 13, and has a property of spreading by a capillary phenomenon under the pressure at the time of winding the sheet 12, or a gel tape.
  • the filling tape is used by being attached to or in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the first filling portion is required to have reworkability.
  • the filling material for example, a coating material
  • the sealant material firmly adheres to the winding core, so that the reworkability is inferior.
  • the molding material is premised on being removed from the mold, and therefore has excellent reworkability. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reworkability, a molding material is preferable as a filling material (for example, a coating material).
  • the shear viscosity of the filling material (for example, coating material) at 25 ° C. and a shear rate of 1 / s is preferably 500 Pa ⁇ s or less.
  • a great deal of labor is required.
  • the shear viscosity of the filling material is 500 Pa ⁇ s or less, the filling material can be spread into a desired shape by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet, so that a special step of spreading the filling material. Can be omitted.
  • the shear viscosity is more preferably 200 Pa ⁇ s or less.
  • the shear viscosity is preferably 300 Pa ⁇ s or less, 100 Pa ⁇ s or less, or 50 Pa ⁇ s or less from the viewpoint of easily spreading the filling material.
  • the shear viscosity is preferably 10 Pa ⁇ s or more and 75 Pa ⁇ s or less, and more preferably 20 Pa ⁇ s or more and 50 Pa ⁇ s or less, from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length. If the shear viscosity is 10 Pa ⁇ s or more, the fluidity does not become too high, so that the deformation of the sheet 12 can be alleviated, and if it is 75 Pa ⁇ s or less, the deformation due to the tip of the first filling portion can be suppressed. ..
  • the shear viscosity is 15 Pa ⁇ s or more, and further 20 Pa ⁇ s or more, from the viewpoint of further suppressing the protrusion of the filling material, the filling material protrudes from between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 at the time of coating. Is preferable because it can suppress.
  • the shear viscosity is preferably 60 Pa ⁇ s or more. When the shear viscosity is 60 Pa ⁇ s or more, the fluidity of the filling material is low, and it is possible to prevent the filling material from squeezing out from between the winding core and the sheet due to the pressure at the time of application and / or at the time of winding.
  • the shear viscosity of the filling material can be measured using a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device (for example, manufactured by Anton Pearl Japan Co., Ltd.). Specifically, using a parallel plate having a diameter of 25 mm, the shear viscosity of the filling material at a shear rate of 1 [1 / s] was measured 10 times in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%. The shear viscosity is obtained by obtaining the arithmetic average value of 8 shear viscosities excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 measured shear viscosities.
  • a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device for example, manufactured by Anton Pearl Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the filling material (for example, coating material) does not contain volatile components such as a solvent. Since the filling material does not contain a volatile component, the shape change such as cracks in the first filling portion 14 is small, and sheet marks are unlikely to occur.
  • the coating material can be coated when the first filling portion is formed, but it is preferable that the coating material has low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10.
  • low fluidity in the state of the roll body means that the coating material does not protrude from the roll body during transportation or production of the roll body.
  • the coating material can be applied. However, if the coating material has high fluidity in the state of the roll body 10, it may occur during transportation. At the time of manufacturing or the like, the first filling portion may protrude and become dirty.
  • the coating material is a material that can be applied at the time of forming the first filling portion 14 and has low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10
  • the first filling portion 14 can be formed in the first gap 13.
  • a curable polymer composition can be mentioned as a material having low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10, although it can be applied at the time of forming such a first filling portion.
  • Room temperature curable polymer compositions include, for example, two-component curable polymer compositions composed of a main agent and a curing agent, and one-component curable polymer compositions that are cured by moisture in the air. Since the portion of the first filling portion existing in the center of the sheet is in a substantially sealed state in a state where the sheet is wound, it is difficult for air to come into contact with this portion, and there is a possibility that the sheet will not be sufficiently cured. On the other hand, the two-component curable polymer composition can be cured only by time management because the reaction starts when the main agent and the curing agent are mixed. Further, the two-component curable polymer composition is preferable in that it is superior in storage stability to the one-component curable polymer composition.
  • the ionizing radiation curable polymer composition examples include a composition containing a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group.
  • Ionizing radiation examples include visible light, ultraviolet rays, X-rays, electron beams, ⁇ rays, ⁇ rays, and ⁇ rays.
  • thermosetting polymer composition and the room temperature curable polymer composition examples include urethane resin compositions, epoxy resin compositions, and silicone compositions. Among these, a silicone composition can be preferably used.
  • silicone composition examples include a silicone gel composition and a silicone rubber composition, both of which are suitable because they can easily alleviate the above-mentioned steps and deformations.
  • the "silicone gel cured product (silicone gel)" formed by curing the silicone gel composition in the present specification is a cured product containing organopolysiloxane as a main component and having a very low crosslink density, and is JIS K2220. : It means that the degree of needle insertion by 2013 (1/4 cone) is 10 to 150. This corresponds to a rubber hardness measurement by JIS K6249: 2003 in which the measured value (rubber hardness value) is 0, and the hardness is so low (that is, soft) that it does not show an effective rubber hardness value. In this respect, It is different from the so-called silicone rubber composition and the cured silicone rubber product (rubber-like elastic body).
  • Silicone rubber compositions include one-component curable silicone rubber compositions and two-component curable silicone rubber compositions.
  • the one-component curable silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable rubber composition that cures at room temperature and an addition reaction rubber composition that cures by heating.
  • the two-component curable silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable rubber composition and an addition reaction rubber composition that cure at room temperature, and an addition reaction rubber composition that cures by heating. It is also possible to obtain an ionizing radiation curable rubber composition by modifying the silicone rubber composition with another resin.
  • any curing method can be used, but among these, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition is preferable because it can be cured uniformly and has excellent storage stability.
  • silicone rubber compositions examples include RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanizing) silicone rubber compositions.
  • the RTV silicone rubber composition has a smaller shrinkage rate and better dimensional stability than the ionizing radiation curable polymer composition, and has excellent fluidity before curing, so that the core 11 and the sheet 12 or the sheet It easily penetrates into the gap between the 12 and has low fluidity after curing. Further, since this RTV silicone rubber composition has deep curability, the curing reaction tends to proceed uniformly regardless of the thickness at the time of coating. In addition, since this composition is also excellent in releasability, it is easy to peel off the cured product so that it can be used again as a roll.
  • the RTV silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition, an addition reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition, and the like, depending on the curing reaction mechanism. In the present invention, either can be preferably used.
  • the condensation reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferable in that there is no curing inhibition, and the addition reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably in that the curing shrinkage rate is even smaller.
  • a material having a larger curing shrinkage tends to have a larger thickness of the coating material required for alleviating the step. Therefore, especially in a thin sheet (for example, the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 ⁇ m to 45 ⁇ m), the addition reaction A curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably used.
  • the RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably a liquid silicone rubber LSR (Liquid Silicone Rubber) because it does not require a special processing device.
  • LSR Liquid Silicone Rubber
  • the various compositions described above may contain a functional component in order to exert a desired function.
  • the silicone rubber composition since the silicone rubber composition is generally an electrical insulator, it may be charged by contact with the winding core 11, the sheet 12, or other substances.
  • the silicone rubber composition may contain a conductive filler. By doing so, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from being mixed in, so that it is possible to suppress the cause of the above-mentioned step.
  • Examples of the conductive filler mixed in the silicone rubber composition include carbon black (acetylene black and Ketjen black), silver powder, gold-plated silica and graphite, and conductive zinc oxide. Further, in recent years, an ion conductive silicone rubber has also been developed, and this ion conductive silicone rubber can also be used.
  • any component can be added to the silicone gel composition as long as the object of the present invention is not impaired.
  • the optional component include a reaction inhibitor, an inorganic filler, an organopolysiloxane containing no silicon atom-bonded hydrogen atom and a silicon atom-bonded alkenyl group, a heat resistance imparting agent, a flame retardant imparting agent, and a thixo property imparting agent.
  • examples include pigments and dyes.
  • the reaction inhibitor is a component for suppressing the reaction of the above composition, and specific examples thereof include reaction inhibitors such as acetylene-based, amine-based, carboxylic acid ester-based, and phosphite ester-based. Be done.
  • inorganic filler examples include fumed silica, crystalline silica, precipitated silica, hollow filler, silsesquioxane, fumed titanium dioxide, magnesium oxide, zinc oxide, iron oxide, aluminum hydroxide, magnesium carbonate, and calcium carbonate.
  • the adhesive may be a denture stabilizer.
  • the denture stabilizer can be roughly classified into a denture adhesive and a home reliner, and as the adhesive, a denture adhesive can be used among the denture stabilizers.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive is classified into, for example, a powder type, a cream type, or a tape type like a denture pressure-sensitive adhesive
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive used as a coating material is a powder-type or cream-type pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive itself may be sticky, or may be sticky due to moisture.
  • the powder type pressure-sensitive adhesive for example, absorbs water when it comes into contact with water and exhibits stickiness.
  • the cream-type pressure-sensitive adhesive is, for example, a sticky powder component creamed with an ointment base, and exhibits stickiness.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive preferably contains a water-soluble polymer.
  • the water-soluble polymer is not particularly limited, and is, for example, alginate, alginates (for example, sodium alginate, potassium alginate, ammonium alginate, alginate ester, etc.), and natural polymer compounds (for example, arabic gum, tragant gum, locust bean gum).
  • Xanthan gum guar gum
  • agar gelatin
  • karaya gum karaya gum
  • carrageenan etc.
  • Cellulosic polymers eg, methyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, etc.
  • polyethylene glycol polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • polyvinyl alcohol examples thereof include methyl vinyl ether, carboxyvinyl polymer, copolymer of acrylamide and acrylic acid, sodium polyacrylate, polyethylene oxide and the like.
  • These water-soluble polymers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is preferable.
  • Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is a sodium salt of polyvalent carboxymethyl ether of cellulose, also known as carmellose sodium.
  • Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is a powder that, when moistened, hydrates and exhibits adhesiveness or elasticity, thus imparting additional adhesiveness to the adhesive.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive as a coating material is further oil-based base, aqueous base, powder base, gum base, excipient, emulsifier, wetting agent, pH adjuster, viscosity adjuster, plasticizer. Agents, pigments, etc. can be blended.
  • these bases and additives include bases and additives that have been widely used in denture stabilizers.
  • an oil-based base is used as a base when a pressure-sensitive adhesive is prepared in a paste-like form such as a cream type.
  • the oil-based base include mineral oil components (for example, liquid paraffin, petrolatum, gelled hydrocarbons, etc.) usually used for non-aqueous adhesives (for example, cream type).
  • New Polygrip (registered trademark) S As cream type adhesives, for example, New Polygrip (registered trademark) S, New Polygrip (registered trademark) V, New Polygrip (registered trademark) additive-free, Polydent (registered trademark) NEO tooth stabilizer (all) Glaxo Smith Kline Consumer Healthcare Japan Co., Ltd.), Tough Grip (registered trademark) cream-free (Kobayashi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), Collect (registered trademark) cream (Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) can be used. it can.
  • the adhesive When the coating material is an adhesive, the adhesive may be a denture stabilizer home reliner (cushion type).
  • the adhesive agent enhances the adhesive force by improving the edge closing effect.
  • Such an adhesive may contain, for example, a water-insoluble polymer.
  • the water-insoluble polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyvinyl-based resins such as vinyl acetate-based resins.
  • Polydent (registered trademark) cushion GaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare Japan
  • Tough Grip registered trademark
  • Tough grip registered trademark
  • Soft tough grip Registered trademark
  • Cushion Collect registered trademark
  • EZ manufactured by Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.
  • New Riodent White New Riodent Pink (all manufactured by Lion Corporation), etc.
  • the coating material is a sol
  • examples of the sol include silica sol, alumina sol, and metal oxide sol such as zirconia sol, titanium oxide sol, cerium oxide sol, tin oxide sol, and niobium oxide sol.
  • the viscosity at the time of coating the coating material It is desirable to adjust as appropriate.
  • the coating material is applied linearly, and the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably an amount such that the thicknesses T1 to T3 in the above range of the first filling portion 14 can be obtained.
  • the lower limit of the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably 0.2 cm 3 / m or more. If the above-mentioned coating amount of the coating material is too small, for example, when the coating material is applied with a syringe, air is bitten and it becomes difficult to discharge the coating material from the syringe, or when the sheet is run and applied, the coating is cut off. However, if the coating amount is 0.2 cm 3 / m or more, such a situation can be suppressed.
  • the upper limit of the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably 3.5 cm 3 / m or less. If the coating amount of the coating material is too large, the coating material may hang down due to its own weight or a new step may be generated. However, if the coating amount is 3.5 cm 3 / m or less, this is the case. Can be suppressed.
  • the lower limit of the coating amount is more preferably 0.3 cm 3 / m or more, and the upper limit of the coating amount is 2.0 cm 3 / m or less or 1.5 cm 3 / m or less. preferable.
  • Examples of the constituent material of the filling tape include the pressure-sensitive adhesive, the adhesive, the gel and the like described in the above section of the coating material.
  • Examples of the gel include a silicone gel formed from the silicone gel composition, an acrylic gel formed from the acrylic gel composition, a polyolefin gel, a polyurethane gel, a butadiene gel, an isoprene gel, and a butyl gel. Examples thereof include styrene butadiene gels, ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer gels, ethylene-propylene-diene ternary copolymer gels, and fluorine gels.
  • filling tape for example, Touch Collect (registered trademark) II (manufactured by Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) or ⁇ GEL (registered trademark) (manufactured by Taica Corporation) can be used.
  • the length of the filling tape is preferably equal to or greater than the width of the effective region in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the first filling portion can be formed over the entire width of the effective region, whereby the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be formed over the entire width of the effective region. It is possible to alleviate the step caused by.
  • the filling tape is separated from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 inward by 1 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 30 mm or more, respectively, in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. It is preferable that they are arranged in such a manner.
  • the length of the filling tape means the length of the DR1 in the width direction of the filling tape.
  • the width of the filling tape is preferably 5 mm or more. By setting the width of the filling tape to such a width, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12.
  • the lower limit of the width of the filling tape is more preferably 6 mm or more, 7 mm or more, or 8 mm or more.
  • the upper limit of the width of the filling tape is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the filling tapes.
  • the width of the filling tape means the length of the DR2 in the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12 in the filling tape.
  • the thickness of the filling tape is preferably equal to or greater than the height of the upper surface 12A2 of the winding start end 12A. By setting the thickness of the filling tape to such a thickness, the filling tape can be spread over a wide range when the sheet 12 is wound, so that the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be more effectively relaxed. Can be done.
  • the specific thickness of the filling tape is, for example, 52 ⁇ m or more and 220 ⁇ m or less when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 ⁇ m or more and 200 ⁇ m or less, and 50 when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 ⁇ m or more and less than 50 ⁇ m. It is preferably 5.5 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the second filling portion 16 gradually decreases toward the vicinity of the arrival position P2 where the sheet 12 on the first lap from the first end surface 17A reaches the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the length of the second filling portion 16 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 is for commercialization in the roll body 10. As long as it is equal to or larger than the effective area, it may be smaller than the width W2 of the sheet 12.
  • the first filling portion tends to be softer than the sheet, if the height at the position of contacting the tip surface of the winding start end portion in the first filling portion is the same height as the upper surface of the winding start end portion, the sheet When winding, there is a possibility that a step may occur at the corner between the tip surface and the upper surface of the winding start end.
  • the fourth intervening portion 18 when the fourth intervening portion 18 is formed, the fourth intervening portion 18 can absorb the difference in hardness between the first filling portion 14 and the sheet 12, so that the tip of the winding start end portion 12A The step between the corners of the surface 12A1 and the upper surface 12A2 can be reduced. Further, the presence of the fourth intervening portion 18 can suppress the concentration of stress on the stepped portion caused by the winding start end portion 12A, and the deformation of the sheet 12 after the third lap can be moderated. Therefore, this step can be alleviated.
  • the fourth intervening portion 18 preferably contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, similarly to the first filling portion 14. Since the fourth intervening portion 18 contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, it is easy to visually recognize when the fourth intervening portion 18 protrudes from the roll body 10. In addition, it becomes easy to confirm the existence of the fourth intervening portion 18. Since the coloring material and the light emitting material contained in the fourth intervening portion 18 are the same as the coloring material and the light emitting material described in the column of the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the sheet 12 is transparent and the fourth intervening portion 18 is colored, it can be easily visually confirmed whether or not the fourth intervening portion 18 is present. Specifically, first, the sheet 12 is fed out from the roll body 10 until the surface becomes the sheet 12 on the second lap. Then, in the roll body 10 having the sheet 12 on the second lap as the surface, the vicinity of the winding start end portion 12A is visually observed, and whether or not there is a colored portion on the winding start end portion 12A is observed. If there is a colored portion on the winding start end portion 12A, it can be determined that the fourth intervening portion 18 is present, and if there is no colored portion, the fourth intervening portion 18 is present. It can be judged not to.
  • the fourth interposition portion 18 contains a light emitting material, whether or not the fourth interposition portion 18 is present can be easily visually confirmed in the same manner as described above. ..
  • the light emitting material is a material that emits light by irradiation with light such as ultraviolet rays or visible light, the light is irradiated to confirm whether or not the fourth intervening portion 18 is present.
  • the thickness T3 (see FIG. 4) of the fourth interposition portion 18 is preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 110 ⁇ m or less.
  • the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding an adverse effect on the winding of the sheet 12.
  • the thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 exceeds 110 ⁇ m, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected.
  • the thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding the adverse effect of winding the sheet 12.
  • the thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 is the maximum thickness of the fourth intervening portion 18.
  • the thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 shall be measured as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the fourth intervening portion 18, and the sheet 12 on the second lap is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
  • a stereomicroscope for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
  • the fourth interposition portion 18 can be formed by applying or deforming a filling material.
  • the filling material include a coating material and a filling tape. Since the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape are the same as the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape described in the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the constituent material of the fourth interposition portion 18 may be the same as the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, but may be different.
  • the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17 are substantially aligned in a cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11.
  • the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 may protrude from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling portion 16, and the second filling portion 16 is located between the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 and the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first lap, and is located on the second end surface 17B side.
  • the third filling portion 22 may be filled in the three gaps 21.
  • the third gap 21 is a gap in contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the third gap 21 shown in FIG. 12 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. is there.
  • the second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, the first filling portion 13 is filled with the first filling portion 13. Since it is sufficient that 14 is filled, the second filling portion 16 does not have to be filled in the second gap 15 as in the roll body 30 shown in FIG.
  • the roll body 30 has a hollow second gap 15.
  • the first filling portion 14 is filled in the first gap 13, but the second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15 from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the fixing member 17. Therefore, it is not necessary that the first filling portion 14 is not filled in the first gap 13 as in the roll body 40 shown in FIG. In the roll body 40, the first gap 13 is hollow.
  • the roll body 10 includes one fixing member 17, but may include two or more fixing members as shown in FIG.
  • the fixing member 51 is provided on the first end surface 17A side of the fixing member 17.
  • the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 protrudes from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, the step caused by the fixing member 17 is suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling portion 16 and the third gap 21 is filled with the third filling portion 22.
  • a second gap 52 on the first end surface 51A side of the fixing member 51 which will be described later, is filled with a second. It is preferable that the filling portion 53 is filled, and the third filling portion 55 on the second end surface 51B side of the fixing member 51, which will be described later, is filled with the third filling portion 55.
  • the fixing member 51 has a second end surface 51B opposite to the first end surface 51A. Both the first end surface 51A and the second end surface 51B extend in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. Since the fixing member 51 is the same as the fixing member 17, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the second gap 52 is a gap in contact with the first end surface 51A of the fixing member 51.
  • the second gap 52 shown in FIG. 15 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the first end surface 51A of the fixing member 51. is there.
  • the third gap 54 is a gap in contact with the second end surface 51B of the fixing member 51.
  • the third gap 54 shown in FIG. 15 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first lap, and the second end surface 51B of the fixing member 51. is there.
  • the roll body 10 includes the fixing member 17, it does not have to be provided with the fixing member 17 as in the roll body 60 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 13, FIG. 15, and FIG. 16 do not show the length L1, the length L2, the thickness T2, the thickness T3, the area S1, and the area S2, but the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 show the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60.
  • Length L1, Length L2, Thickness T2, Thickness T3, (Length L1 + L2) / Thickness T2, (Area S1 + S2) / Thickness T2 are the same as in the case of the roll body 10.
  • the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 all include the fourth intervening portion 18, but the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 do not have to include the fourth intervening portion.
  • the length L1 / thickness T2 and the area S1 / thickness T2 are the same as in the case of the roll body 10 shown in FIG.
  • the coating material 201 is applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 17B by using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe. , 202 is applied.
  • the coating material 201 is applied so as to come into contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 202 is applied so as to come into contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 may be coated at the same time using two coating devices.
  • the coating material 201 is applied so as to be in contact with the second end surface 17B, and the coating material 202 is applied so as to be in contact with the first end surface 17A, but the coating material has high wettability and is applied.
  • the viscosity of the material is low, when it is applied so as to come into contact with the second end face or the first end face, the coated material impregnates between the winding start end and the fixing member, and the winding start end and the sheet It may get wet and spread between the back surfaces.
  • it can be made into a preferable state by controlling the coating material, if there is extra impregnation or wet spread, it will be cured at an uncontrollable position, and as a result, a new step may be generated.
  • the viscosity of the filling material is high (for example, a tape-like material) or the wettability of the coating material is low
  • the filling material or the coating material is cured in a state where it is wet and spreads only in the vicinity of the placement. Since there is a high possibility that if the material is not sufficiently wetted and spread by the winding in the subsequent process, many materials will be cured in a state where the vicinity of the winding start end is thick, and the step may be rather large.
  • the coating material 201 is preferably applied so as to be close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 202 may be applied so as to be close to the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17.
  • “proximity” means a position that is clearly separated from the winding start end and the fixing member.
  • the separation distance from the winding start end and the fixing member is preferably 0.3 mm or more. This separation distance is preferably 0.5 mm or more, and preferably 1 mm or more from the viewpoint of maximum stability. If this separation distance is too large, it becomes difficult to obtain the effect of alleviating the step.
  • the separation distance is short.
  • the viscosity of the coating material is low, if the separation distance is too small, the coating material is placed on the fixing member. If the separation distance is too large, it may not be sufficiently filled in the target gap because it spreads in another direction. Therefore, the separation distance is neither too small nor too large. Is preferable.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 are simultaneously applied to both sides of the fixing member 17, but the following manufacturing methods (1) to (3) have been applied.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 may be coated and the fixing member 17 may be arranged in such an order.
  • the following production method (2) is preferable. The same applies to the coating materials 204 and 205 described later.
  • the coating material 201 is applied to the second end surface 17B side of the fixing member 17 so as to have the above-mentioned separation distance, and then the coating material 201 is applied.
  • This is a method of applying the coating material 202 to the first end surface 17A side of the fixing member 17 so as to have the above-mentioned separation distance.
  • the fixing member 17 is arranged so that the distance from the coating material 201 is the above-mentioned separation distance, and then from the fixing member 17.
  • This is a method of applying the coating material 202 on the side of the fixing member 17 opposite to the coating material 201 so that the distance between the two is the above-mentioned separation distance.
  • the manufacturing method (3) is a method in which the coating materials 201 and 202 are applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 at predetermined intervals, and then the fixing member 17 is arranged between the coating materials 201 and 202.
  • the coating material 201 is first applied, and then the fixing member is set so that the distance from the coating material 201 is the above-mentioned separation distance.
  • the coating material 202 is first applied, and then the distance from the coating material 202 is the above-mentioned separation distance. It is preferable to arrange the fixing member 17 so as to be.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 are applied to the width of the effective region or more in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 are present in the first filling portion and the second filling portion over the entire width of the effective region, whereby the entire width of the effective region can be present.
  • the step caused by the winding start end of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be alleviated.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 are 1 mm or more and 10 mm, respectively, from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. It is preferable to apply the coating so as to be separated by 30 mm or more.
  • the coating material 201 is preferably coated so that the width of the coating material 201 is 5 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 30 mm or more. By applying the coating material 201 in this way, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12.
  • the upper limit of the width of the coating material 201 is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the coating materials.
  • the coating material 202 is preferably coated so that the width of the coating material 202 is 0.5 mm or more, 1 mm or more, or 5 mm or more. By coating the coating material 202 in this way, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the fixing member 17.
  • the upper limit of the width of the coating material 202 is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the coating materials.
  • the coating material 201 is preferably coated so that the thickness of the coating material 201 is equal to or greater than the height of the upper surface 12A2 of the end portion 12A. By applying the coating material 201 in this way, a sufficient amount of the coating material 201 is applied, so that the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be more effectively relaxed.
  • the specific thickness of the coating material 201 is, for example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 ⁇ m or more and 200 ⁇ m or less, it is preferably 52 ⁇ m or more and 2000 ⁇ m or less, and when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 ⁇ m or more and less than 50 ⁇ m. Is preferably 50.5 ⁇ m or more and 2000 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the coating material 201 is the thickness before winding the sheet 12.
  • the coating material 202 is preferably coated so that the thickness of the coating material 202 is equal to or greater than the height of the surface of the fixing member 17. By applying the coating material 202 in this way, a sufficient amount of the coating material 202 is applied, so that the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be more effectively relaxed.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the specific coating material 202 is preferably 3 ⁇ m or more and 12 ⁇ m or less when the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the coating material 202 is the thickness before winding the sheet 12.
  • the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 comes into contact with the coating material 201, and the sheet 12 covers the coating material 202.
  • the winding start end 12A is arranged so as to. Specifically, the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 is attached to the fixing member 17, and the winding start end 12A is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via the fixing member 17.
  • the sheet 12 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 18B.
  • the coating materials 201 and 202 flow and spread, so that the first gap 13 is filled with the coating material 201, the second gap 15 is filled with the coating material 202, and the first gap 13 is filled.
  • a second filling portion 16 filled in the first filling portion 14 and the second gap 15 is formed. As a result, the roll body 10 is obtained.
  • the sheet 12 when the sheet 12 exceeds 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound 1000 m or more, and when the sheet 12 is less than 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound. , It is preferable to wind the entire length of the sheet 12.
  • the curable polymer composition is cured at least after winding the sheet 12 on the second lap.
  • the curable polymer composition is a one-component curable polymer composition (moisture-curable polymer composition)
  • this composition reacts with humidity in the air and is cured by leaving it at room temperature. Therefore, it can be cured without using a special device such as a heating device or an ionizing radiation irradiation device.
  • the curable polymer composition is a two-component curable polymer composition, it can be cured by mixing the main agent and the curing agent.
  • the roll body 20 can be manufactured by, for example, the following method. First, the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the coating material 203 is applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 19A by using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe.
  • ⁇ 205 is applied.
  • the coating material 204 is applied so as to be in contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 205 is applied so as to be in contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the coating material 203 is applied to a portion of the fixing member 17 apart from the second end surface 17B and the coating material 205.
  • the coating material 203 is applied so as to be close to the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, and the coating material 204 is applied so as to be close to the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17, and the coating material is applied.
  • 205 may be applied so as to be close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. Further, after the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the coating materials 203 to 205 are applied, but after the coating materials 203 to 205 are applied, the coating material 204 is the first fixing member 17.
  • the fixing member 17 may be arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the end surface 17A and so that the coating material 205 is in contact with or close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 comes into contact with the coating material 203, and the sheets 12 contact the coating materials 204 and 205.
  • the winding start end 12A is arranged so as to cover each of them. Specifically, the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 is attached to the fixing member 17, and the winding start end 12A is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via the fixing member 17.
  • the sheet 12 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 19C.
  • the coating materials 203 to 205 flow and spread, so that the first gap 13 is filled with the coating material 203, the second gap 15 is filled with the coating material 204, and the third gap 21 is filled with the coating material.
  • 205 is filled to form a first filling portion 14 filled in the first gap 13, a second filling portion 16 filled in the second gap 15, and a third filling portion 22 filled in the third gap 21. Will be done. As a result, the roll body 20 is obtained.
  • the sheet 12 In order to surely expand and fill the coating material 203 or the like in the first gap 13 or the like, when the sheet 12 exceeds 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound 1000 m or more, and when the sheet 12 is less than 1000 m. , It is preferable to wind the entire length of the sheet 12.
  • the coating materials 201 to 205 are flowed by winding the sheet 12, but the coating material 201 and the like may be flowed in advance before the sheet 12 is wound. However, if the coating material 201 or the like is flowed before the sheet 12 is wound, the number of steps is increased, so it is preferable to flow the coating materials 201 to 205 by winding the sheet 12.
  • the coating materials 201 to 205 are applied using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, but even if the coating materials 201 to 205 are applied using a mold having a slit together with the coating device. Good.
  • a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe
  • the constituent material of the mold is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include resin and metal.
  • a mold 210 having a slit 210A is prepared.
  • This mold 210 is used for coating the coating material 201. Since the length, width, and depth of the slit 210A are the same as the length, width, and thickness of the coating material 201, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the mold After preparing the mold 210, the mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 20 (B). When the mold 210 is viewed from directly above, the mold 210 is arranged so that the inner surface of the slit on the fixing member 17 side in the width direction overlaps with or is close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the coating material 201 is supplied into the slit 210A as shown in FIG. 20B using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe.
  • the coating device may be a dispenser or a syringe, but may be a spray or a die coater.
  • the excess coating material 201 existing on the surface of the mold 210 is scraped off with a doctor blade or the like.
  • the coating material 201 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20.
  • the coating materials 202 to 205 can also be arranged by using the mold 210 having the slit 210A in the same procedure.
  • the filling tape may be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the coating material 201 is coated on the surface of the base material 221 in the form of a tape by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, and the base material 221 and the coating material 201 are used.
  • the laminated body 220 including the filling tape 222 is formed.
  • the filling tape 222 is formed from the coating material 201 here, the coating material 201 may not be used as long as the filling tape is made of a material that spreads by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet.
  • the constituent material of the base material 221 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate, cellulosic resins such as triacetyl cellulose, and acrylic resins. Further, a known release film may be used as the base material 221.
  • a known release film may be used as the base material 221.
  • the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the base material 221, it is preferable to draw an alignment line 221A on the base material 221 in advance and apply the coating material 201 along the alignment line 221A. By drawing such an alignment line 221A on the base material 221 in advance, the misalignment of the coating material 201 can be suppressed.
  • the coating material 201 when the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the base material 221, it is preferable to unwind the base material 221 at a constant speed by using the unwinding device with the coating device fixed. By unwinding the base material 221 at a constant speed, uneven coating can be suppressed.
  • the laminate 220 is attached to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 so that the filling tape 222 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Or make it adhere.
  • the filling tape 222 is attached or brought into close contact with or in close contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the base material 221 is peeled off.
  • the filling tape 222 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20.
  • a laminate having one base material and a filling tape is formed, but a laminate having two base materials, a filling tape, and a thickness adjusting member may be formed.
  • the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the first base material 231 by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe.
  • the coating material 201 and the coating material 201 are formed from above the coating material 201 so as to sandwich the thickness adjusting member 232 having a desired thickness in order to obtain the desired thickness.
  • the two base materials 233 are stacked to form the laminated body 230. Examples of the thickness adjusting member 232 include spacers and particles.
  • the peel strength of the second base material 233 with respect to the coating material 201 is preferably smaller than the peel strength of the first base material 231 with respect to the coating material 201. By satisfying such a relationship, the second base material 233 can be easily peeled off.
  • the peel strength of the second base material 233 is a value measured by the following measuring method using a tensile tester (product name "single column type material tester STA-1150", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.).
  • a tensile tester product name "single column type material tester STA-1150", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.
  • double-sided tape (Teraoka Seisakusho Co., Ltd. No. 751B) is attached to a glass plate measuring 30 cm in length and 2.5 cm in width.
  • the laminate 230 is cut into a size of 200 mm in length ⁇ 25 mm in width, and the first base material 231 side is attached with double-sided tape on a glass plate and held by a pair of jigs of a tensile tester.
  • the laminate 230 attached to the glass plate is held by a pair of jigs of the tensile tester.
  • the second base material 233 is slightly peeled off from the laminated body 230 in advance by hand to create a trigger, and one jig holds the second base material 233 and the other. Hold the glass plate and the laminate 230 on the jig of.
  • the second base material 233 is peeled off under the conditions of a peeling speed of 300 mm / min, a peeling distance of 50 mm, and a peeling angle of 180 °, and the peeling strength between the coating material 201 and the second base material 233 at that time is determined. Measure.
  • the peel strength is the arithmetic mean value of the values measured three times.
  • the peel strength of the first base material 231 shall be measured in the same manner as the peel strength of the second base material 233.
  • the first base material 231 and the second base material 233 the same ones as the base material 221 can be used.
  • the laminated body 230 After forming the laminated body 230, a predetermined pressure is applied to the laminated body 230. As a result, the thickness of the coating material 201 becomes a desired thickness. Then, the laminated body 230 is cut out in the form of a tape. As a result, the laminate 230 having the filling tape 234 made of the coating material 201 is formed.
  • the second base material 233 is peeled off as shown in FIG. 22 (C).
  • the laminate 230 is attached or brought into close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 so that the filling tape 234 comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. ..
  • the filling tape 234 is attached or brought into close contact with or in close contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the first base material 231 is peeled off.
  • the filling tape 234 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 234.
  • a mold may be used to form a filling tape and transfer it.
  • the filling tape can be easily installed at the same time as the fixing member 17.
  • the mold 241 is prepared as shown in FIG. 23 (A).
  • the mold 241 has an opening 241A. It is preferable that the side surface of the mold 241 in the longitudinal direction of the mold 241 is open so that the filling tape described later can be easily removed from the mold 241.
  • the mold 241 is, for example, U-shaped.
  • the mold 241 is not particularly limited, but can be formed from, for example, a resin, a metal, or the like. Since the length, width, and depth of the opening 241A of the mold 241 are the same as the length, width, and thickness of the filling tape, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the coating material 201 is poured into the mold 241 to form the filling tape 242. Then, as shown in FIG. 23C, the mold 241 is pressed against the filling tape 242 so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the coating material 201 is a material that exhibits adhesiveness due to moisture, it is preferable to wet the surface of the filling tape 242 with water to make it viscous. By thickening the surface of the filling tape 242, it can be attached to or adhered to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
  • the filling tape 242 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. Instead of the coating materials 202 to 205, the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 242.
  • the filling tape may be transferred to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 by using offset printing.
  • offset printing By forming and transferring the filling tape by using offset printing, time management becomes easy, and the filling tape can be installed at a set time with high position accuracy.
  • the coating material 201 is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate transfer body 251 (for example, the intermediate transfer roll) by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, and filled.
  • the coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe
  • Form tape 252 As shown in FIG. 24B, the filling tape 252 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate transfer body 251 is transferred to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 by an offset printing method.
  • the filling tape 252 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. Instead of the coating materials 202 to 205, the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 252.
  • the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the first filling portion 14 is directed from the separation position P1 toward the tip surface 12A1. Can be lifted gently. As a result, the step caused by the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 can be alleviated.
  • the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the second filling portion 16 is directed from the first end surface 17A toward the arrival position P2. It can be lowered gently. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be effectively alleviated.
  • the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the third filling portion 22 can be gently lifted. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be more effectively relaxed.
  • the effective length of the sheet is compensated to ensure the effective length. That is, when the portion of the sheet that does not become a product due to deformation becomes long, the sheet loss increases.
  • the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing members 17 and 51 can be alleviated, so that the deformation of the sheet 12 can be suppressed. As a result, seat loss can be reduced.
  • FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the roll body according to the present embodiment
  • FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG. 25
  • FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of each component of the roll body of FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 28 is a figure at the time of measuring the maximum thickness and length of the 2nd interposition part shown in FIG. 25,
  • FIGS. 38 and 39 are views schematically showing a manufacturing process of the roll body according to the present embodiment. Is.
  • the roll body 70 shown in FIG. 25 includes a winding core 11 and a long sheet 12 wound around the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. As shown in FIG. 25, the roll body 70 fixes the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 provided between the sheets 12 after the first lap and a part of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11. A fixing member 17 for the purpose is further provided.
  • the sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 in a plurality of turns, for example, two or more turns.
  • the first gap 13 and the second gap 15 are hollow, the first gap 13 is not filled with the first filling portion 14, and the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling. Part 16 is not filled.
  • the first intervening portion 71 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the first intervening portion 71 is located on the lower side (winding core 11 side) of the first intervening portion 71, and is in contact with the first intervening portion 71. It is sandwiched by the upper sheet 12 located above the 1 intervening portion 71 and in contact with the 1st intervening portion 71. Therefore, the sheet 12 is always present on the first intervening portion 71. Further, the first intervening portion 71 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the first intervening portion 71 is the first gap 13 between the seats 12 after the first lap. It is provided at least in the first region 12D corresponding to. Further, the first intervening portion 71 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the edge thickness T4 (see FIG. 27) of the end portion 71A on the side of the separation position P3 (see FIG. 26) at which the upper sheet 12 is separated from the lower sheet 12 in the first intervening portion 71 is this thickness when this thickness is thick. Since there is a possibility that a new step may be formed due to the above, a thinner step is preferable.
  • the edge thickness T4 is preferably 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the edge thickness T4 is more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint that the deformation relaxation length can be shortened.
  • the edge thickness T4 is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of minimizing the deformation relaxation length.
  • the edge thickness T4 can be measured by the same method as the edge thickness T1 using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). It can also be measured as follows. First, a portion including the end portion 71A, the lower sheet 12 in contact with the end portion 71A, and the upper sheet 12 is cut out, and a cross section of this portion is obtained by cutting or polishing with a cutting tool, and a stereomicroscope (for example, a product name) is obtained. Observation with "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) shall be performed.
  • the first intervening portion 71 includes a first portion 71B interposed in the first region 12D corresponding to the first gap 13 and a sheet above the first portion 71B. 12 has a second portion 71C located on the arrival position P4 (see FIG. 26) side to reach the lower sheet 12. Since the first intervening portion 71 has not only the first portion 71B but also the second portion 71C, it is possible to suppress the concentration of stress on the stepped portion caused by the winding start end portion 12A, and the upper side can be suppressed. Since the deformation of the sheet 12 after the sheet 12 can be made gentle, this step can be alleviated.
  • the thickness T5 (see FIG. 27) of the second portion 71C is preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 300 ⁇ m or less. When the thickness T5 of the second portion 71C is within this range, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding an adverse effect on the winding of the sheet 12. When the thickness T3 of the second portion 71C exceeds 300 ⁇ m, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected.
  • the deformation will remain due to this change in thickness, and there is a risk that the step caused by the winding start end will not be sufficiently alleviated. Therefore, it is preferable to secure a sufficient length of the first intervening portion with respect to the thickness of the sheet. However, if the length of the first intervening portion is increased to have other effects such as winding, the length of the first intervening portion is intentionally made shorter than the optimum state to obtain the optimum first.
  • the deformation relaxation length is longer than that of the state having the length of the intervening portion, but the deformation relaxation length can be shortened as compared with the case where the first intervening portion is not provided.
  • the ratio of the length L3 is preferably 1 or more. This ratio is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 50 or more, from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length.
  • the length L3 can be measured as follows. First, the other sheets 12 are unwound, leaving the lower sheet 12 and the upper sheet 12. Here, if the sheet 12 is transparent or translucent, the region where the first intervening portion 71 exists can be visually recognized. Therefore, the distance from the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A to the end of the first intervening portion 71 on the separation position P3 side is observed through the sheet 12 using a ruler or a tape measure, and in the width direction of the sheet 12. Measure 10 points, find the average value, and find the length L3. On the other hand, when the sheet 12 cannot be transparently observed, first, this portion is collected so that the portion including the lower sheet 12, the first intervening portion 71, and the upper sheet 12 is not crushed.
  • the cross section is obtained by polishing, and the distance from the position corresponding to the tip surface 12A1 in the first interposition portion to the end on the separation position side is determined by a stereomicroscope (for example, the product name "digital microscope”). VHX-7000 ", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
  • the length L3 is preferably 110 ⁇ m or more, and in order to further shorten the deformation relaxation length. It is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more.
  • the physical properties such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first interposing portion 71 are the same as the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, and the material constituting the first interposing portion 71 is the first. Since it is the same as the material of 1 filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the second intervening portion 72 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Therefore, the sheet 12 is always present on the second intervening portion 72. Further, the second intervening portion 72 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the second interposing portion 72 is at least the second gap between the seats 12 after the first lap. It is provided in the second region 12E corresponding to 15. Further, the second intervening portion 72 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the second intervening portion 72 is provided between the same seats 12 as the first intervening portion 71 (for example, between the seat 12 on the second lap and the seat 12 on the third lap), but the second interposing portion 72 is provided. , May be provided between the sheets 12 different from the first intervening portion 71.
  • the maximum thickness T6 (see FIGS. 27 and 28) of the second intervening portion 72 is preferably 0.01 mm or more.
  • the maximum thickness T6 is more preferably 0.02 mm or more, 0.03 mm or more, or 0.04 mm or more from the viewpoint of more effectively relaxing the step.
  • the upper limit of the maximum thickness T6 is preferably 0.2 mm or less or 0.1 mm or less.
  • the maximum thickness T6 can be measured by the same method as the thickness T2 using a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope.
  • a laser displacement meter When measuring the maximum thickness T6 with a laser displacement meter, first, as in the measurement of the thickness T2 and the like, the roll body 70 is attached to a jig, three laser displacement meters are arranged at predetermined positions, and then the roll is used. The sheet 12 is extended from the body 70 until the second interposition portion 72 is exposed. After that, with the second intervening portion 72 exposed, the displacement amount was continuously measured with a laser displacement meter at a sampling period of 200 ⁇ s while rotating the winding core 11 at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s, and the horizontal axis was positioned (mm).
  • the vertical axis is the displacement amount (mm).
  • This measurement is performed from the second tip 72B on the side opposite to the first tip 72A on the fixing member 17 side of the second interposition 72 toward the first tip 72A, and in this measurement, the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm) is performed.
  • the line) is defined as the height of the winding core 11
  • the difference between the reference height and the height of the second interposing portion 72 is defined as the thickness of the second interposing portion 72.
  • the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is obtained by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount at the position where the displacement amount is the highest.
  • the graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm. In FIG. 27, the first tip 72A exists directly above the fixing member 17.
  • the maximum thickness T6 can be measured with a stereomicroscope as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the lower sheet 12, the second intervening portion 72, and the upper sheet 12 is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name “Digital Microscope VHX-7000”, manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
  • a stereomicroscope for example, product name “Digital Microscope VHX-7000”, manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
  • the second intervening portion 72 When the thickness of the second intervening portion 72 is measured along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12, the second intervening portion 72 in the longitudinal direction DR2 with respect to the maximum thickness T6 (see FIGS. 27 and 28) of the second interposing portion 72.
  • the ratio (length L4 / maximum thickness T6) of the length L4 (see FIG. 27) from the second tip 72B to the position where the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is obtained is preferably 12 or more. If this ratio is 12 or more, it is possible to suppress the deformation remaining in the vicinity of the second tip 72B of the second interposition portion 72, and if the thickness of the second interposition portion is too thick, it deviates from the perfect circle at the time of winding.
  • the take-up property may be inferior due to such factors, but if this ratio is 12 or more, the second intervening portion 72 is not too thick, so that the inferior take-up property can be suppressed. Further, if the thickness of the second intervening portion is too thick, new deformation due to the second intervening portion may occur, but if this ratio is 12 or more, the occurrence of such new deformation is suppressed. it can.
  • the lower limit of this ratio is preferably 25 or more, 50 or more, 75 or more, 100 or more, 125 or more, 150 or more, 175 or more, or 200 or more from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length.
  • the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 should be thick, so that the upper limit of this ratio is, for example, 2000 or less, 1000 or less, 500 or less, or It is preferably 375 or less.
  • the length L4 is better from the viewpoint of alleviating the step.
  • the length L4 is preferably 5.0 mm or more, and more preferably. In order to shorten the deformation relaxation length, it is more preferably 7.0 mm or more, more preferably 9.0 mm or more.
  • the second interposition portion having a convex surface is formed in the region R3 (see FIG. 28) from the second tip 72B of the second interposition portion to the position where the maximum thickness is T6 due to processing.
  • the upper limit of the length L4 is such that the surface 72C of the second interposition portion 72 in the region R3 tends to be convex and wavy. From the viewpoint of suppressing thickness unevenness, it is preferably 20 mm or less.
  • the length L4 can be obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve in the same manner as the maximum thickness T6. Specifically, first, when the second tip 72B of the second intervening portion 72 is present, the displacement amount increases. Therefore, from the graph of the position displacement curve, the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the position where the displacement amount starts to increase. Find the first position, which is the intersection of. Next, a virtual line perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line is drawn through the position where the displacement amount is the highest. Then, the length L4 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the first position and the second position with the intersection of the virtual line and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the second position.
  • the length L4 / maximum thickness T6 can roughly represent the shape of the second interposition portion 72, but in order to more appropriately represent the convex shape of the surface 72C, the cross-sectional area of the second interposition portion 72 is further expressed. It is preferable to use. Specifically, the maximum thickness T6 from the second tip 72B in the plane (the plane represented by FIG. 28) including the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11 with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72. It is preferable that the ratio (cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6) of the cross-sectional area S3 (see FIG. 28) of the second interposition portion 72 up to the position is 2.5 or more.
  • the cross-sectional area S3 of the second intervening portion 72 is larger than the maximum thickness T6, so that the sheet 12 can be effectively lifted by the second interposing portion 72, thereby causing the step. Can be more relaxed.
  • the lower limit of the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 is 3.0 or more, 3.5 or more, 4.0 or more, 5.0 or more, 5.5 or more, 6.0 or more, from the viewpoint of further alleviating the step. It is preferably 6.5 or more, or 7.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 20.0 or less, 17.5 or less, 15.0 or less, or 12.5 or less, 10.0 or less.
  • the cross-sectional area S3 is the cross-sectional area of the region R3 of the second intervening portion 72 (in FIG. 29, the cross-sectional area of the region surrounded by the solid line in the second interposing portion 72), and is the first position in the graph of the position displacement curve. It can be obtained by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the area from to the second position and totaling them.
  • the physical properties such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the second interposing portion 72 are the same as the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the second filling portion 16, and the material constituting the second interposing portion 72 is the first. Since it is the same as the material of the 2 filling portion 16, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the step and the fixing member 17 due to the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 Although it is possible to suppress the step caused by the above, the sheet 12 is wound on the sheet 12 (lower sheet 12) inside (the winding core 11 side) in the radial direction DR3 from the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72. It is not possible to suppress the step caused by the start end portion 12A and the step caused by the fixing member 17.
  • the first intervening portion 71 and the second intervening portion 72 are inside the radial DR3 as much as possible (for example, between the seat 12 on the first lap and the seat 12 on the second lap, and the sheets 12 and 3 on the second lap. It is preferable to be provided between the sheets 12 on the circumference.
  • the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17 are substantially aligned in the cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11.
  • the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 may protrude from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the second intervening portion 72 is interposed in the second region 12E between the sheets 12, but also in the third region 12F corresponding to the third gap 21 on the second end surface 17B side between the sheets 12.
  • a third intervening portion 81 may intervene.
  • the third intervening portion 81 is the same as the second intervening portion 72 except that it is interposed in the third region 12F corresponding to the third gap 21, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the roll body 70 is provided with the second intervening portion 72 in the second region 12E between the sheets 12, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheets 12, the roll body 70 has a second intervening portion between the sheets 12. Since it is sufficient that the first intervening portion 71 is provided in the one region 12D, the second intervening portion 72 may not be provided in the second intervening portion 12E between the sheets 12 as in the roll body 90 shown in FIG. .. In the roll body 90 shown in FIG. 31, the sheets 12 are in close contact with each other in the second region 12E.
  • the roll body 70 is provided with the first intervening portion 71 in the first region 12D between the sheets 12, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the fixing member 17, the roll body 70 has a second region 12E between the sheets 12. Since it is sufficient that the two intervening portions 72 are provided, the first intervening portion 71 may not be provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12 as in the roll body 100 shown in FIG. 32. In the roll body 100 shown in FIG. 32, the sheets 12 are in close contact with each other in the first region 12D.
  • the first filling portion 14 may be provided instead of the first intervening portion 71 as in the roll body 110 shown in FIG. 33. That is, the first gap 13 may be filled with the first filling portion 14, and the second intervening portion 72 may be provided in the second region 12E between the sheets 12.
  • the second intervening portion 72 of the roll body 110 is provided between the seat 12 on the second lap and the sheet 12 on the third lap, but the seat 12 on the first lap is like the roll body 120 shown in FIG.
  • a second intervening portion 72 may be provided between the seat 12 and the seat 12 on the second lap.
  • the second filling portion 16 may be provided instead of the second intervening portion 72 as in the roll body 130 shown in FIG. 35. That is, the first intervening portion 71 may be provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12, and the second filling portion 16 may be filled in the second gap 15.
  • the roll body 70 includes a fixing member 17 for fixing the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, but the roll body 70 does not have to be provided with the fixing member 17 as in the roll body 140 shown in FIG.
  • the radial DR3 of the winding core 11 is formed on both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12 as in the roll body 150 shown in FIG. 37.
  • the convex portions 12H protruding outward may be formed respectively.
  • the filling material for example, coating material
  • the first interposing portion 71, the second interposing portion 72, or the third interposing portion 81 is low, or when the thickness of the sheet is uniform, the filling material (for example, coating) The material, etc.) may protrude from the sheets, and the filling material, etc. may exist in an unintended place.
  • the filling material for example, the coating material, etc.
  • the filling material protrudes from the both end portions 12G after the filling material is arranged, for example, after the coating material is applied. Can be suppressed. Since both ends 12G of the sheet 12 are cut off and are not used as a product, there is no problem in the product even if both ends 12G of the sheet have such convex portions 12H.
  • the convex portion 12H may be formed by knurling or coating, or may be formed by attaching a tape (for example, a side tape). In the case of coating, the same material as the material of the first filling portion 14 can be used.
  • convex portions 12H are provided at all portions of both end portions 12G of the sheet 12, but the convex portions 12H may be partially provided.
  • the convex portion 12H is a position that sandwiches the first intervening portion 71 in both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12, and a position that sandwiches the second interposing portion 72 in both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12.
  • the convex portion 12H When the convex portion 12H is present at a position sandwiching the first intervening portion 71, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) or the first intervening portion 71, and the convex portion 12H is the second. When it exists at a position where the intervening portion 72 is sandwiched, the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) or the second interposing portion 72 can be suppressed, and the convex portion 12H is at a position where the third interposing portion 81 is sandwiched. When present in, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) and the third intervening portion 81.
  • the distance D2, the length L3, the length L4, the maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 are not shown in FIGS. 31 to 36, when the first intervening portion 71 is present, the distance D2 and the length L3 are shown.
  • the length L3 / distance D2 is the same as in the case of the roll body 70, and when the second intervening portion 72 is present, the length L4, the length L4 / maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness.
  • T6 is the same as in the case of the roll body 70.
  • the surfaces of the fixing member 17 are all in close contact with the winding start end portion 12A, but similarly to the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 8, the winding start end portion 12A and the fixing member
  • the first filling portion 14 may be inserted between the 17.
  • the roll body 70 can be manufactured, for example, by the following method. First, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
  • the fixing member 17 After arranging the fixing member 17, as shown in FIG. 38B, the fixing member 17 is arranged so that the tip end surface 12A1 at the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is substantially aligned with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
  • the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via.
  • the sheet 12 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound at least once along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 38 (C). To do. As a result, the intermediate roll body 73 having the first gap 13 and the second gap 15 is obtained.
  • the coating material 206 is applied to the surface 12I of the sheet 12 constituting the outer peripheral surface 73A of the intermediate roll body 73 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. 207 is applied.
  • the coating material 206 is applied to at least the first region 12D corresponding to the first gap 13, and the coating material 207 is applied to the second region 12E corresponding to at least the second gap 15. Since the coating materials 74 and 75 are the same as the coating materials 201 and 202, the description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the sheet 12 After applying the coating materials 206 and 207, the sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 again as shown in FIG. 39 (B). As a result, the coating materials 206 and 207 flow and spread, so that the coating material 206 is provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12 and the coating material 207 is provided in the second region 12E between the sheets 12. An intervening portion 71 and a second intervening portion 72 are formed. As a result, the roll body 70 is obtained. If at least one of the coating materials 206 and 207 is a curable material, the curable material is cured after the sheet 12 is wound again.
  • the coating materials 206 and 207 are not coated using the mold 210 having the slit 210A, but the coating material 206 is coated using the mold 210 having the slit 210A as in the first embodiment. , 207 may be applied. Further, the first interposing portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 may be formed by a filling sheet instead of the coating materials 206 and 207 by the same method as in the first embodiment.
  • the portion of the sheet 12 on the first intervening portion 71 is gently lifted toward the tip surface 12A1 side. be able to. As a result, the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be effectively alleviated.
  • the portion of the sheet 12 on the second intervening portion 72 can be gently lifted. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be effectively alleviated.
  • step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be alleviated, the deformation of the sheet 12 can be suppressed.
  • the first filling portion and the second filling portion may flow to a portion where pressure is not applied.
  • the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 are provided between the sheets 12, the materials constituting the first interposing portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 are difficult to flow. , Hard to stick out.
  • FIG. 40 (A) is a graph showing the amount of displacement of the roll body according to the seventh embodiment with respect to the position around the first filling portion
  • FIG. 40 (B) is the first filling of the roll body according to the eighth embodiment
  • FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the portion
  • FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the first filled portion of the roll body according to the ninth embodiment.
  • composition for hard coat layer 1 -Pentaerythritol triacrylate (product name "KAYARAD-PET-30", manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.): 60 parts by mass-Photopolymerization initiator (1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, product name "Omnirad 184", IGM Resins B.
  • silicone-based leveling agent product name "Seika Beam 10-28", manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., solid content 10%
  • silica particles product name "Product name” SIRMIBK-H84 ”, manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., average particle size 30 nm, solid content 30%
  • MIBK Methylisobutyl ketone
  • a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 ⁇ m as a fixing member is wound on the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm. It was pasted along the width direction.
  • the winding core was held by the chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device. Then, as a coating material, a one-component curable silicone resin composition (product name "Hapio Seal Pro HG", so as to contact the first end face and the second end face extending along the width direction of the winding core of the double-sided tape, respectively.
  • Two bottles (manufactured by Campe Hapio Co., Ltd.) were applied in an environment of 25 ° C. The color of this silicone resin composition was gray.
  • the shear viscosity at the time of coating of this silicone resin composition is 180 Pa ⁇ s, respectively, and the silicone resin composition is along the width direction of the winding core and the coating amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. Each was applied linearly.
  • the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of an acrylic resin film (in-plane phase difference Re: 5 nm) having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 80 ⁇ m as a sheet is attached to a double-sided tape along the width direction of the winding core.
  • Acrylic resin film was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
  • the acrylic resin film was arranged so that the tip surface of the winding start end of the acrylic resin film in the longitudinal direction was in contact with the silicone resin composition and was substantially aligned with the second end face of the double-sided tape in the radial direction of the winding core. ..
  • the entire acrylic resin film is wound around the winding core by a winding device, and is located between the winding core and the acrylic resin film on the first lap, and is in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the acrylic resin film.
  • the gap was filled with the silicone resin composition, and the second gap located between the winding core and the acrylic resin film on the first lap and in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape was filled with the silicone resin composition. As a result, a roll body was obtained.
  • the silicone resin composition was cured to fill the first gap with a first filling portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 ⁇ m, and a second gap having a length of 20 mm and a width.
  • a second filling portion having a maximum thickness of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 ⁇ m was formed.
  • the shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition was measured using a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device manufactured by Anton Pearl Japan Co., Ltd. Specifically, the shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition was determined by measuring the shear viscosity at a shear rate of 1 [1 / s] at 25 ° C. using a parallel plate having a diameter of 25 mm. The viscosity of the silicone resin composition was determined by measuring the viscosity of the silicone resin composition 10 times and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of eight shear viscosities excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured 10 viscosities. .. The shear viscosities of the coating materials used in the following other examples were also measured in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • the in-plane retardation Re of the acrylic resin film was measured using a retardation film / optical material inspection device (product name "RETS-100", manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, in order to stabilize the light source of RETS-100, the light source was turned on and then left for 60 minutes or more. After that, the rotary photon method is selected and the ⁇ mode (angle direction phase difference measurement mode) is selected. By selecting this ⁇ mode, the stage became an inclined rotation stage.
  • a retardation film / optical material inspection device product name "RETS-100", manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • the stage was rotated 360 ° on the XY plane in an environment with a temperature of 23 ° C and a relative humidity of 50%, and the phase-advancing axis and the slow-phase axis were measured.
  • the slow phase axis was selected.
  • the measurement was performed while tilting to the angle range set by the stage about the slow phase axis, and the data (Re) of the set tilt angle range and the set wavelength range were obtained in increments of 10 °.
  • the in-plane phase difference Re was measured at 5 points at different positions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, measurements were taken at a total of 5 points, the center A1 of the sample and the points A2 to A4. Then, among the measured values of 5 points, the arithmetic mean value of 3 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value was defined as the in-plane phase difference Re.
  • Example 2 In Example 2, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "KE-24", manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) ) was used, and a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1. This silicone rubber composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 75 Pa ⁇ s.
  • KE-24 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Example 3 In Example 3, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4503", Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (condensation curable) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used. The silicone rubber composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 40 Pa ⁇ s. Further, this silicone rubber composition did not contain a volatile component or an adhesive component.
  • ELASTOSIL registered trademark
  • Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (condensation curable) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used.
  • the silicone rubber composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 40 Pa ⁇ s. Further, this silicone rubber composition did not contain a volatile component or an adhesive component.
  • the 90 ° peeling test was performed using a sample and a spring type tension gauge (manufactured by Oba Keiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) was poured into this mold and cured to obtain a material layer.
  • ELASTOSIL registered trademark
  • M4503 manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd.
  • the material layer was removed from the mold, and the material layer was cut out to a size of 20 mm ⁇ 100 mm by a cutting machine to obtain a sample provided on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, one end of the sample is held by a spring type tension gauge, and the one end is pulled up perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core while measuring the tensile force in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. The sample was peeled off at a peeling speed of 10 mm / sec.
  • the arithmetic mean value of the tensile force of 8 samples excluding the sample having the maximum tensile force and the sample having the minimum tensile force was calculated as the tensile force of the above constituent materials. And said.
  • the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion in the roll body according to Example 3 was 3.5 MPa, the elongation at the time of cutting was 450%, and the tear strength was 12.0 N / mm.
  • the hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion measured by the durometer type A was 28 °, and the linear shrinkage ratio of the constituent material of the first filling portion was 0.10%.
  • the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling part is measured using a sample and a Tensilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. did. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) for forming the first filling portion is poured into this mold and cured. The material layer was obtained.
  • ELASTOSIL registered trademark
  • M4503 manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd.
  • the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is punched to the size of the dumbbell-shaped No. 2 described in JIS K6251: 2017 with a tensile No. 2 dumbbell-shaped punching blade manufactured by Polymer Instruments Co., Ltd., and a sample is prepared. Obtained. The sample was then held in an environment of 25 ° C. for 24 hours. Then, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the sample are gripped by the pair of grippers of the Tencilon universal testing machine, and the initial gripping distance between the grippers is 20 mm and the tensile speed is 100 mm / min in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%.
  • a tensile test was performed under the conditions, and the tensile strength of the sample was measured. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the tensile strength of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was taken as the tensile strength of the constituent material.
  • the elongation at the time of cutting of the constituent material of the first filling part is tensioned using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. It was measured in the same manner as the strength measuring method. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the elongation at the time of cutting of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was defined as the elongation at the time of cutting of the above constituent materials.
  • the tear strength of the constituent material of the first filling part is based on JIS K6252: 2007, and a sample and Tensilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) are used. The measurement was performed in the same manner as the method for measuring the tensile strength. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the tear strength of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was taken as the tear strength of the constituent material.
  • the hardness of the durometer type A in the constituent material of the first filling portion was measured in accordance with JIS K6253: 1997. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) for forming the first filling portion is poured into this mold, and it is necessary. To obtain a material layer by curing according to.
  • ELASTOSIL registered trademark
  • M4503 manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd.
  • the material layer was removed from the mold, and the material layer was cut out by a cutting machine or the like to obtain a sample having a size of 100 mm ⁇ 100 mm and a thickness of 10 mm.
  • a durometer type A product name "GS-719N (TYPEA)", manufactured by TECLOCK Co., Ltd.
  • the hardness was measured in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%.
  • the arithmetic mean value of the hardness of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was defined as the hardness of the constituent material.
  • the linear shrinkage rate of the first filling portion can be measured as follows. First, a mold having a thickness of 2 mm and a size of 130 mm square is prepared, and a two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming a first filling portion in this mold (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503"). , Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. (condensation curable) was poured and cured to obtain a sample (molded product). After the sample was completely cured, the dimensions of the sample were measured and compared with the dimensions inside the mold to determine the linear shrinkage ratio based on JIS K6249: 2003. The arithmetic mean value of the linear shrinkage of eight samples excluding the maximum and minimum values among the ten samples was taken as the linear shrinkage of the constituent materials.
  • Example 4 In Example 4, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name “ELASTOSIL® M 4601”, Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (additional reactivity) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used. The silicone rubber fat composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 20 Pa ⁇ s.
  • ELASTOSIL® M 4601 Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (additional reactivity) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used.
  • the silicone rubber fat composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 20 Pa ⁇ s.
  • Example 5 In Example 5, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable urethane resin composition (product name “human skin gel”, EXCEL CORPORATION). A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the product was used. This urethane resin composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the urethane resin composition was applied was 6.5 Pa ⁇ s.
  • product name “human skin gel”, EXCEL CORPORATION product name “human skin gel”, EXCEL CORPORATION
  • a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 ⁇ m as a fixing member is wound on the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm. It was pasted along the width direction.
  • the winding core was held by the chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device. Then, the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of the polyethylene terephthalate film (PET film, in-plane retardation Re: 1000 nm, Nz coefficient: 20) having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1490 mm and a thickness of 80 ⁇ m as a sheet is set in the width direction of the winding core.
  • PET film polyethylene terephthalate film, in-plane retardation Re: 1000 nm, Nz coefficient: 20
  • the PET film was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core by sticking it on the double-sided tape along the line.
  • the PET film was wound around once by a winding device to obtain an intermediate roll body.
  • the first gap located between the winding core and the PET film on the first lap and in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the PET film, and between the winding core and the PET film on the first lap.
  • a second gap was formed in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape.
  • a one-component curable silicone resin composition (product name "Hapio Seal Pro") is applied to the surface of the PET film forming the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core as a coating material.
  • HG manufactured by Campe Hapio Co., Ltd.
  • the viscosity of the silicone resin composition at the time of application is 180 Pa ⁇ s, respectively, and the silicone resin composition is linear so as to be along the width direction of the winding core and the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m.
  • the silicone resin composition was applied to the first region corresponding to the first gap and the second region corresponding to the second gap, respectively.
  • the silicone resin composition After applying the silicone resin composition, the entire PET film was wound around the core again by a winding device, and the silicone resin composition was interposed in each of the first region and the second region between the PET films. As a result, a roll body was obtained.
  • the silicone resin composition is cured to form a first intervening portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 ⁇ m provided in the first region between the PET films and a second region between the PET films.
  • a second intervening portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm, and a maximum thickness of 300 ⁇ m was formed.
  • the in-plane retardation Re of the PET film used in Example 6 was measured in the same manner as the in-plane retardation Re of the acrylic resin film used in Example 1. However, in this case, the average refractive index N of the sample was set to 1.617.
  • the laminate was formed as follows. First, using a continuous coating machine, the acrylic resin film having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 80 ⁇ m used in Example 1 is sent from the unwinding roll to the coated portion of the first unit for the hard coat layer. Composition 1 was applied to form a coating film. After that, the coating film is dried at a temperature of 70 ° C. for 60 seconds in the drying portion, the solvent in the coating film is evaporated, and ultraviolet rays are irradiated in the cured portion so that the integrated light amount becomes 150 mJ / cm 2 to cure the coating film. As a result, a hard coat layer having a film thickness of 5.0 ⁇ m and a coating width of 1300 mm was formed, and a continuous film-formed laminate having a length of 3000 m and a thickness of 85 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • Example 8 the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion is applied along the width direction of the winding core, and the coating amount per unit width is 0.5 cm 3 / m.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the coating was linearly applied.
  • Example 9 the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion is applied along the width direction of the winding core, and the coating amount per unit width is 0.8 cm 3 / m.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the coating was linearly applied.
  • Example 10 In Example 10, except that the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion was linearly applied so that the coating amount per unit width was 1 cm 3 / m. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9.
  • Example 11 the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 2 Pa ⁇ s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the thickness was 5 cm 3 / m.
  • Example 12 the shear viscosity at the time of application of the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 6.5 Pa ⁇ s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1.2 cm 3.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9 except that / m was set.
  • a cylindrical winding core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm was held by a chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device.
  • a two-component curable silicone rubber composition product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable
  • ELASTOSIL registered trademark
  • condensation curable was applied as a coating material at 25 ° C.
  • the viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application is 180 Pa ⁇ s, and the silicone rubber composition is linear along the width direction of the winding core so that the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. It was applied.
  • a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 ⁇ m as a fixing member was wrapped in the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm. I pasted it along.
  • the separation distance was determined by measuring 10 points and calculating the arithmetic mean value of the separation distances at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured 10 points. Also in the following examples, the separation distance was determined in this way.
  • the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of the laminate having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 85 ⁇ m similar to that of Example 7 as a sheet is attached to a double-sided tape along the width direction of the winding core to attach the laminate. It was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
  • the laminated body was arranged so that the tip surface of the winding start end portion of the laminated body in the longitudinal direction was in contact with the silicone rubber composition and was substantially aligned with the second end surface of the double-sided tape in the radial direction of the winding core.
  • the laminated body is wound around the winding core by a winding device, and the silicone rubber is located in the first gap between the winding core and the laminated body on the first lap and in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the laminated body.
  • the composition was filled.
  • the laminated body was wound around once by a winding device to obtain an intermediate roll body.
  • a second gap was formed between the winding core and the laminated body on the first lap and in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape.
  • a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL” (registered)) is applied to the surface of the laminate forming the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core as a coating material.
  • Trademark M 4503 ”, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable
  • the viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application is 180 Pa ⁇ s, and the silicone rubber composition is linear along the width direction of the winding core so that the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. It was applied. Specifically, the silicone rubber composition was applied to the second region corresponding to the second gap.
  • each of the silicone rubber compositions is cured to form a first filling portion having a width of 1340 mm in the first gap, and a second intervening portion having a width of 1340 mm is formed in the second region between the laminates. It was.
  • Example 14 a two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion (product name “ELASTOSIL® M 4503”, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curing). Same as Example 11 except that a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4601", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., addition reactivity) was used instead of (property). And got a roll body. The shear viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application was 10 Pa ⁇ s.
  • Example 15 the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 10 Pa ⁇ s, and the coating amount per unit width was 0.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 13 except that the distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm, except that the thickness was 8 cm 3 / m.
  • Example 16 the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 10 Pa ⁇ s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1.
  • a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 13 except that the distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm, except that the thickness was 2 cm 3 / m.
  • Comparative Example 1 a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the coating material was not applied.
  • Comparative Example 2 a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 1 except that the laminate used in Example 7 was used instead of the acrylic resin film.
  • the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion was measured.
  • the edge thickness T1 was measured using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). Specifically, first, when all the films and laminates such as acrylic resin film and PET film were unwound, the first filling portion adhered to the laminate side and was peeled off from the winding core. Then, one or more samples having a size of 2 mm ⁇ 5 mm including the first filling portion were cut out from the laminated body. The sample was cut out from an arbitrary portion including the tip portion of the first filling portion and not attached with dirt, fingerprints, or the like.
  • the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion was measured under the following measurement conditions.
  • the edge thickness T1 was obtained by measuring the edge thickness at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thicknesses at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses at the 10 points.
  • the length at which the step caused by the winding start end of the film such as the acrylic resin film or PET film or the laminated body and the step caused by the double-sided tape were alleviated was measured. Specifically, since the step becomes smaller from the winding start end to the winding end end, the film or the laminated body is first fed while measuring the feeding length (m) to the point where the step is visually recognized. Then, the film and the laminated body were cut out at the point where the step was visually recognized.
  • the white LED lamp was arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the white LED lamp was along the longitudinal direction of the film or the laminate.
  • the length of the white LED lamp was set to be the length over the portion of the film or laminate where the step was present and the portion where the step was not present.
  • the one in which the line of the white LED lamp was clearly visible was appropriately selected so that the white LED lamp was reflected on the film or the laminate so that the outline line could be seen.
  • visual observation was performed from any angle ( ⁇ 180 ° to 180 °) with reference to the normal direction of the surface of the film or laminate (0 °).
  • a jig for rotating the roll body and a laser displacement meter (product name "LK-G30", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) were prepared and placed at predetermined positions.
  • the jig was inserted into the hole in the width direction of the winding core to rotatably hold the roll body.
  • the locations of the laser displacement meters are as follows. First, the first position and the second position that divide the width of the laminated body into three equal parts were determined. The first position was located on the first end side in the lateral direction of the laminated body, and the second position was located on the second end side opposite to the first position. The first laser displacement meter is arranged so that the laser beam is applied to the midpoint between the first position and the first end, and the second laser displacement meter is the midpoint between the first position and the second position. The third laser displacement meter was arranged so that the laser beam was irradiated to the second position and the midpoint of the second end.
  • the roll body was attached to the jig, and the acrylic resin film was fed out from the roll body until the first filling portion was exposed.
  • the displacement amount is continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 ⁇ s while rotating the winding core at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s in an environment of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%.
  • graphs see FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C) were obtained in which the horizontal axis was the position (mm) and the vertical axis was the displacement amount (mm). This measurement is performed from the tip of the first filling portion to the position in contact with the tip surface.
  • the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is defined as the height of the winding core, and the winding core and the first filling portion are used.
  • the difference in height was defined as the thickness of the first filling portion.
  • the graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
  • the position on the position displacement curve where the displacement amount starts to decrease sharply is set as position E1. Then, when the existence of the fourth intervening portion was not confirmed, the thickness T2 of the position in contact with the tip surface of the first filling portion was obtained by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount of the position E1. ..
  • the thickness T2 was measured by the following method. First, a sample having a size of 2 cm ⁇ 2 cm including this portion was collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the first filling portion 14, and the sheet 12 on the second lap was not crushed. Then, the cross section of the fixed sample is polished, and the thickness T2 of the first filling portion is measured with a stereomicroscope (product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", KEYENCE Co., Ltd.) in an environment of temperature 23 ° C. and relative humidity 50%. Made by). The measurement of the thickness T2 with a stereomicroscope was performed in a dark field and reflected light at a magnification of 500 times, selecting coaxial epi-illumination as the illumination of the digital microscope.
  • a stereomicroscope product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", KEYENCE Co., Ltd.
  • the length L1 was obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve as in the thickness T2. Specifically, first, the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the position E1 and the position where the displacement amount starts to increase from the graph is set as the position E2. Next, a virtual line IL4 was drawn through the position E1 and perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line. Then, the length L1 was obtained by finding the distance between the position E2 and the position E3, with the intersection of the virtual line IL4 and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the position E3.
  • the area S1 was calculated by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the region from the position E2 to the position E3 and totaling them.
  • the width between the measurement points was calculated from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core based on the above mathematical formula (3), and was 6.24 ⁇ m.
  • the length L1 / thickness T2 and the area S1 / thickness T2 were obtained using the obtained length L1, thickness T2, and area S1.
  • the total of the obtained length L1 and length L2, the thickness T2, and the total of the area S1 and the area S2 are used (length L1 + length L2). / Thickness T2, (area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2 were obtained.
  • the roll body is attached to the jig and three laser displacement meters are arranged at predetermined positions, and then the second intervening portion is exposed from the roll body.
  • the laminate was fed out.
  • the displacement amount is continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 ⁇ s while rotating the winding core at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s in an environment of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%.
  • a graph was obtained in which the horizontal axis was the position (mm) and the vertical axis was the displacement amount (mm).
  • This measurement is performed from the second tip on the side opposite to the first tip on the double-sided tape side of the second interposition portion to the first tip.
  • the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is used as the winding core.
  • the difference in height between the winding core and the second intervening portion was defined as the thickness of the second interposing portion.
  • the graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
  • the first position which is the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve, was found at the point where the displacement amount starts to increase.
  • a virtual line perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line was drawn through the position where the displacement amount was the highest.
  • the length L4 was obtained by obtaining the distance between the first position and the second position with the intersection of the virtual line and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the second position.
  • the cross-sectional area S3 was calculated by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the region from the first position to the second position and totaling them.
  • the width between the measurement points was calculated from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core based on the above mathematical formula (3), and was 6.24 ⁇ m.
  • the length L4 / maximum thickness T6 and the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 were obtained by using the obtained length L4, maximum thickness T6, and cross-sectional area S3.
  • the roll body according to Comparative Example 1 had a long deformation relaxation length at the winding start end and a deformation relaxation length at the double-sided tape. This is because since the first gap was hollow, the step caused by the winding start end of the acrylic resin film was large, and because the second gap was hollow, the step caused by the double-sided tape was large. it is conceivable that.
  • the roll bodies according to Examples 1 to 12 were shorter than the roll bodies according to Comparative Example 1 together with the deformation relaxation length at the winding start end and the deformation relaxation length in the double-sided tape.
  • the first filled portion of the roll body according to Examples 3 and 8 to 16 has a length L1 / thickness T2 or (length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2 of 90 or more, and / or an area S1 / thickness T2.
  • (area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2 was 3.0 or more, the deformation relaxation length at the winding start end portion was larger than that of the roll body according to Example 7 in which the length L1 / thickness T2 was less than 90. It was short.
  • the second intervening portion of the roll body according to Examples 13 to 16 has a length L4 / maximum thickness T6 of 12 or more and / or a cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 of 2.5 or more.
  • the deformation relaxation length of the tape was short.
  • the shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition at the time of application was 60 Pa ⁇ s or more, so that the winding core and the acrylic resin film or PET film were formed. No protrusion of the above composition from between was confirmed in either the case where pressure was applied during application and during winding.
  • the shear viscosity of the composition at the time of coating was less than 60 Pa ⁇ s, but it was 15 Pa ⁇ s or more, so that there was no protrusion during coating. However, when the pressure at the time of winding was applied, the composition was confirmed to protrude.
  • the shear viscosity of the composition at the time of application was less than 15 Pa ⁇ s, so that the composition was confirmed to protrude from the core and the acrylic resin film. ..
  • a reworkability test was conducted on the roll body according to Example 3. Specifically, first, the acrylic resin film was unwound to expose the first filling portion. Then, a blade-shaped tool was made at the end of the first filling portion so as not to damage the winding core, and an attempt was made to slowly peel the first filling portion from the winding core with a finger.
  • the evaluation criteria for reworkability were good when the first filling part was peeled off cleanly, and poor when a part of the first filling part remained on the winding core due to breakage or the like. In such an evaluation, the first filled portion of the roll body according to Example 3 was peeled off cleanly, which was good.
  • the reworkability test was performed on the rolls according to the examples other than the third example, the reworkability was as good as that of the first filled portion according to the third embodiment.
  • the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion in the roll body according to the examples other than Example 3 is 3.0 MPa or more and 5.5 MPa or less, the elongation at the time of cutting is 250% or more and 600% or less, and the tear strength.
  • the hardness is 6 N / mm or more and 25 N / mm or less, the hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion measured by the durometer type A is 10 ° or more and 50 ° or less, and the linear shrinkage of the constituent material of the first filling portion.
  • the rate was in the range of 0% or more and 1.0% or less. Further, as shown in Table 1, the edge thickness T1 of the first filled portion of the roll body according to Examples 1 to 16 was in the range of 1.5 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less. When the first filling portion was peeled off, or when cleaning or wiping, a thicker edge thickness T1 was slightly easier to peel off or remove the first filling portion.
  • the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition is applied so as to be in contact with the first end face and the second end face of the double-sided tape, but in Examples 1 to 12, the silicone resin composition When the silicone resin composition or silicone rubber composition is applied or the double-sided tape is arranged so that the separation distance between the silicone rubber composition and the double-sided tape is 1 mm, a roll body can be stably produced.
  • the obtained rolls were also substantially the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Examples 1 to 12, respectively.
  • the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition is applied or the double-sided tape is applied so that the separation distance between the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition and the double-sided tape is 3 mm.
  • the rolls were arranged, the rolls could be stably produced, and the obtained rolls were almost the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Examples 1 to 12, respectively.
  • the silicone resin composition or the like is applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core, and then the separation distance between the second end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone resin composition or the like is 1 mm or 3 mm.
  • a double-sided tape is placed on the surface, and the silicone resin composition or the like is linearly applied along the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the first end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone resin composition or the like is 1 mm or 3 mm. I went in the order of doing.
  • Example 2 when the silicone rubber composition was applied and the double-sided tape was arranged so that the separation distance between the silicone rubber and the double-sided tape was 5 mm, a roll body could be stably produced and obtained.
  • the rolls were also substantially the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Example 2.
  • the edge thickness T1 was 2 ⁇ m.
  • the silicone rubber composition is applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core, and then the double-sided tape is arranged so that the separation distance between the second end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition is 5 mm. Further, the silicone rubber composition was applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the first end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition was 5 mm.
  • Example 3 a silicone rubber composition having a shear viscosity at the time of application of 40 Pa ⁇ s was used.
  • the shear viscosity at the time of application was set to 7 Pa ⁇ s, and between the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition.
  • the separation distance was set to 11 mm
  • the silicone rubber composition located on the first end surface side of the double-sided tape flowed to the side opposite to the double-sided tape side.
  • the shear viscosity was set to 250 Pa ⁇ s and the silicone rubber composition was arranged so as to be in contact with the first end face and the second end face of the double-sided tape, even if the acrylic resin film was wound, it was sufficient. Since it was difficult to make it flow, another step was generated at the beginning and end of winding, although it was slight after curing.

Abstract

Provided are: a manufacturing method for a roll body, said method making it possible to effectively reduce a level difference caused at a winding start end of a sheet; and such a roll body. One aspect of the present invention provides a manufacturing method for a roll body 10 including a winding core 11 and an elongate sheet 12 that is wound around an outer circumferential surface 11A of the winding core 11, said method including: a step for applying a coating material 18 onto the outer circumferential surface 11A of the winding core 11 along a width direction DR1 of the winding core 11; a step for placing, on the outer circumferential surface 11A, a winding start end 12A in a longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12; and a step for winding the sheet 12 around the winding core 11 and filling at least a first gap 13 with the coating material 18. The application of the coating material 18 or the placement of the winding start end 12A is performed such that the coating material 18 comes into contact with or close to a distal end surface 12A1 located in the longitudinal direction DR2 of the winding start end 12A, and the first gap 13 is located between the winding core 11 and the first winding of the sheet 12 and is in contact with the distal end surface 12A1.

Description

ロール体の製造方法およびロール体Roll body manufacturing method and roll body 関連出願の参照Reference of related application
 本願は、先行する日本国出願である特願2019-127551(出願日:2019年7月9日)および特願2020-7594(出願日:2020年1月21日)の優先権の利益を享受するものであり、その開示内容全体は引用することにより本明細書の一部とされる。 The present application enjoys the priority benefits of the preceding Japanese applications, Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-127551 (Filing Date: July 9, 2019) and Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-7594 (Filing Date: January 21, 2020). And the entire disclosure is hereby incorporated by reference.
 本発明は、ロール体の製造方法およびロール体に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for producing a roll body and a roll body.
 フィルム等のシートは、製造効率の観点から、ある程度の量をまとめて製造し、巻芯に巻回されて、ロール体として保存されることが多い。このようなロール体においては、シートの巻き始め端部に起因して段差が生じてしまう。具体的には、1周目のシートが2周目に移る際に段差が生じてしまい、2周目以降にもその段差が現れてしまう。なお、シートの種類によっては、この段差が生じると、シートが変形してしまい、元に戻らないものもある。 From the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency, sheets such as films are often manufactured in bulk in a certain amount, wound around a core, and stored as a roll. In such a roll body, a step is generated due to the winding start end portion of the sheet. Specifically, a step is generated when the seat on the first lap moves to the second lap, and the step appears on the second and subsequent laps as well. Depending on the type of sheet, if this step occurs, the sheet will be deformed and may not be restored.
 現在、ウレタン樹脂のようなクッション性が高いクッションテープを巻芯の外周面に貼り付け、または埋め込んで、クッションテープにシートを埋め込むことにより、上記段差を緩和する技術(例えば、特許文献1参照)や、外周面にゴムを有する巻芯を用いて、ゴムにシートを埋め込むことにより、段差を緩和する技術、またはシートの巻き始め端部の先端に沿って巻芯の外周面に弾力を有する緩衝材を設ける技術が提案されている(例えば、特許文献2参照)。 Currently, a technique for alleviating the above-mentioned step by attaching or embedding a cushion tape having a high cushioning property such as urethane resin on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and embedding a sheet in the cushion tape (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Alternatively, a technique for alleviating a step by embedding a sheet in the rubber using a winding core having rubber on the outer peripheral surface, or a cushioning having elasticity on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the tip of the winding start end of the sheet. A technique for providing a material has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).
特開2005-75521号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-75521 特開2013-199355号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-199355
 しかしながら、上記技術のいずれであっても、有効に段差を緩和できないのが、現状である。 However, the current situation is that any of the above technologies cannot effectively alleviate the step.
 また、シートを巻芯に巻回する際には、まず、巻芯の外周面に両面テープ等の固定部材を貼り付けて、シートの一部(例えば、巻き始め端部)を固定するが、この固定部材に起因して段差が生じてしまうこともある。 Further, when winding the sheet around the winding core, first, a fixing member such as double-sided tape is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core to fix a part of the sheet (for example, the winding start end). A step may be generated due to this fixing member.
 本発明は、上記問題を解決するためになされたものである。すなわち、シートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差を有効に緩和できるロール体の製造方法およびこのようなロール体を提供することを目的とする。また、固定部材に起因する段差を有効に緩和できるロール体の製造方法およびこのようなロール体を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the above problems. That is, it is an object of the present invention to provide a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively alleviating a step caused by a winding start end portion of a sheet and such a roll body. Another object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively reducing a step caused by a fixing member and such a roll body.
 本発明は、以下の発明を含む。
[1]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に塗布材料を塗布する工程と、前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部を前記外周面に配置する工程と、前記巻芯に前記シートを巻回して、少なくとも第1隙間に前記塗布材料を充填する工程と、を備え、前記塗布材料の塗布または前記巻き始め端部の配置は、前記塗布材料が前記巻き始め端部の前記長手方向に位置する先端面と接触または近接するように行われ、前記第1隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記先端面に接する隙間である、製造方法。
The present invention includes the following inventions.
[1] A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, wherein the outer circumference of the winding core is along the width direction of the winding core. A step of applying the coating material to the surface, a step of arranging the winding start end portion of the sheet in the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surface, and a step of winding the sheet around the winding core to apply the coating material to at least the first gap. The step of filling is provided, and the coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the winding start end portion is performed so that the coating material is in contact with or close to the tip surface of the winding start end portion located in the longitudinal direction. The manufacturing method, wherein the first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the tip surface.
[2]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部を前記外周面に配置する工程と、前記巻芯に前記シートを少なくとも1周巻回して、第1隙間を有する中間ロール体を得る工程と、前記中間ロール体の外周面を構成する前記シートの表面に、前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って塗布材料を塗布する工程と、前記塗布材料を塗布した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを再度巻回して、前記シート間に前記塗布材料を介在させる工程と、を備え、前記第1隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する隙間であり、前記塗布材料が、前記中間ロール体の前記外周面を構成する前記シートの前記表面における、前記第1隙間に対応する第1領域に塗布される、製造方法。 [2] A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, wherein the winding start end portion of the sheet in the longitudinal direction is set on the outer peripheral surface. The step of arranging the sheet, the step of winding the sheet around the winding core at least once to obtain an intermediate roll body having a first gap, and the step of winding the sheet on the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body. A step of applying the coating material along the width direction of the core and a step of winding the sheet around the winding core again after applying the coating material and interposing the coating material between the sheets are provided. The first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first circumference and is in contact with the tip surface located at the winding start end in the longitudinal direction, and the coating material is the coating material. A manufacturing method, which is applied to a first region corresponding to the first gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body.
[3]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に、前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定するための、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有する固定部材を配置する工程と、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に塗布材料を塗布する工程と、前記固定部材を介して前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定する工程と、前記塗布材料を塗布し、かつ前記巻芯に前記シートの一部を固定した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを巻回して、第2隙間および第3隙間の少なくともいずれかに前記塗布材料を充填する工程と、を備え、前記塗布材料の塗布または前記固定部材の配置は、前記塗布材料が前記第1端面側または前記第2端面側に位置し、かつ前記塗布材料が前記第1端面または前記第2端面に接触または近接するように行われ、あるいは前記塗布材料が前記第1端面側および前記第2端面側のそれぞれに位置し、かつ前記塗布材料が前記第1端面および前記第2端面と接触または近接するように行われ、前記第2隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記第1端面に接する隙間であり、前記第3隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記第2端面に接する隙間である、製造方法。 [3] A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, wherein the outer circumference of the winding core is along the width direction of the winding core. A fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface is arranged on the surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core. A step of applying a coating material to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the width direction of the winding core, and a step of fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core via the fixing member. After applying the coating material and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, the sheet is wound around the winding core to fill at least one of the second gap and the third gap with the coating material. In the coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the fixing member, the coating material is located on the first end surface side or the second end surface side, and the coating material is the first end surface or the said. The coating material is placed in contact with or close to the second end face, or the coating material is located on the first end face side and the second end face side, respectively, and the coating material is in contact with or in close contact with the first end face and the second end face. The second gap is a gap between the core and the sheet on the first lap and is in contact with the first end surface, and the third gap is the winding. A manufacturing method, which is a gap located between the core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface.
[4]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に、前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定するための、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有する固定部材を配置する工程と、前記固定部材を介して前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定する工程と、前記巻芯に前記シートを少なくとも1周巻回して、第2隙間および第3隙間を有する中間ロール体を得る工程と、前記中間ロール体の外周面を構成する前記シートの表面に、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に沿って塗布材料を塗布する工程と、前記塗布材料を塗布した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを再度巻回する工程と、を備え、前記第2隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する隙間であり、前記第3隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する隙間であり、前記塗布材料は、前記中間ロール体の前記外周面を構成する前記シートの前記表面における、前記第2隙間に対応する第2領域および前記第3隙間に対応する第3領域の少なくともいずれかに塗布される、製造方法。 [4] A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, wherein the outer circumference of the winding core is along the width direction of the winding core. A fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface is arranged on the surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core. A step, a step of fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core via the fixing member, and an intermediate roll body having a second gap and a third gap by winding the sheet around the winding core at least once. A step of applying a coating material to the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core, and a step of applying the coating material and then the winding core. A step of rewinding the sheet is provided, and the second gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member. The third gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member, and the coating material is the outer periphery of the intermediate roll body. A manufacturing method, which is applied to at least one of a second region corresponding to the second gap and a third region corresponding to the third gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the surface.
[5]前記塗布材料が、流動性を有する、上記[1]ないし[4]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [5] The production method according to any one of the above [1] to [4], wherein the coating material has fluidity.
[6]前記塗布材料が、硬化性高分子組成物である、上記[1]ないし[5]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [6] The production method according to any one of the above [1] to [5], wherein the coating material is a curable polymer composition.
[7]前記塗布材料が、着色材料または発光材料を含んでいる、上記[1]ないし[6]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [7] The production method according to any one of [1] to [6] above, wherein the coating material contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
[8]前記シートが、樹脂フィルムを有する、上記[1]ないし[6]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [8] The production method according to any one of the above [1] to [6], wherein the sheet has a resin film.
[9]前記シートが、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、またはシクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む、上記[1]ないし[7]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [9] The production method according to any one of the above [1] to [7], wherein the sheet contains an acrylic resin, a polyester resin, or a cycloolefin polymer resin.
[10]前記シートの厚みが、15μm以上300μm以下である、上記[8]または[9]に記載の製造方法。 [10] The production method according to the above [8] or [9], wherein the thickness of the sheet is 15 μm or more and 300 μm or less.
[11]前記シートが、基材と、前記基材に積層された1以上の機能層とを有する積層体である、上記[1]ないし[10]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [11] The production method according to any one of the above [1] to [10], wherein the sheet is a laminate having a base material and one or more functional layers laminated on the base material.
[12]前記シートが、光学フィルム、偏光板、または表示装置に用いられる、上記[1]ないし[11]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [12] The production method according to any one of [1] to [11] above, wherein the sheet is used for an optical film, a polarizing plate, or a display device.
[13]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記1周目の前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する第1隙間と、前記第1隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1充填部と、を備える、ロール体。 [13] A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, and said. The first gap in contact with the tip surface located in the longitudinal direction at the winding start end of the sheet in the longitudinal direction on the first lap, and the first filling that fills the first gap and extends in the width direction of the winding core. A roll body that includes a part.
[14]前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、前記第2隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2充填部、および前記第3隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3充填部の少なくともいずれかと、をさらに備える、上記[11]に記載のロール体。 [14] The winding is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, has a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core, and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface. A fixing member that fixes a part of the sheet to the core, a second gap that is located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and is in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and the winding core. A third gap located between the sheet and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member, and a second filling portion filled in the second gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core. The roll body according to the above [11], further comprising at least one of a third filling portion filled in the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
[15]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記1周目の前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する第1隙間と、1周目以降の前記シート間における少なくとも前記第1隙間に対応する第1領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1介在部と、を備える、ロール体。 [15] A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, and said. The first region corresponding to at least the first gap between the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap and the first lap A roll body provided with a first intervening portion extending in the width direction of the winding core.
[16]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面と反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、前記第2隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2充填部、および前記第3隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3充填部の少なくともいずれかと、を備える、ロール体。 [16] A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, which is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and is wound. A fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, and the winding core and the first circumference. A second gap located between the sheets and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and between the winding core and the sheet on the first circumference, and the second end surface of the fixing member. A third gap in contact with the third gap, a second filling portion filled in the second gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core, and a third filling portion filled in the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core. A roll body comprising at least one of the parts.
[17]巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面と反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、1周目以降の前記シート間における、前記第2隙間に対応する第2領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2介在部、および1周目以降の前記シート間における、前記第3隙間に対応する第3領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3介在部の少なくともいずれかと、を備える、ロール体。 [17] A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, which is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and is wound. A fixing member having a first end surface extending in the width direction of the core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, and the winding core and the first circumference. A second gap located between the sheets and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member, and between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap, and the second end surface of the fixing member. A second intervening portion provided in a second region corresponding to the second gap between the third gap in contact with the winding core and the sheet after the first lap, and extending in the width direction of the winding core, and the first lap and after. A roll body comprising at least one of a third intervening portion provided in a third region corresponding to the third gap between the sheets and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
[18]前記第1充填部に連設され、かつ1周目の前記シートと2周目の前記シートの間に介在した第4介在部をさらに備える、上記[13]または[14]に記載のロール体。 [18] The above-mentioned [13] or [14], further comprising a fourth intervening portion that is connected to the first filling portion and is interposed between the sheet on the first lap and the sheet on the second lap. Roll body.
[19]前記第1充填部に連設され、かつ1周目の前記シートと2周目の前記シートの間に介在した第4介在部が存在しない場合には、前記第1充填部における前記先端面に接する位置での厚みT2に対する前記第1充填部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL1の比が、90以上であり、前記第4介在部が存在する場合には、前記第1充填部における前記先端面に接する位置での厚みT2に対する前記第1充填部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL1および前記第4介在部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL2の合計の比が、90以上である、上記[13]または[14]のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 [19] When the fourth intervening portion that is continuously provided in the first filling portion and is interposed between the sheet on the first lap and the sheet on the second lap does not exist, the said in the first filling portion. When the ratio of the length L1 of the sheet in the first filling portion along the longitudinal direction to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface is 90 or more and the fourth intervening portion is present, the said. The length L1 of the sheet in the first filling portion along the longitudinal direction with respect to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface of the first filling portion and along the longitudinal direction of the sheet in the fourth intervening portion. The roll body according to any one of the above [13] and [14], wherein the total ratio of the lengths L2 is 90 or more.
[20]前記第4介在部が存在しない場合には、前記第1充填部の前記厚みT2に対する、前記シートの前記長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第1充填部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S1の比が、3.0以上であり、前記第4介在部が存在する場合には、前記第1充填部の前記厚みT2に対する、前記シートの長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第1充填部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S1および前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第4介在部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S2の合計の比が、3.0以上である、上記[19]に記載のロール体。 [20] When the fourth intervening portion is not present, the outer peripheral surface of the winding core in a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion. When the ratio of the area S1 of the region sandwiched between the surface of the first filling portion and the surface of the first filling portion is 3.0 or more and the fourth intervening portion is present, the said is made with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion. The area S1 of the region sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and the surface of the first filling portion in the plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core, and the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and the fourth interposition. The roll body according to the above [19], wherein the ratio of the total area S2 of the regions sandwiched by the surfaces of the portions is 3.0 or more.
[21]前記第2介在部の厚みを前記シートの長手方向に沿って測定したとき、前記第2介在部の最大厚みT6に対する、前記長手方向において前記第2介在部における前記固定部材側の第1先端とは反対側の第2先端から前記第2介在部の前記最大厚みT6となる位置までの長さL4の比が、12以上である、上記[17]に記載のロール体。 [21] When the thickness of the second intervening portion is measured along the longitudinal direction of the sheet, the second intervening portion on the fixing member side of the second intervening portion in the longitudinal direction with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second interposing portion. The roll body according to the above [17], wherein the ratio of the length L4 from the second tip opposite to the first tip to the position where the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion is 12 or more.
[22]前記第2介在部の最大厚みT6に対する前記シートの前記長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記第2介在部の前記第2先端から前記最大厚みT6となる位置までの前記第2介在部の断面積S3の比が、2.5以上である、上記[21]に記載のロール体。 [22] From the second tip of the second intervening portion to the position where the maximum thickness T6 is obtained in the plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second interposing portion. The roll body according to the above [21], wherein the ratio of the cross-sectional area S3 of the second intervening portion is 2.5 or more.
[23]前記シートが、前記シートの前記長手方向に沿って延びる両端部に、前記巻芯の径方向に突出した凸部をそれぞれ有する、上記[15]または[17]に記載のロール体。 [23] The roll body according to the above [15] or [17], wherein the sheet has convex portions protruding in the radial direction of the winding core at both ends extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet.
[24]前記シートが、樹脂フィルムを有する、上記[13]ないし[23]のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 [24] The roll body according to any one of the above [13] to [23], wherein the sheet has a resin film.
[25]前記シートが、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、またはシクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む、上記[13]ないし[23]のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 [25] The roll body according to any one of [13] to [23] above, wherein the sheet contains an acrylic resin, a polyester resin, or a cycloolefin polymer resin.
[26]前記シートの厚みが、15μm以上300μm以下である、上記[24]または[25]に記載のロール体。 [26] The roll body according to the above [24] or [25], wherein the thickness of the sheet is 15 μm or more and 300 μm or less.
[27]前記第1充填部が、着色材料または発光材料を含む、上記[13]に記載のロール体。 [27] The roll body according to the above [13], wherein the first filling portion contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
[28]前記第2充填部および前記第3充填部が、それぞれ着色材料または発光材料を含む、上記[14]または[16]に記載のロール体。 [28] The roll body according to the above [14] or [16], wherein the second filling portion and the third filling portion contain a coloring material or a light emitting material, respectively.
[29]前記第1介在部が、着色材料または発光材料を含む、上記[15]に記載のロール体。 [29] The roll body according to the above [15], wherein the first interposition portion contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
[30]前記第2介在部および前記3介在部が、それぞれ着色材料または発光材料を含む、上記[17]に記載のロール体。 [30] The roll body according to the above [17], wherein the second interposition portion and the third interposition portion contain a coloring material or a light emitting material, respectively.
[31]前記第1充填部が、硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、上記[13]に記載のロール体。 [31] The roll body according to the above [13], wherein the first filling portion contains a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
[32]前記第2充填部および前記第3充填部が、それぞれ硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、上記[14]または[17]に記載のロール体。 [32] The roll body according to the above [14] or [17], wherein the second filling portion and the third filling portion each contain a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
[33]前記第1介在部が、硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、上記[15]に記載のロール体。 [33] The roll body according to the above [15], wherein the first interposition portion contains a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
[34]前記第2介在部および前記第3介在部が、それぞれ硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、上記[17]に記載のロール体。 [34] The roll body according to the above [17], wherein the second interposition portion and the third interposition portion each contain a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
[35]前記シートが、基材と、前記基材に積層された1以上の機能層とを有する積層体である、上記[13]ないし[34]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [35] The production method according to any one of [13] to [34] above, wherein the sheet is a laminate having a base material and one or more functional layers laminated on the base material.
[36]前記シートが、光学フィルム、偏光板、または表示装置に用いられる、上記[13]ないし[35]のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 [36] The manufacturing method according to any one of [13] to [35] above, wherein the sheet is used for an optical film, a polarizing plate, or a display device.
 本発明の一の態様によれば、シートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差を有効に緩和できるロール体の製造方法およびこのようなロール体を提供できる。また、本発明の他の態様によれば、固定部材に起因する段差を有効に緩和できるロール体の製造方法およびこのようなロール体を提供できる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively alleviating a step caused by a winding start end portion of a sheet and such a roll body. Further, according to another aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a roll body capable of effectively alleviating a step caused by a fixing member and such a roll body.
図1は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の斜視図である。FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a roll body according to the first embodiment. 図2は、面内位相差を測定する位置を特定するためのサンプルの平面図である。FIG. 2 is a plan view of a sample for specifying a position for measuring the in-plane phase difference. 図3は、図1のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG. 図4は、図1のロール体の各構成要素の寸法を説明するための図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG. 図5は、図1のロール体の第1充填部の先端部付近を拡大した図である。FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tip end portion of the first filling portion of the roll body of FIG. 図6は、図1のロール体における領域R1と領域R2を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a region R1 and a region R2 in the roll body of FIG. 図7は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図8は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図9は、レーザー変位計による測定位置を特定するためのロール体の平面図である。FIG. 9 is a plan view of the roll body for specifying the measurement position by the laser displacement meter. 図10は、レーザー変位計の測定に基づいて作成される位置に対する変位量のイメージグラフである。FIG. 10 is an image graph of the amount of displacement with respect to the position created based on the measurement of the laser displacement meter. 図11は、面積S1、S2を求めるために、図10のイメージグラフの一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a part of the image graph of FIG. 10 in order to obtain the areas S1 and S2. 図12は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図13は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 13 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図14は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図15は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図16は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 16 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図17(A)および図17(B)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。17 (A) and 17 (B) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図18(A)および図18(B)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。18 (A) and 18 (B) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図19(A)~図19(C)は、第1実施形態に係る他のロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。19 (A) to 19 (C) are diagrams schematically showing a manufacturing process of another roll body according to the first embodiment. 図20(A)および図20(B)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。20 (A) and 20 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図21(A)および図21(B)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。21 (A) and 21 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図22(A)~図22(D)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。22 (A) to 22 (D) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図23(A)~図23(C)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。23 (A) to 23 (C) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図24(A)および図24(B)は、第1実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。24 (A) and 24 (B) are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the first embodiment. 図25は、第2実施形態に係るロール体の斜視図である。FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the roll body according to the second embodiment. 図26は、図25のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG. 25. 図27は、図25のロール体の各構成要素の寸法を説明するための図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG. 25. 図28は、図25に示される第2介在部の最大厚みおよび長さを測定するときの図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram when measuring the maximum thickness and length of the second interposition portion shown in FIG. 25. 図29は、断面積S3を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional area S3. 図30は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 30 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図31は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図32は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図33は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 33 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図34は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 34 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図35は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図36は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図37は、第2実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a part of another roll body according to the second embodiment. 図38(A)~図38(C)は、第2実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。38 (A) to 38 (C) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the second embodiment. 図39(A)および図39(B)は、第2実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。39 (A) and 39 (B) are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the second embodiment. 図40(A)は、実施例7に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフであり、図40(B)は、実施例8に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフであり、図40(C)は、実施例9に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフである。FIG. 40 (A) is a graph showing the amount of displacement of the roll body according to the seventh embodiment with respect to the position around the first filling portion, and FIG. 40 (B) is the first filling of the roll body according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the portion, and FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the first filled portion of the roll body according to the ninth embodiment.
[第1実施形態]
 以下、本発明の第1実施形態に係るロール体について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図1は、本実施形態に係るロール体の斜視図であり、図2は、面内位相差を測定する位置を特定するためのサンプルの平面図であり、図3は、図1のロール体の一部を拡大した図であり、図4は、図1のロール体の各構成要素の寸法を説明するための図であり、図5は、図1のロール体の第1充填部の先端部付近を拡大した図である。図6は、図1のロール体における領域R1と領域R2を示す図であり、図9は、レーザー変位計による測定位置を特定するためのロール体の平面図であり、図10は、レーザー変位計の測定に基づいて作成される位置に対する変位量のイメージグラフであり、図11は、面積S1、S2を求めるために、図10のイメージグラフの一部を拡大した図である。図7、図8、図12~図16は、本実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図である。図17~図19は、本実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。図20~図24は、本実施形態に係るロール体の他の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。
[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the roll body according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a roll body according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a plan view of a sample for specifying a position for measuring an in-plane phase difference, and FIG. 3 is a roll body of FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a part of the above, FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the dimensions of each component of the roll body of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 is a view showing the tip of the first filling portion of the roll body of FIG. It is an enlarged view around the part. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a region R1 and a region R2 in the roll body of FIG. 1, FIG. 9 is a plan view of the roll body for specifying a measurement position by a laser displacement meter, and FIG. 10 is a laser displacement. It is an image graph of the displacement amount with respect to the position created based on the measurement of the meter, and FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a part of the image graph of FIG. 10 in order to obtain the areas S1 and S2. 7, FIG. 8, and FIGS. 12 to 16 are enlarged views of a part of another roll body according to the present embodiment. 17 to 19 are views schematically showing the manufacturing process of the roll body according to the present embodiment. 20 to 24 are diagrams schematically showing other manufacturing processes of the roll body according to the present embodiment.
<<<ロール体>>>
 図1に示されるロール体10は、巻芯11と、巻芯11の外周面11Aに巻回された長尺状のシート12とを備えている。ロール体10は、図3に示されるように、巻芯11とシート12の間に位置する第1隙間13に充填された第1充填部14と、巻芯11とシート12の間に位置する第2隙間15に充填された第2充填部16と、シート12の一部を巻芯11に固定するための固定部材17とをさらに備えている。また、ロール体10は、第1充填部14に連設され、かつ1周目のシート12と2周目のシート12の間に介在した第4介在部18をさらに備えている。図3に示されるロール体10は、第4介在部18を備えているが、図7に示されるロール体10のように第4介在部を備えていなくともよい。シート12は、巻芯11に複数周以上、例えば2周以上巻回されている。
<<< Roll body >>
The roll body 10 shown in FIG. 1 includes a winding core 11 and a long sheet 12 wound around the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. As shown in FIG. 3, the roll body 10 is located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 and the first filling portion 14 filled in the first gap 13 located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12. A second filling portion 16 filled in the second gap 15 and a fixing member 17 for fixing a part of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11 are further provided. Further, the roll body 10 is further provided with a fourth intervening portion 18 which is connected to the first filling portion 14 and is interposed between the sheet 12 on the first lap and the sheet 12 on the second lap. Although the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 3 includes the fourth intervening portion 18, it does not have to include the fourth intervening portion as in the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 7. The sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 by a plurality of turns, for example, two or more turns.
<<巻芯>>
 巻芯11の形状は、特に限定されないが、シート12を容易に巻回できる観点から、円柱状または円筒状であることが好ましい。図1に示される巻芯11は、円筒状となっている。巻芯が円筒状である場合には、巻芯11の幅方向DR1の孔11Bに巻取装置のチャック部材が挿入されることにより、ロール体10を保持できる。巻芯が円柱状の場合には、巻芯は巻芯を貫通する軸部材を備えており、軸部材を巻取装置に装着することにより、巻取装置にロール体を保持できる。
<< Core >>
The shape of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but is preferably cylindrical or cylindrical from the viewpoint that the sheet 12 can be easily wound. The winding core 11 shown in FIG. 1 has a cylindrical shape. When the winding core is cylindrical, the roll body 10 can be held by inserting the chuck member of the winding device into the hole 11B of the winding core 11 in the width direction DR1. When the winding core is cylindrical, the winding core includes a shaft member penetrating the winding core, and by attaching the shaft member to the winding device, the roll body can be held by the winding device.
 巻芯11の幅W1(図1参照)は、特に限定されないが、例えば、0.1m以上50m以下であってもよい。巻芯11の幅W1の下限は、0.2m以上、0.3m以上、0.7m以上、1.0m以上、1.5m以上、または2m以上であってもよく、上限は、30m以下、20m以下、10m以下、7m以下、5m以下、3.5m以下、3m以下、または2.5m以下であってもよい。巻芯の幅は、巻芯の幅を10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の幅中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の幅の算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。 The width W1 of the winding core 11 (see FIG. 1) is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.1 m or more and 50 m or less. The lower limit of the width W1 of the winding core 11 may be 0.2 m or more, 0.3 m or more, 0.7 m or more, 1.0 m or more, 1.5 m or more, or 2 m or more, and the upper limit is 30 m or less. It may be 20 m or less, 10 m or less, 7 m or less, 5 m or less, 3.5 m or less, 3 m or less, or 2.5 m or less. The width of the winding core can be obtained by measuring the width of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the width of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured widths of the 10 points.
 巻芯11の外径は、特に限定されないが、例えば、30mm以上8000mm以下であってもよい。巻芯11の外径の下限は、90mm以上または100mm以上であってもよく、また上限は、5000mm以下、3500mm以下、2000mm以下、1000mm以下、700mm以下、500mm以下、350mm以下、または300mm以下であってもよい。巻芯の外径は、巻芯の外径を10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の外径中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の外径の算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。 The outer diameter of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 30 mm or more and 8000 mm or less. The lower limit of the outer diameter of the winding core 11 may be 90 mm or more or 100 mm or more, and the upper limit is 5000 mm or less, 3500 mm or less, 2000 mm or less, 1000 mm or less, 700 mm or less, 500 mm or less, 350 mm or less, or 300 mm or less. There may be. The outer diameter of the winding core is obtained by measuring the outer diameter of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the outer diameters of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured outer diameters of the 10 points. be able to.
 巻芯11が円筒状である場合には、巻芯11の内径は、特に限定されないが、20mm以上7500mm以下であってもよい。巻芯11の内径の下限は、50mm以上、80mm以上、120mm以上、150mm以上であってもよく、また上限は、4500mm以下、3000mm以下、1500mm以下、900mm以下、600mm以下、400mm以下、250mm以下、または200mm以下であってもよい。巻芯の内径は、巻芯の内径を10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の内径中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の内径の算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。 When the winding core 11 has a cylindrical shape, the inner diameter of the winding core 11 is not particularly limited, but may be 20 mm or more and 7500 mm or less. The lower limit of the inner diameter of the winding core 11 may be 50 mm or more, 80 mm or more, 120 mm or more, 150 mm or more, and the upper limit may be 4500 mm or less, 3000 mm or less, 1500 mm or less, 900 mm or less, 600 mm or less, 400 mm or less, 250 mm or less. , Or 200 mm or less. The inner diameter of the winding core can be obtained by measuring the inner diameter of the winding core at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the inner diameters of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured inner diameters of the 10 points.
 シートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差を緩和するために、シートの巻き始め端部の位置がシートの厚み分低くなるように巻芯の外周面におけるシートが接する部分に段差を形成することもあるが、巻芯11の外周面11Aにおけるシート12が接する部分には、このような段差は形成されていない。外周面11Aの上記部分に段差を有しない巻芯11を用いることにより、様々な厚みのシート12にも対応することができる。本明細書における「巻芯の外周面におけるシートが接する部分に段差が形成されていない」とは、巻芯の中央部、および中央部から巻芯の幅方向に100mm以上離れた部分の各周において、それぞれ高さの差が3μm以上となる部分がないことを意味するものとする。なお、巻芯11の外周面11Aにおけるシート12が接する部分に、上記高さの差が3μm未満となる段差は形成されていてもよい。 In order to alleviate the step caused by the winding start end of the sheet, a step may be formed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core where the sheet contacts so that the position of the sheet winding start end is lowered by the thickness of the sheet. However, such a step is not formed in the portion of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in contact with the sheet 12. By using a winding core 11 having no step on the outer peripheral surface 11A, it is possible to handle sheets 12 having various thicknesses. In the present specification, "a step is not formed in the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the winding core in which the sheet contacts" means the central portion of the winding core and the circumference of each portion separated from the central portion by 100 mm or more in the width direction of the winding core. In, it is assumed that there is no portion where the difference in height is 3 μm or more. A step may be formed on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 where the sheet 12 is in contact, so that the height difference is less than 3 μm.
 巻芯11を構成する材料は、特に限定されない。巻芯11を構成する材料としては、例えば、紙、プラスチック、または金属等が挙げられる。紙には、樹脂を含浸させた紙も含まれる。プラスチックとしては、繊維強化プラスチック(FRP/Fiber Reinforced Plastics)、ポリエチレン(PE)やポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン、ポリ塩化ビニル(PVC)、ポリスチレン(PS)、アクリロニトリル・ブタジエン・スチレン共重合体(ABS)、フェノール樹脂、ナイロン等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、例えば光学用のコーティング加工する場合は、重量、加工性および強度の観点から、繊維強化プラスチック(FRP)が好ましい。繊維強化プラスチックとしては例えば、エポキシ樹脂やフェノール樹脂からなる主体に、ガラス、エポキシ、ポリエステル、カーボン、アラミド等の繊維をハイブリッドさせたものが挙げられる。金属としては、例えば、鉄、ステンレス鋼(SUS)、アルミニウム等が挙げられる。 The material constituting the winding core 11 is not particularly limited. Examples of the material constituting the winding core 11 include paper, plastic, metal and the like. Paper also includes paper impregnated with resin. Examples of plastics include fiber reinforced plastics (FRP / Fiber Reinforced Plastics), polyolefins such as polyethylene (PE) and polypropylene (PP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polystyrene (PS), and acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (ABS). ), Phenolic resin, nylon and the like. Among these, fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) is preferable from the viewpoint of weight, workability and strength, for example, in the case of coating for optics. Examples of fiber-reinforced plastics include those obtained by hybridizing fibers such as glass, epoxy, polyester, carbon, and aramid with a main body made of epoxy resin or phenol resin. Examples of the metal include iron, stainless steel (SUS), aluminum and the like.
<<シート>>
 シート12は、長尺状のものである。具体的には、シート12は、幅に対して厚みが充分薄く、また長さが充分長いものである。
<< Sheet >>
The sheet 12 has a long shape. Specifically, the sheet 12 is sufficiently thin with respect to the width and sufficiently long in length.
 シート12の幅W2(図1参照)は、特に限定されないが、例えば、0.1m以上50m以下であってもよい。本明細書における「シートの幅」とは、シートの短手方向(巻芯の幅方向)の長さを意味する。シート12の幅W2の下限は、0.2m以上、0.3m以上、0.5m以上、1.0m以上、または2.0m以上であってもよく、上限は、30m以下、20m以下、10m以下、7m以下、5m以下、3.5m以下、または3m以下であってもよい。シートの幅は、シートの幅を10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の幅中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の幅の算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。 The width W2 of the sheet 12 (see FIG. 1) is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.1 m or more and 50 m or less. The "sheet width" in the present specification means the length of the sheet in the lateral direction (width direction of the winding core). The lower limit of the width W2 of the sheet 12 may be 0.2 m or more, 0.3 m or more, 0.5 m or more, 1.0 m or more, or 2.0 m or more, and the upper limit may be 30 m or less, 20 m or less, 10 m or more. Below, it may be 7 m or less, 5 m or less, 3.5 m or less, or 3 m or less. The width of the sheet can be obtained by measuring the width of the sheet at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the widths of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured widths of the 10 points.
 シート12の幅W2は、巻芯11の幅W1よりも小さくなっていることが好ましい。これにより、巻芯11によりシート12を確実に保持することができる。 The width W2 of the sheet 12 is preferably smaller than the width W1 of the winding core 11. As a result, the sheet 12 can be reliably held by the winding core 11.
 シート12の長さは、例えば、20m以上10000m以下であってもよい。本明細書における「シートの長さ」とは、シートの長手方向の長さを意味する。シート12の長さの下限は、30m以上、40m以上、または50m以上であってもよく、上限は、9000m以下または8000m以下であってもよい。 The length of the sheet 12 may be, for example, 20 m or more and 10000 m or less. As used herein, the term "sheet length" means the length of a sheet in the longitudinal direction. The lower limit of the length of the sheet 12 may be 30 m or more, 40 m or more, or 50 m or more, and the upper limit may be 9000 m or less or 8000 m or less.
 シート12の厚みは、特に限定されないが、例えば、3μm以上600μm以下であってもよい。シート12の厚みの下限は、10μm以上、15μm以上、20μm以上、または30μm以上であってもよく、上限は、500μm以下、400μm以下、300μm以下、200μm以下、110μm以下、または80μm以下であってもよい。用途により、薄膜が好まれる場合にはこの限りではなく、3μm以上50μm未満、更には40μm以下が好ましい。シートの厚みは、シートの厚みを10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の厚み中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の厚みの算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。なお、上記段差はシートの厚みが厚い場合は生じにくいが、薄くなるほど顕著になる。本発明は、シートの厚みが薄い(80μm以下、50μm未満、更には40μm以下)場合に特に有効である。 The thickness of the sheet 12 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 3 μm or more and 600 μm or less. The lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 may be 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, 20 μm or more, or 30 μm or more, and the upper limit is 500 μm or less, 400 μm or less, 300 μm or less, 200 μm or less, 110 μm or less, or 80 μm or less. May be good. Depending on the application, when a thin film is preferred, it is not limited to this, and it is preferably 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm, and further preferably 40 μm or less. The thickness of the sheet can be obtained by measuring the thickness of the sheet at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thickness of 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses of the 10 points. The step is less likely to occur when the sheet is thick, but becomes more remarkable as the sheet becomes thinner. The present invention is particularly effective when the thickness of the sheet is thin (80 μm or less, less than 50 μm, and further 40 μm or less).
 シート12が、例えば、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂(特に、ポリエチレンテレフタレート)、またはシクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む場合には、シート12の厚みは、15μm以上300μm以下であることが好ましい。シート12がこれらの樹脂のいずれかを含む場合、上記段差はシートの厚みが薄くなるほど顕著になるが、シートの厚みを極めて薄くすると、上記段差が逆に小さくなる傾向がある。例えば、後工程に50℃以上の加熱工程がある場合には、薄いシートであると、上記段差による変形が解消できる場合もある。しかし、シートの厚さがある程度の厚さ(例えば、15μm以上)であると、加熱工程を行っても上記変形が解消されないおそれがある。このため、シート12の厚みが15μm以上である場合に、特に有効である。また、シート12がこれらの樹脂のいずれかを含む場合、シートの厚みが厚すぎると、塗布材料が多量必要となる。このため、コスト低減の観点から、シート12の厚みは300μm以下であることが好ましい。また、これらの樹脂のいずれかを含む場合には、厚み300μmを超えると段差は生じにくいこともある。シート12がこれらの樹脂のいずれかを含む場合、シート12の厚みの下限は、20μm以上、35μm以上、または50μm以上であることがより好ましく、シート12の厚みの上限は、250μm以下、200μm以下、150μm以下、または100μm以下であることがより好ましい。これらの樹脂のいずれかを含む場合には、薄すぎず、厚すぎない厚みにおいて特に有効である。 When the sheet 12 contains, for example, an acrylic resin, a polyester resin (particularly polyethylene terephthalate), or a cycloolefin polymer resin, the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably 15 μm or more and 300 μm or less. When the sheet 12 contains any of these resins, the step becomes more remarkable as the thickness of the sheet becomes thinner, but when the thickness of the sheet becomes extremely thin, the step tends to become smaller on the contrary. For example, when there is a heating step of 50 ° C. or higher in the subsequent step, if the sheet is thin, the deformation due to the step may be eliminated. However, if the thickness of the sheet is a certain thickness (for example, 15 μm or more), the above deformation may not be eliminated even if the heating step is performed. Therefore, it is particularly effective when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 15 μm or more. Further, when the sheet 12 contains any of these resins, if the thickness of the sheet is too thick, a large amount of coating material is required. Therefore, from the viewpoint of cost reduction, the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably 300 μm or less. Further, when any of these resins is contained, a step may not easily occur if the thickness exceeds 300 μm. When the sheet 12 contains any of these resins, the lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is more preferably 20 μm or more, 35 μm or more, or 50 μm or more, and the upper limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is 250 μm or less and 200 μm or less. , 150 μm or less, or more preferably 100 μm or less. When any of these resins is included, it is particularly effective at a thickness that is neither too thin nor too thick.
 また、固定部材17が設けられている場合、固定部材17上にシート12が配置されるので、シート12と固定部材17の合計の厚みがシートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差に影響を与える。したがって、例えば、固定部材17の厚みが3μm以上10μm以下である場合を想定すると、シート12の厚みは薄い方が好ましいため、その上限は、130μm以下、さらには90μm以下であることが好ましい。また、固定部材が粘着テープの場合は、固定部材の厚みがシートの厚みの15%を超えると、上記段差への影響がさらに生じやすい。そのため、シート12の厚みは薄すぎない方が良く、シート12の厚みの下限は、例えば20μm以上または35μm以上であることが好ましい。 Further, when the fixing member 17 is provided, since the sheet 12 is arranged on the fixing member 17, the total thickness of the sheet 12 and the fixing member 17 affects the step caused by the winding start end of the sheet. .. Therefore, for example, assuming that the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 μm or more and 10 μm or less, the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably thin, and therefore the upper limit thereof is preferably 130 μm or less, more preferably 90 μm or less. Further, when the fixing member is an adhesive tape, if the thickness of the fixing member exceeds 15% of the thickness of the sheet, the influence on the step is more likely to occur. Therefore, the thickness of the sheet 12 should not be too thin, and the lower limit of the thickness of the sheet 12 is preferably, for example, 20 μm or more or 35 μm or more.
 シートとしては、例えば、フィルム、金属箔、紙等が挙げられる。フィルムは、例えば、樹脂フィルムであってもよい。光透過性が要求される用途(例えば、光学フィルム用途)に樹脂フィルムを用いる場合には、樹脂フィルムは光透過性を有することが好ましい。このような樹脂フィルムを構成する樹脂としては、光透過性を有すれば特に限定されないが、例えば、アクリル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂(ポリエチレン系樹脂、ポリプロピレン系樹脂、シクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂)、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアクリレート系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂(ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート等)、芳香族ポリエーテルケトン系樹脂、ポリエーテルサルフォン系樹脂、アセチルセルロース系樹脂(例えば、トリアセチルセルロース系樹脂)、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリアミドイミド系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、またはこれらの樹脂を2種以上混合した混合物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、比較的柔軟性の高い樹脂フィルム、例えばアクリル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、アセチルセルロース系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリアミドイミド系樹脂、またはポリアミド系樹脂を含む樹脂フィルムは、シートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差や固定部材に起因する段差によって変形しやすいため、本発明の技術は有効である。さらに、近年、大型ディスプレイには、歪みが少なく、かつ水分透過性が低い低透湿樹脂が好まれて用いられている。大型ディスプレイの場合、シート幅全体が製品になる場合が多いため、一部でも段差による変形が残っていると、全体を廃棄しなければならない。例えば、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、シクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂は大型ディスプレイに好ましく用いられるが、本発明の技術によれば、段差による変形を良好に防止でき、かつ量産性を向上させることができるため、本発明の技術はこれらの樹脂からなるシートに対して特に有効である。また、最終製品において薄さが求められる場合、例えば、厚みが50μm未満のフィルムを用いる場合には、いかなる素材のフィルムにおいても本発明の技術が好適である。 Examples of the sheet include film, metal leaf, paper and the like. The film may be, for example, a resin film. When a resin film is used in an application that requires light transmission (for example, an optical film application), the resin film preferably has light transmission. The resin constituting such a resin film is not particularly limited as long as it has light transmittance, but for example, acrylic resin, polyolefin resin (polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, cycloolefin polymer resin), polycarbonate. Based resin, polyacrylate resin, polyester resin (polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, etc.), aromatic polyether ketone resin, polyether sulfone resin, acetyl cellulose resin (for example, triacetyl cellulose resin), Examples thereof include a polyimide resin, a polyamideimide resin, a polyamide resin, and a mixture of two or more of these resins. Among these, resin films having relatively high flexibility, for example, acrylic resins, polyolefin resins, polyester resins, acetyl cellulose resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, or resin films containing polyamide resins are available. The technique of the present invention is effective because it is easily deformed by a step caused by the winding start end of the sheet and a step caused by the fixing member. Further, in recent years, a low moisture permeable resin having less distortion and low water permeability has been preferably used for large displays. In the case of a large display, the entire seat width is often a product, so if any deformation due to a step remains, the entire sheet must be discarded. For example, acrylic resins, polyester resins, and cycloolefin polymer resins are preferably used for large displays, but according to the technique of the present invention, deformation due to steps can be satisfactorily prevented and mass productivity can be improved. Therefore, the technique of the present invention is particularly effective for sheets made of these resins. Further, when thinness is required in the final product, for example, when a film having a thickness of less than 50 μm is used, the technique of the present invention is suitable for a film of any material.
 シート12が、光学フィルム用途である場合であって、特にアクリル系樹脂やシクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む場合には、シート12の面内位相差(リタデーション:Re)は、10nm以下であることが好ましい。シート12の面内位相差Reが10nm以下であるということは、光学的歪みが小さいということであり、シート12の製造時の残留応力がほぼないと言える。つまり、シート12の面内位相差Reが10nm以下であることは、シート12内のポリマーが均一であるため、シート12を長尺ロールにした場合、何等かの段差に起因して、シート12内部のポリマー状態起因の新たな段差になりにくくなるので、好ましい。シート12の面内位相差Reの上限は、ディスプレイ用途において、偏光子と組み合わせて用いる際に課題となる色むらやブラックアウトが生じにくいという観点から、8nm以下、または4nm以下であることがより好ましい。また、アクリル系樹脂の場合、光学用途であれば、従来のアクリル系樹脂フィルムのように曲げたら白くなるという現象が発生せず、またヘイズ値(全ヘイズ値)は1%以下または0.5%以下と小さい方が好ましい。 When the sheet 12 is used for an optical film and particularly contains an acrylic resin or a cycloolefin polymer resin, the in-plane retardation (retalation: Re) of the sheet 12 may be 10 nm or less. preferable. The fact that the in-plane retardation Re of the sheet 12 is 10 nm or less means that the optical strain is small, and it can be said that there is almost no residual stress during the manufacture of the sheet 12. That is, the fact that the in-plane retardation Re of the sheet 12 is 10 nm or less means that the polymer in the sheet 12 is uniform. Therefore, when the sheet 12 is made into a long roll, the sheet 12 is caused by some step. It is preferable because it is less likely to cause a new step due to the polymer state inside. The upper limit of the in-plane phase difference Re of the sheet 12 is more preferably 8 nm or less or 4 nm or less from the viewpoint that color unevenness and blackout, which are problems when used in combination with a polarizer, are unlikely to occur in display applications. preferable. Further, in the case of acrylic resin, in the case of optical applications, the phenomenon of whitening when bent unlike the conventional acrylic resin film does not occur, and the haze value (total haze value) is 1% or less or 0.5. It is preferably as small as% or less.
 また、シート12が、光学フィルム用途であり、ポリエステル系樹脂を含む場合にも、上記と同様にシート12内のポリマーが均一である方が内部のポリマー状態起因によって新たな段差を生じにくく好ましい。シート12がポリエステル系樹脂を含む場合には、物理的強度を得るために延伸が欠かせないため、ポリマー状態をなるべく均一にするためには、縦横にほぼ同倍率で逐次または同時2軸延伸によって製造するとよい。その結果、従来よりも面内位相差が小さいポリエステル系樹脂を含むシートが得られる。この面内位相差が小さいとは、シートの厚みが10μm~90μmで、面内位相差が1500nm以下であることを意味し、好ましくは1200nm以下、より好ましくは1000nm以下、さらに好ましくは800nm以下である。なお、二軸延伸ポリエステルのプラスチックフィルムとしての弾性率や引き裂き強度など物理特性を良好にするためには、面内位相差は小さすぎない方が良く、200nm以上、さらには400nm以上が好ましい。 Further, even when the sheet 12 is used for an optical film and contains a polyester resin, it is preferable that the polymer in the sheet 12 is uniform as described above because new steps are less likely to occur due to the internal polymer state. When the sheet 12 contains a polyester resin, stretching is indispensable in order to obtain physical strength. Therefore, in order to make the polymer state as uniform as possible, the sheets 12 are sequentially or simultaneously biaxially stretched at substantially the same magnification in the vertical and horizontal directions. Good to manufacture. As a result, a sheet containing a polyester resin having a smaller in-plane phase difference than the conventional one can be obtained. The small in-plane retardation means that the thickness of the sheet is 10 μm to 90 μm and the in-plane retardation is 1500 nm or less, preferably 1200 nm or less, more preferably 1000 nm or less, and further preferably 800 nm or less. is there. In order to improve the physical characteristics such as elastic modulus and tear strength of the biaxially stretched polyester as a plastic film, the in-plane phase difference should not be too small, preferably 200 nm or more, more preferably 400 nm or more.
 また、さらに物理特性を良好にするためには、面内方向の複屈折とともに膜厚方向の複屈折とのバランスも考慮した方がよい。その指標としてはNz係数がある。Nz係数はフィルム内部の結晶性や配向性が影響するものなので、シート全体の特性に関わっている。Nz係数は、例えばポリエチレンテレフタレートである場合は、通常2~4であるが、特に長尺ロールにした場合、何等かの段差に起因して、シート内ポリマー状態起因で新たな段差を生じにくいという点において、好ましくは5以上、さらに好ましくは8以上、最も好ましくは10以上である。Nz係数の上限は80程度であり、好ましくは70以下、最も好ましくは50以下である。 Further, in order to further improve the physical characteristics, it is better to consider the balance between the birefringence in the in-plane direction and the birefringence in the film thickness direction. The index is the Nz coefficient. Since the Nz coefficient is affected by the crystallinity and orientation inside the film, it is related to the characteristics of the entire sheet. The Nz coefficient is usually 2 to 4 in the case of polyethylene terephthalate, for example, but it is said that a new step is unlikely to occur due to the polymer state in the sheet due to some step, especially in the case of a long roll. In terms of points, it is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and most preferably 10 or more. The upper limit of the Nz coefficient is about 80, preferably 70 or less, and most preferably 50 or less.
 面内位相差(Re)は、シートの面内において屈折率が最も大きい方向である遅相軸方向の屈折率nx、前記面内において前記遅相軸方向と直交する方向である進相軸方向の屈折率ny、およびシートの厚みt(nm)により、下記数式(1)によって表わされるものである。下記数式(1)より、面内位相差が小さいことは、配向性の程度が低いため折り曲げ耐性を良好にし得る傾向があることが分かる。面内位相差(Re)は、例えば、大塚電子株式会社製の商品名「RETS-100」、王子計測機器社製の商品名「KOBRA-WR」、「PAM-UHR100」により測定できる。
 面内位相差(Re)=(nx-ny)×t  …(1)
The in-plane phase difference (Re) is the refractive index nx in the slow-phase axial direction, which is the direction in which the refractive index is maximum in the in-plane of the sheet, and the phase-advancing axial direction, which is the direction orthogonal to the slow-phase axial direction in the in-plane. It is expressed by the following formula (1) by the refractive index ny of and the thickness t (nm) of the sheet. From the following mathematical formula (1), it can be seen that a small in-plane phase difference tends to improve bending resistance because the degree of orientation is low. The in-plane phase difference (Re) can be measured by, for example, the product name "RETS-100" manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., the product name "KOBRA-WR" manufactured by Oji Measuring Instruments Co., Ltd., and "PAM-UHR100".
In-plane phase difference (Re) = (nx-ny) x t ... (1)
 Nz係数は、シートの厚み方向の屈折率nz、上記nxおよび上記nyにより、下記数式(2)によって表されるものである。
 Nz係数=(nx-nz)/(nx-ny)  …(2)
The Nz coefficient is expressed by the following mathematical formula (2) by the refractive index nz in the thickness direction of the sheet, the nx and the ny.
Nz coefficient = (nx-nz) / (nx-ny) ... (2)
 RETS-100を用いて上記Reを測定する場合には、以下の手順に従って測定することができる。まず、RETS-100の光源を安定させるため、光源を点灯させてから60分以上放置する。その後、回転検光子法を選択するとともに、θモード(角度方向位相差測定モード)選択する。このθモードを選択することにより、ステージは傾斜回転ステージとなる。 When measuring the above Re using RETS-100, it can be measured according to the following procedure. First, in order to stabilize the light source of RETS-100, the light source is turned on and then left for 60 minutes or more. After that, the rotary photon method is selected and the θ mode (angle direction phase difference measurement mode) is selected. By selecting this θ mode, the stage becomes an inclined rotation stage.
 次いで、RETS-100に以下の測定条件を入力する。
(測定条件)
・リタデーション測定範囲:回転検光子法
・測定スポット径:φ5mm
・傾斜角度範囲:-40°~40°
・測定波長範囲:400nm~800nm
・サンプルの平均屈折率(例えば、PETの場合には、N=1.617とし、またアクリル樹脂フィルムの場合には、1.5とする。)
・厚み:SEMや光学顕微鏡で別途測定した厚み
Next, the following measurement conditions are input to RETS-100.
(Measurement condition)
・ Reference measurement range: Rotational photon method ・ Measurement spot diameter: φ5 mm
-Inclination angle range: -40 ° to 40 °
-Measurement wavelength range: 400 nm to 800 nm
-Average refractive index of the sample (for example, in the case of PET, N = 1.617, and in the case of an acrylic resin film, 1.5).
-Thickness: Thickness separately measured by SEM or optical microscope
 次いで、この装置にサンプルを設置せずに、バックグラウンドデータを得る。装置は閉鎖系とし、光源を点灯させる毎にこれを実施する。 Next, obtain background data without installing a sample in this device. The device will be a closed system and this will be done each time the light source is turned on.
 その後、この装置内のステージ上にサンプルを設置する。サンプルの形状は、どのような形状であってもよく、例えば、長方形状であってもよい。サンプルの大きさは、50mm×50mmであってもよい。サンプルが複数存在する場合には、全て同じ向きで設置する必要がある。例えば、サンプルを全て同じ向きで設置するために予め印を全サンプルに付けておくことが好ましい。 After that, the sample is installed on the stage in this device. The shape of the sample may be any shape, for example, a rectangular shape. The size of the sample may be 50 mm × 50 mm. If there are multiple samples, they must all be installed in the same orientation. For example, it is preferable to mark all samples in advance so that all the samples are placed in the same orientation.
 サンプルを設置した後、温度23±5℃および相対湿度50±20%の環境下で、XY平面上でステージを360°回転させて、進相軸および遅相軸を測定する。測定終了後、遅相軸を選択する。その後、遅相軸を中心にステージが設定した角度範囲に傾きながら測定が行われ、10°刻みで、設定傾斜角度範囲および設定波長範囲のデータ(Re)が得られる。面内位相差Reは、入射角0°および波長589nmの光で測定したときの値とする。面内位相差Reは、位置が異なる5点で測定する。具体的には、まず、図2に示されるようにサンプルSAの中心A1を通る2本の直交する仮想線IL1、IL2を引く。この仮想線IL1、IL2を引くと、サンプルが4つの区画に分かれる。そして、各区画において中心A1から等距離にある1点、合計4点A2~A4を設定し、中心A1および点A2~A4の合計5点で測定する。そして、5点の測定値中、最大値と最小値を除いた3点の算術平均値を面内位相差Reとする。 After installing the sample, rotate the stage 360 ° on the XY plane in an environment with a temperature of 23 ± 5 ° C and a relative humidity of 50 ± 20%, and measure the phase advance axis and phase delay axis. After the measurement is completed, select the slow phase axis. After that, the measurement is performed while tilting to the angle range set by the stage about the slow phase axis, and the data (Re) of the set tilt angle range and the set wavelength range is obtained in increments of 10 °. The in-plane phase difference Re is a value measured with light having an incident angle of 0 ° and a wavelength of 589 nm. The in-plane phase difference Re is measured at five points at different positions. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 2, two orthogonal virtual lines IL1 and IL2 passing through the center A1 of the sample SA are drawn. When the virtual lines IL1 and IL2 are drawn, the sample is divided into four sections. Then, in each section, one point equidistant from the center A1 and a total of four points A2 to A4 are set, and measurement is performed at a total of five points of the center A1 and points A2 to A4. Then, the arithmetic mean value of 3 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured values of 5 points is defined as the in-plane phase difference Re.
 シート12は、単層構造であってもよいが、2層以上積層された積層構造のものであってもよい。具体的には、シート12は、基材単体や機能層単体であってもよいが、例えば、基材上に1以上の機能層が形成された積層体(例えば、光学積層体)であってもよい。本明細書における「機能層」とは、積層体において、何らかの機能を発揮することを意図された層である。具体的には、機能層としては、例えば、下地層、ハードコート層、衝撃吸収層、防眩層、帯電防止層、導電層、放熱層、紫外線吸収層、特殊波長吸収層、特殊波長透過層、色再現性向上層、液晶層、位相差調整層、視野角調整層、反射層、着色層、反射防止層(高屈折率層、低屈折率層)、防汚層、撥水層、撥油層など、またはこれらの組み合わせ等が挙げられる。本明細書における「機能層」は、単層構造であってもよいが、積層構造であってもよい。ただし、本明細書においては「機能層」は、シート12の使用時にも存在する層であり、使用時には剥離される剥離ライナーは含まれないものとする。シートに剥離ライナーが存在すると、欠点が生じやすくなるとともに、上記段差とは異なる新たな段差が生じやすくなる。仮に剥離ライナーがシート12に設けられている場合には、剥離ライナーを剥いだ状態で巻芯11に巻回する。 The sheet 12 may have a single-layer structure, but may have a laminated structure in which two or more layers are laminated. Specifically, the sheet 12 may be a single base material or a single functional layer, but is, for example, a laminated body (for example, an optical laminated body) in which one or more functional layers are formed on the base material. May be good. The "functional layer" in the present specification is a layer intended to exert some function in the laminated body. Specifically, the functional layers include, for example, an underlayer, a hard coat layer, a shock absorbing layer, an antiglare layer, an antistatic layer, a conductive layer, a heat radiating layer, an ultraviolet absorbing layer, a special wavelength absorbing layer, and a special wavelength transmitting layer. , Color reproducibility improving layer, liquid crystal layer, phase difference adjusting layer, viewing angle adjusting layer, reflective layer, colored layer, antireflection layer (high refractive index layer, low refractive index layer), antifouling layer, water repellent layer, repellent Examples include an oil layer and the like, or a combination thereof. The "functional layer" in the present specification may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure. However, in the present specification, the "functional layer" is a layer that exists even when the sheet 12 is used, and does not include a release liner that is peeled off at the time of use. If the release liner is present on the sheet, defects are likely to occur, and a new step different from the above step is likely to occur. If the release liner is provided on the sheet 12, the release liner is wound around the winding core 11 in a peeled state.
 シート12の用途としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、光学用途(光学フィルム用途、偏光板用途、表示装置用途)、建具用途、自動車内装加飾用途、電池部材用途、食品包材用途等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、光学フィルムは、シートの巻き始め端部に起因する段差や固定部材に起因する段差があると、外観のみならず、光透過性に影響を与えてしまうおそれがあるので、本発明の技術は光学用途に特に有効である。 The use of the sheet 12 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include optical use (optical film use, polarizing plate use, display device use), joinery use, automobile interior decoration use, battery member use, food packaging material use, and the like. Be done. Among these, in the optical film, if there is a step due to the winding start end of the sheet or a step due to the fixing member, not only the appearance but also the light transmission may be affected. Technology is particularly effective for optical applications.
 シート12は、巻き始め端部12A(図3参照)と巻き終わり端部12B(図1参照)を備えている。ロール体10においては、巻き始め端部12Aは、巻き終わり端部12Bより内側(巻芯11)側に位置している。ロール体10においては、図3に示されるように、巻き始め端部12Aにおける長手方向DR2に位置する先端面12A1は、シート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3に沿った断面において、固定部材17の後述する第2端面17Bとほぼ揃っている。本明細書における「ほぼ揃っている」とは、巻き始め端部12Aの長手方向DR2における先端面12A1と第2端面17Bの距離が、固定部材17の幅W3(図4参照)の±20%以内であることを意味する。なお、上記「+」は先端面12A1が第2端面17Bよりも突き出ていることを意味し、上記「-」は先端面12A1が第2端面17Bよりも引っ込んでいる(すなわち、第2端面17Bが先端面12A1よりも突き出ている)ことを意味する。 The sheet 12 includes a winding start end portion 12A (see FIG. 3) and a winding end end portion 12B (see FIG. 1). In the roll body 10, the winding start end portion 12A is located on the inner side (winding core 11) side of the winding end end portion 12B. In the roll body 10, as shown in FIG. 3, the tip surface 12A1 located in the longitudinal direction DR2 at the winding start end portion 12A has a cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11. , It is almost aligned with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, which will be described later. In the present specification, "almost aligned" means that the distance between the tip surface 12A1 and the second end surface 17B in the longitudinal direction DR2 of the winding start end portion 12A is ± 20% of the width W3 (see FIG. 4) of the fixing member 17. It means that it is within. The "+" means that the tip surface 12A1 protrudes from the second end surface 17B, and the "-" means that the tip surface 12A1 is recessed from the second end surface 17B (that is, the second end surface 17B). Protrudes from the tip surface 12A1).
<<固定部材>>
 固定部材17は、巻芯11の外周面11Aに対してシート12の一部を固定するためのものである。固定部材17は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1に延びている。これにより、シート12の一部を巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定することができる。
<< Fixing member >>
The fixing member 17 is for fixing a part of the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. The fixing member 17 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. As a result, a part of the sheet 12 can be fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 固定部材17は、第1端面17Aと反対側の第2端面17Bを有している。第1端面17Aおよび第2端面17Bは、いずれも巻芯11の幅方向DR1に延びている。 The fixing member 17 has a second end surface 17B opposite to the first end surface 17A. Both the first end surface 17A and the second end surface 17B extend in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 図3においては、固定部材17は、巻芯11の外周面11Aおよびシート12の巻き始め端部12Aに密着しており、巻芯11の外周面11Aに対してシート12の巻き始め端部12Aを固定している。なお、シート12の1周目であれば、巻き始め端部12Aではない部分でシート12を固定してもよい。図3において、固定部材17の表面は、全て巻き始め端部12Aに密着しているが、図8に示されるように、巻き始め端部12Aが固定部材17に対し巻取り時に問題とならない程度に固定、例えば巻取り時に巻き始め端部12Aが固定部材17から剥がれない程度に固定されていれば、巻き始め端部12Aと固定部材17の間に第1充填部14が入り込んでいてもよい。 In FIG. 3, the fixing member 17 is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 and the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, and the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Is fixed. If it is the first lap of the sheet 12, the sheet 12 may be fixed at a portion other than the winding start end portion 12A. In FIG. 3, all the surfaces of the fixing member 17 are in close contact with the winding start end portion 12A, but as shown in FIG. 8, the winding start end portion 12A does not cause a problem when winding the fixing member 17. The first filling portion 14 may be inserted between the winding start end portion 12A and the fixing member 17 as long as the winding start end portion 12A is fixed to the extent that the winding start end portion 12A does not peel off from the fixing member 17 at the time of winding. ..
 固定部材17としては、特に限定されないが、接着部材や両面テープ等の粘着部材等が挙げられる。固定部材17は、弾性(クッション性)を有していてもよい。粘着部材は、両面に粘着性を有するものである。 The fixing member 17 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an adhesive member and an adhesive member such as double-sided tape. The fixing member 17 may have elasticity (cushioning property). The adhesive member has adhesiveness on both sides.
 固定部材17の幅W3(図4参照)は、5mm以上100mm以下であることが好ましい。固定部材17の幅W3が5mm以上であれば、確実に巻芯11の外周面11Aにシート12の一部を固定することができ、また100mm以下であれば、シート12に皺を発生させずにシート12を巻回することができる。本明細書における「固定部材の幅」とは、第1端面から第2端面までの距離を意味するものとする。固定部材17の幅W3の下限は、10mm以上、20mm以上、または30mm以上であることが好ましく、上限は、50mm以下または40mm以下であることが好ましい。 The width W3 (see FIG. 4) of the fixing member 17 is preferably 5 mm or more and 100 mm or less. If the width W3 of the fixing member 17 is 5 mm or more, a part of the sheet 12 can be reliably fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, and if it is 100 mm or less, the sheet 12 is not wrinkled. The sheet 12 can be wound around the circumference. The "width of the fixing member" in the present specification shall mean the distance from the first end face to the second end face. The lower limit of the width W3 of the fixing member 17 is preferably 10 mm or more, 20 mm or more, or 30 mm or more, and the upper limit is preferably 50 mm or less or 40 mm or less.
 固定部材17の厚みは、3μm以上600μm以下であることが好ましい。固定部材17の厚みが3μm以上であれば、確実に巻芯11の外周面11Aの一部を固定することができ、また600μm以下であれば、シート12の変形をより抑制できる。固定部材17の厚みの下限は、5μm以上、10μm以上、または20μm以上であることが好ましく、上限は、200μm以下、100μm以下、または50μm以下であることが好ましい。固定部材の厚みは、固定部材の厚みを10箇所測定し、その10箇所の厚みの算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。 The thickness of the fixing member 17 is preferably 3 μm or more and 600 μm or less. If the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 μm or more, a part of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 can be reliably fixed, and if it is 600 μm or less, the deformation of the sheet 12 can be further suppressed. The lower limit of the thickness of the fixing member 17 is preferably 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, or 20 μm or more, and the upper limit is preferably 200 μm or less, 100 μm or less, or 50 μm or less. The thickness of the fixing member can be obtained by measuring the thickness of the fixing member at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thickness at the 10 points.
<第1隙間>
 第1隙間13は、巻き始め端部12Aにおける長手方向DR2(図3参照)に位置する先端面12A1に接する隙間である。具体的には、図3に示される第1隙間13は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1と、固定部材17の第2端面17Bとによって囲まれる隙間である。固定部材17が設けられていない場合には、第1隙間は、巻芯の外周面と、1周目のシートの裏面と、巻き始め端部の先端面とによって囲まれる隙間である。
<First gap>
The first gap 13 is a gap in contact with the tip surface 12A1 located in the longitudinal direction DR2 (see FIG. 3) at the winding start end 12A. Specifically, the first gap 13 shown in FIG. 3 includes an outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, a back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, a tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A, and a fixing member 17. It is a gap surrounded by the second end surface 17B of the above. When the fixing member 17 is not provided, the first gap is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, the back surface of the sheet on the first round, and the tip surface of the winding start end portion.
 第1隙間13は、先端面12A1に接する隙間であるとともに、巻芯11と1周目のシート12の間に位置し、かつ第2端面17Bに接する隙間でもあるので、後述する第3隙間でもある。 The first gap 13 is a gap that is in contact with the tip surface 12A1 and is also a gap that is located between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 on the first lap and is in contact with the second end surface 17B. is there.
<第2隙間>
 第2隙間15は、固定部材17の第1端面17Aに接する隙間である。具体的には、図3に示される第2隙間15は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、固定部材17の第1端面17Aとによって囲まれる隙間である。
<Second gap>
The second gap 15 is a gap in contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17. Specifically, the second gap 15 shown in FIG. 3 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17. is there.
<第1充填部>
 第1充填部14は、第1隙間13に充填されている。すなわち、第1充填部14は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1と、固定部材17の第2端面17Bとに接している。なお、固定部材17が設けられていない場合には、第1充填部は、巻芯の外周面と、1周目のシートの裏面と、巻き始め端部の先端面とに接している。本明細書における「充填」とは、充填部を構成する材料で隙間が概ね埋められている状態を意味する。ただし、充填部の内部には空隙(例えば、気泡)を有していてもよい。
<First filling part>
The first filling portion 14 is filled in the first gap 13. That is, the first filling portion 14 is formed on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A, and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. I'm in contact. When the fixing member 17 is not provided, the first filling portion is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the winding core, the back surface of the sheet on the first round, and the tip surface of the winding start end portion. As used herein, the term "filling" means a state in which the gap is substantially filled with the material constituting the filling portion. However, there may be voids (for example, air bubbles) inside the filling portion.
 シート12は、製品として使用される有効領域と、シート12の短手方向における有効領域の両側に位置し、製品としては使用されない非有効領域とを有しており、第1充填部14は、少なくとも有効領域に存在している。有効領域は製品として使用される領域であるので、第1充填部14は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1において有効領域の幅全体に存在していることが好ましい。第1充填部14は、有効領域に存在していれば、非有効領域に存在していてもよいが、第1充填部14が非有効領域に存在していると、第1充填部14がシート12からはみ出してしまうおそれもあり、また非有効領域はそもそも製品として使用されない領域であり、上記段差を緩和する必要もないので、第1充填部14は、非有効領域に存在していなくてもよい。非有効領域は、シートの用途やシートの幅によっても異なるが、通常、シートの短手方向の両端から内側にそれぞれ10mm~30mm以内となる領域である。第1充填部14が非有効領域に存在する場合には、第1充填部14はシートの短手方向の両端にそれぞれ存在してもよいが、はみ出しを抑制する観点からは、これらの両端からシートの中央部に向けてそれぞれ1mm以上、好ましくは5mm以上、より好ましくは10mm以上離れた箇所に存在していることが好ましい。 The sheet 12 has an effective area used as a product and an ineffective area located on both sides of the effective area in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 and is not used as a product. At least in the effective domain. Since the effective region is a region used as a product, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 exists over the entire width of the effective region in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. The first filling portion 14 may be present in the ineffective region as long as it is present in the effective region, but when the first filling portion 14 is present in the ineffective region, the first filling portion 14 is present. The first filling portion 14 does not exist in the ineffective region because there is a possibility that it may protrude from the sheet 12, and the ineffective region is an region that is not used as a product in the first place and it is not necessary to alleviate the above-mentioned step. May be good. The non-effective area varies depending on the intended use of the sheet and the width of the sheet, but is usually an area within 10 mm to 30 mm inward from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet. When the first filling portion 14 is present in the ineffective region, the first filling portion 14 may be present at both ends of the sheet in the lateral direction, but from the viewpoint of suppressing protrusion, from both ends thereof. It is preferable that they are present at a distance of 1 mm or more, preferably 5 mm or more, and more preferably 10 mm or more toward the central portion of the sheet.
 第1充填部14における巻芯11から1周目のシート12が離間する離間位置P1側の先端部14Aのエッジ厚みT1(図4、図5参照)は、この厚みが厚いとこの厚みに起因して新たな段差が形成されるおそれがあるので、薄い方が好ましい。なお、後述するが、目的によっては、エッジ厚みT1は、存在しないよりもある程度存在した方が良い場合もある。エッジ厚みT1は、例えば、50μm以下であることが好ましい。エッジ厚みT1は、巻き始め端部12Aから巻き始め端部12Aの段差に起因する変形が視認されなくなった地点までの距離である変形緩和長さを短くできる点から、30μm以下、20μm以下、10μm以下、5μm以下、さらには2μm以下であることがより好ましい。巻き始め端部に起因する段差が緩和されるほど、この段差に起因するシートの変形が緩和されるので、変形緩和長さが短くなる。本明細書における「変形緩和長さ」には、巻き始め端部に起因する段差によるシート変形が緩和されるまでの長さで用いられる意味の他に、固定部材に起因する段差によるシート変形が視認されなくなるまでの長さの意味で用いられることもある。変形緩和長さを固定部材に起因する段差によるシート変形が視認されなくなるまでの長さの意味で用いられる場合には、変形緩和長さは、巻き始め端部12Aから固定部材17の段差に起因する変形が視認されなくなった地点までの距離である。変形緩和長さは、短い方が好ましく、具体的には、100m以下、75m以下、60m以下、50m以下、または35m以下、20m以下、15m以下であることが好ましい。なお、変形緩和長さが75m以下であれば、シート変形が視認されない部分がより多くなるので、良好である。変形緩和長さは上記したように段差によるシート変形が視認されなくなるまでの長さであるが、段差が存在するか否かは、以下のようにして判断するものとする。まず、800Lux以上2000Lux以下の室内環境下において、長尺状のシートに白色光源管(白色LED灯、白色蛍光灯など)を映り込ませ、シートに映り込んだ白色光源管の輪郭のラインが、シートの他の部分と比較して歪む部分がある場合を段差が存在すると判断し、段差が存在した周辺において映り込ませた白色光源管の輪郭のラインがシートの他の部分と同じと判断できる部分を段差が存在しないと判断する。白色光源管は、白色光源管の長手方向がシートの長手方向に沿うように配置する。シートの幅と長さによって、白色光源管の長さも変更可能である。具体的には、白色光源管の長さは、シートにおける段差が存在する部分と段差が存在しない部分とに渡った長さとすることが好ましい。これにより、段差が存在する部分が分かりやすくなる。また、観察環境が上記のような明るさであれば、白色光源管自身は点灯していても、点灯していなくても良い。観察の際には、白色光源管がシートに映り込んでその輪郭のラインが見える状態であることが重要である。このため、観察条件としては、白色光源管の輪郭のラインが明確に見える方を適宜選択する。例えば、シートの表面よりもシートの裏面の方が白色光源管の輪郭のラインが見えやすい場合には、シートの裏面に白色光源管を映し込ませて、段差が存在するか確認してもよい。具体的には、例えば基材の表面側に防眩層など、白色光源管が映り込みにくい機能層が積層されている積層体の場合は、防眩層側から観察すると、段差が存在するか確認しにくい場合がある。このため、この場合には、防眩層が積層されていない基材の裏面側に白色光源管を映し込ませて、段差が存在するか確認するとよい。なお、この判断は、基材の上に1以上の機能層が積層された積層体や、それを偏光子に貼り付けた積層体など、様々な用途のロール体でも用いることができる。例えば、機能層として防眩層が基材上に積層されている場合、段差が存在する部分は圧で防眩機能を発揮する凹凸形状が潰れて影など着色して見えることで判断も可能である。また、様々な機能層が積層され、ロール体の視認側面またはその反対面に白色光源管が映り込みにくい場合には、上記のように形状変化で影などによって他の部分とは異なる着色が見えることで判断可能である。 The edge thickness T1 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the tip portion 14A on the separation position P1 side where the sheet 12 on the first lap is separated from the winding core 11 in the first filling portion 14 is caused by this thickness. As a result, a new step may be formed, so a thinner step is preferable. As will be described later, depending on the purpose, it may be better for the edge thickness T1 to exist to some extent rather than not exist. The edge thickness T1 is preferably 50 μm or less, for example. The edge thickness T1 is 30 μm or less, 20 μm or less, 10 μm or less because the deformation relaxation length, which is the distance from the winding start end 12A to the point where the deformation due to the step of the winding start end 12A is no longer visible, can be shortened. Below, it is more preferably 5 μm or less, more preferably 2 μm or less. The more the step caused by the winding start end is relaxed, the more the deformation of the sheet caused by this step is relaxed, so that the deformation relaxation length becomes shorter. In the present specification, the "deformation relaxation length" is used to mean the length until the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the winding start end is alleviated, and the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the fixing member is used. It is sometimes used to mean the length until it becomes invisible. When the deformation relaxation length is used to mean the length until the sheet deformation due to the step caused by the fixing member becomes invisible, the deformation relaxation length is caused by the step from the winding start end 12A to the fixing member 17. It is the distance to the point where the deformation to be made is no longer visible. The deformation relaxation length is preferably short, and specifically, it is preferably 100 m or less, 75 m or less, 60 m or less, 50 m or less, or 35 m or less, 20 m or less, 15 m or less. If the deformation relaxation length is 75 m or less, there are more parts where the sheet deformation is not visible, which is good. The deformation relaxation length is the length until the sheet deformation due to the step is not visible as described above, but whether or not there is a step is determined as follows. First, in an indoor environment of 800 Lux or more and 2000 Lux or less, a white light source tube (white LED lamp, white fluorescent lamp, etc.) is reflected on a long sheet, and the contour line of the white light source tube reflected on the sheet is formed. When there is a part that is distorted compared to other parts of the sheet, it can be judged that there is a step, and it can be judged that the contour line of the white light source tube reflected in the vicinity of the step is the same as the other part of the sheet. Judge that there is no step in the part. The white light source tube is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the white light source tube is along the longitudinal direction of the sheet. The length of the white light source tube can also be changed depending on the width and length of the sheet. Specifically, the length of the white light source tube is preferably a length extending over a portion of the sheet where a step is present and a portion where the step is not present. This makes it easier to see where the step exists. Further, if the observation environment is as bright as described above, the white light source tube itself may or may not be lit. At the time of observation, it is important that the white light source tube is reflected on the sheet and the contour line can be seen. Therefore, as the observation condition, the one in which the contour line of the white light source tube can be clearly seen is appropriately selected. For example, if the outline of the white light source tube is more visible on the back surface of the sheet than on the front surface of the sheet, the white light source tube may be projected on the back surface of the sheet to check if there is a step. .. Specifically, in the case of a laminated body in which a functional layer such as an antiglare layer on the surface side of the base material is laminated to prevent the white light source tube from being reflected, is there a step when observed from the antiglare layer side? It may be difficult to confirm. Therefore, in this case, it is advisable to project the white light source tube on the back surface side of the base material on which the antiglare layer is not laminated to check whether or not there is a step. This determination can also be used for rolls for various purposes, such as a laminate in which one or more functional layers are laminated on a substrate, or a laminate in which it is attached to a polarizer. For example, when an antiglare layer is laminated on the base material as a functional layer, it is possible to judge by the fact that the uneven shape that exerts the antiglare function by pressure is crushed and the shadows appear to be colored in the part where the step exists. is there. In addition, when various functional layers are laminated and it is difficult for the white light source tube to be reflected on the visible side surface of the roll body or the opposite surface, coloring different from other parts can be seen due to the shape change as described above. It can be judged by that.
 また、シート12が3μm以上50μm未満の厚みを有する薄膜フィルムの場合は、厚みが厚い場合よりも巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差の影響を受けやすいので、このような薄膜フィルムを用いる場合には、エッジ厚みT1は、10μm以下であることが好ましく、また上記変形緩和長さを最短にする点から、7μm以下、5μm以下、更には1μm以下がより好ましい。 Further, when the sheet 12 is a thin film having a thickness of 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm, it is more susceptible to the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A than when the thickness is thick. Therefore, when such a thin film is used, The edge thickness T1 is preferably 10 μm or less, and more preferably 7 μm or less, 5 μm or less, and further preferably 1 μm or less from the viewpoint of minimizing the deformation relaxation length.
 上記変形緩和長さを最短にする観点からは、エッジ厚みT1は上述した厚みが好ましいが、巻芯の表面は、表面仕上げが施されており、凹凸が存在していることがある。第1充填部の先端部においてはこの凹凸に沿って第1充填部を構成する材料が埋め込まれるので、エッジ厚みT1が存在する部分と、存在しない部分が生じてしまい、むらになるおそれがある。しかしながら、エッジ厚みT1が薄ければ、このようなむらが発生したとしても、実害がない。このため、凹凸が存在して、むらとなってしまう場合には、エッジ厚みT1は薄い方が好ましく、具体的には、例えば、エッジ厚みT1は15μm以下、10μm以下、5μm以下、更には1μm以下であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of minimizing the deformation relaxation length, the edge thickness T1 is preferably the above-mentioned thickness, but the surface of the winding core is surface-finished and may have irregularities. Since the material constituting the first filling portion is embedded along the unevenness at the tip portion of the first filling portion, a portion where the edge thickness T1 exists and a portion where the edge thickness T1 does not exist may occur, resulting in unevenness. .. However, if the edge thickness T1 is thin, even if such unevenness occurs, there is no actual harm. Therefore, when unevenness is present and unevenness occurs, it is preferable that the edge thickness T1 is thin. Specifically, for example, the edge thickness T1 is 15 μm or less, 10 μm or less, 5 μm or less, and further 1 μm. The following is preferable.
 一方で、エッジ厚みT1が存在することによる効果も存在する。例えば、巻芯はロール体の使用後に再利用されることが多い。このため、巻芯には、第1充填部など巻芯に接している充填部を巻芯から剥がして、または洗浄や拭き取りによって除去することにより巻芯を再利用するリワーク性が求められている。このため、例えば第1充填部14は、後述するように巻芯11に対して接着されていないことが好ましい。また、第1充填部14が巻芯11およびシート12にそれぞれ接している部分においては、シート12が第1充填部14から綺麗に剥がせることが好ましい。仮に、シート12を第1充填部14から剥がす際に、第1充填部14が凝集破壊してしまうと、巻芯11から第1充填部14を全て綺麗に剥がすことが困難となる場合がある。これに対し、エッジ厚みT1が存在すると、シート12を剥離するきっかけになるため、リワーク性の観点からは、エッジ厚みT1をあえて存在させることが好ましい。例えば.リワーク性の観点からは、エッジ厚みT1は5μm以上とすることが好ましい。このエッジ厚みT1は巻芯やシートの材質によって好ましい厚さが変わり、エッジ厚みT1を1.5μm以上、更には5μm以上としてもよい。エッジ厚みの上限は、厚みに起因して新たな段差が形成されるおそれがあるので、30μm以下が好ましい。 On the other hand, there is also an effect due to the presence of the edge thickness T1. For example, the winding core is often reused after the roll body is used. For this reason, the winding core is required to have a reworkability to reuse the winding core by peeling the filling portion in contact with the winding core such as the first filling portion from the winding core, or removing it by cleaning or wiping. .. Therefore, for example, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11 as described later. Further, it is preferable that the sheet 12 can be neatly peeled off from the first filling portion 14 at the portion where the first filling portion 14 is in contact with the winding core 11 and the sheet 12, respectively. If the first filling portion 14 is coagulated and broken when the sheet 12 is peeled off from the first filling portion 14, it may be difficult to cleanly peel off all the first filling portions 14 from the winding core 11. .. On the other hand, if the edge thickness T1 is present, it triggers the sheet 12 to be peeled off. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reworkability, it is preferable that the edge thickness T1 is intentionally present. For example. From the viewpoint of reworkability, the edge thickness T1 is preferably 5 μm or more. The preferable thickness of the edge thickness T1 varies depending on the material of the winding core and the sheet, and the edge thickness T1 may be 1.5 μm or more, further 5 μm or more. The upper limit of the edge thickness is preferably 30 μm or less because a new step may be formed due to the thickness.
 エッジ厚みT1の測定は、走査型光干渉式表面形状測定機を用いて測定することが可能である。このような表面形状測定機としては、例えば、Zygo社製の「New View」シリーズ等が挙げられる。 The edge thickness T1 can be measured using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine. Examples of such a surface shape measuring machine include the "New View" series manufactured by Zygo.
 具体的には、走査型光干渉式表面形状測定機(製品名「New View7300」、Zygo社製)を用いて、以下のようにしてエッジ厚みT1を求めることができる。まず、シートを全て繰り出すと、第1充填部14がシート12側に付着し、巻芯から剥がれることがある。第1充填部14が繰り出されたシート12側に付着している場合には、シートから、第1充填部14の先端部14Aを含む大きさ0.5mm角以上の1以上のサンプルを得る。なお、サンプルは0.5mm角以上の大きさであれば、正方形に限らず長方形(例えば、2mm×5mm)であってもよい。サンプルは、第1充填部14の含み、かつ汚れや指紋等が付着していない任意の箇所から切り出すものとする。そして、以下の測定条件で、第1充填部14のエッジ厚みT1を測定する。エッジ厚みT1は、エッジ厚みを10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の厚み中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の厚みの算術平均値を求めることによって求めることができる。
(測定条件)
・対物レンズ:10倍
・Zoom:1倍
・測定領域:2.17mm×2.17mm
・scan Length:5μm
・min mod:0.015
Specifically, the edge thickness T1 can be obtained as follows using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). First, when all the sheets are fed out, the first filling portion 14 may adhere to the sheet 12 side and peel off from the winding core. When the first filling portion 14 is attached to the fed-out sheet 12 side, one or more samples having a size of 0.5 mm square or more including the tip portion 14A of the first filling portion 14 are obtained from the sheet. The sample is not limited to a square but may be a rectangle (for example, 2 mm × 5 mm) as long as it has a size of 0.5 mm square or more. The sample shall be cut out from an arbitrary portion containing the first filling portion 14 and to which dirt, fingerprints, etc. are not attached. Then, the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion 14 is measured under the following measurement conditions. The edge thickness T1 can be obtained by measuring the edge thickness at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thicknesses at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses at the 10 points.
(Measurement condition)
-Objective lens: 10x-Zoom: 1x-Measurement area: 2.17mm x 2.17mm
・ Skan Length: 5 μm
・ Min mod: 0.015
 第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2(図4参照)は、固定部材17が存在する場合には、固定部材17とシート12の厚みの合計よりも厚く、また固定部材17が存在しない場合には、シート12の厚みよりも厚いことが好ましい。厚みT2をこのような厚みにすることにより、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差をより効果的に緩和することができる。ただし、厚みT2が厚すぎると、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和することができるが、シート12の巻取りに悪影響が出ることがある。このため、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下の場合には、厚みT2は52μm以上220μm以下、更には52μm以上150μm以下であることが好ましく、またシート12の厚みが3μm以上50μm未満である場合、厚みT2は50.5μm以上100μm以下であることが好ましい。 The thickness T2 (see FIG. 4) of the first filling portion 14 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 is thicker than the total thickness of the fixing member 17 and the sheet 12 when the fixing member 17 is present, and the fixing member When 17 is not present, it is preferably thicker than the thickness of the sheet 12. By setting the thickness T2 to such a thickness, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A. However, if the thickness T2 is too thick, the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A can be alleviated, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected. Therefore, for example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, the thickness T2 is preferably 52 μm or more and 220 μm or less, more preferably 52 μm or more and 150 μm or less, and the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm. In some cases, the thickness T2 is preferably 50.5 μm or more and 100 μm or less.
 第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2は、以下のようにして測定することができる。厚みT2は、第4介在部18が存在する場合と、第4介在部18が存在しない場合で、測定方法が異なってもよい。第4介在部18が存在しない場合には、レーザー変位計や実体顕微鏡を用いて測定することができ、第4介在部18が存在する場合には、実体顕微鏡を用いて測定することができる。レーザー変位計や実体顕微鏡による厚みT2の測定は、温度23±5℃および相対湿度50±20%の環境下で行うものとする。 The thickness T2 at the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1 can be measured as follows. The thickness T2 may be measured differently depending on whether the fourth intervening portion 18 is present or not. When the fourth interposition portion 18 is not present, the measurement can be performed using a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope, and when the fourth interposition portion 18 is present, the measurement can be performed using a stereomicroscope. The thickness T2 is measured by a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope in an environment of a temperature of 23 ± 5 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50 ± 20%.
 レーザー変位計による厚みT2の測定は、以下のようにして行うことができる。以下の測定方法は、レーザー光の反射を利用するので、シート12が透明であり、かつ第1充填部が透明ではない場合(例えば、着色されている場合)に特に有効である。まず、ロール体10を回転させるための治具と、レーザー変位計(例えば、製品名「LK-G30」、株式会社キーエンス製)とを用意し、それぞれ所定の位置に配置する。治具は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1の孔11Bに挿入され、ロール体10を回転可能に保持するよう構成されている。なお、レーザー変位計として、LK-G30を挙げているが、LK-G30でなくとも、後継機種などの同等のレーザー変位計を用いてもよい。 The thickness T2 can be measured with a laser displacement meter as follows. Since the following measurement method utilizes the reflection of laser light, it is particularly effective when the sheet 12 is transparent and the first filling portion is not transparent (for example, when it is colored). First, a jig for rotating the roll body 10 and a laser displacement meter (for example, product name "LK-G30", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) are prepared and arranged at predetermined positions. The jig is inserted into the hole 11B of the winding core 11 in the width direction DR1 and is configured to rotatably hold the roll body 10. Although the LK-G30 is mentioned as the laser displacement meter, an equivalent laser displacement meter such as a successor model may be used instead of the LK-G30.
 レーザー変位計は、レーザー源と、受光素子とを備えており、レーザー源から照射し、第1充填部14の表面で反射したレーザー光を受光素子で受け取り、受光素子での受光位置によって変位を測定できる装置である。 The laser displacement meter includes a laser source and a light receiving element. The laser light emitted from the laser source and reflected on the surface of the first filling portion 14 is received by the light receiving element, and the displacement is determined by the light receiving position of the light receiving element. It is a device that can measure.
 レーザー変位計は、ロール体10の上方に位置し、レーザー光がロール体10の表面に向けて照射されるように3台配置されている。レーザー変位計の配置箇所は、以下の通りとする。まず、図9に示されるようにシート12の幅を3等分する第1位置B1および第2位置B2を定める。第1位置B1は、シート12の短手方向(巻芯11の幅方向DR1)の第1端12G1側に位置し、第2位置B2は、第1端12G1とは反対側の第2端12G2側に位置する。そして、1台目のレーザー変位計は第1位置B1と第1端12G1の中点C1にレーザー光が照射されるように配置され、2台目のレーザー変位計は第1位置B1と第2位置B2の中点C2にレーザー光が照射されるように配置され、3台目のレーザー変位計は第2位置B2と第2端12G2の中点C3にレーザー光が照射されるように配置される。 Three laser displacement gauges are arranged above the roll body 10 so that the laser beam is emitted toward the surface of the roll body 10. The location of the laser displacement meter is as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 9, the first position B1 and the second position B2 that divide the width of the sheet 12 into three equal parts are determined. The first position B1 is located on the first end 12G1 side in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 (the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11), and the second position B2 is the second end 12G2 on the opposite side of the first end 12G1. Located on the side. The first laser displacement meter is arranged so that the laser beam is applied to the midpoint C1 of the first position B1 and the first end 12G1, and the second laser displacement meter is arranged at the first position B1 and the second position. The midpoint C2 of position B2 is arranged so that the laser beam is irradiated, and the third laser displacement meter is arranged so that the midpoint C3 of the second position B2 and the second end 12G2 is irradiated with the laser beam. Laser.
 そして、ロール体10を治具に取り付け、ロール体10から第1充填部14が露出するまでシート12を繰り出す。その後、第1充填部14が露出した状態で、巻芯11を回転速度30mm/sで回転させながらレーザー変位計によってサンプリング周期200μsで連続的に変位量を測定して、横軸を位置(mm)とし、縦軸を変位量(mm)とするグラフ(図10参照)を得る。この測定は、第1充填部14の先端部14Aから先端面12A1に接する位置に向けて行い、この測定においては、基準高さ(変位量0mmライン)を巻芯11の高さとし、基準高さと第1充填部14の変位量の差を第1充填部14の厚みとする。また、このグラフは、横軸の1目盛りを5mmとし、縦軸の1目盛りを0.02mmとする。 Then, the roll body 10 is attached to the jig, and the sheet 12 is fed out from the roll body 10 until the first filling portion 14 is exposed. After that, with the first filling portion 14 exposed, the displacement amount was continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 μs while rotating the winding core 11 at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s, and the horizontal axis was positioned (mm). ), And a graph (see FIG. 10) in which the vertical axis is the displacement amount (mm) is obtained. This measurement is performed from the tip portion 14A of the first filling portion 14 to the position in contact with the tip end surface 12A1. In this measurement, the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is defined as the height of the winding core 11, and is defined as the reference height. The difference in the amount of displacement of the first filling portion 14 is defined as the thickness of the first filling portion 14. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
 このグラフにおいて、第1充填部14が存在する箇所においては、先端部14Aから変位量が上昇するが、第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置以降は、変位量が急激に低下する。このため、グラフで変位量が急激に低下し始める位置変位曲線上の位置E1を見付け出す。そして、変位量0mmラインと位置E1の変位量の差を求めることによって、第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置の厚みT2を求める。 In this graph, the displacement amount increases from the tip portion 14A at the location where the first filling portion 14 exists, but the displacement amount sharply decreases after the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1. Therefore, the position E1 on the position displacement curve where the displacement amount starts to decrease sharply is found in the graph. Then, by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount at the position E1, the thickness T2 at the position of the first filling portion 14 in contact with the tip surface 12A1 is obtained.
 実体顕微鏡による厚みT2の測定は、以下のようにして行うことができる。まず、巻き始め端部12A、第1充填部14、および2周目のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を採取し、固定する。そして、固定されたこの部分の断面を研磨し、第1充填部14の厚みT2を実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定する。なお、実体顕微鏡として、デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000を挙げているが、VHX-7000でなくとも、後継機種などの同等の実体顕微鏡を用いてもよい。 The thickness T2 can be measured with a stereomicroscope as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the first filling portion 14, and the sheet 12 on the second lap is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the thickness T2 of the first filling portion 14 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION). Although the digital microscope VHX-7000 is mentioned as the stereomicroscope, an equivalent stereomicroscope such as a successor model may be used instead of the VHX-7000.
 シート12の長手方向DR2に延びる両端部12G(図1参照)は、製品としては使用しない部分であるので、巻芯11の幅方向DR1における第1充填部14の長さは、ロール体10における製品化するための有効領域以上であれば、シート12の幅W2よりも小さくてもよい。 Since both end portions 12G (see FIG. 1) extending in the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 are not used as products, the length of the first filling portion 14 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 is the length of the roll body 10. It may be smaller than the width W2 of the sheet 12 as long as it is equal to or larger than the effective area for commercialization.
 第1充填部14は、着色材料や発光材料を含むことが好ましい。第1充填部14が着色材料や発光材料を含むことにより、ロール体10から第1充填部14がはみ出したときに目視により確認しやすい。また、第1充填部14の厚みや長さ等を確認しやすくなる。 The first filling portion 14 preferably contains a coloring material or a light emitting material. Since the first filling portion 14 contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, it is easy to visually confirm when the first filling portion 14 protrudes from the roll body 10. In addition, it becomes easy to check the thickness, length, and the like of the first filling portion 14.
 第1充填部14が着色されている場合、第1充填部14の色としては、特に限定されないが、第1充填部14の存在を確実に把握でき、また第1充填部14の成分が巻取装置に付着しても目立ち難い観点から、白色や灰色等が好ましい。 When the first filling portion 14 is colored, the color of the first filling portion 14 is not particularly limited, but the existence of the first filling portion 14 can be surely grasped, and the components of the first filling portion 14 are wound. White or gray is preferable from the viewpoint that it is inconspicuous even if it adheres to the taking device.
 第1充填部14が着色されている場合、第1充填部14は着色材料を含む。第1充填部14が塗布材料の硬化物である場合には、着色材料は、硬化を阻害しないものであることが好ましい。着色材料は、顔料および染料のいずれであってもよく、また有機系着色材料および無機系着色材料のいずれであってもよい。具体的な着色材料の例としては、酸化チタン、カーボンブラック、またはこれらの混合物等が挙げられる。 When the first filling portion 14 is colored, the first filling portion 14 contains a coloring material. When the first filling portion 14 is a cured product of the coating material, it is preferable that the coloring material does not inhibit the curing. The coloring material may be either a pigment or a dye, and may be either an organic coloring material or an inorganic coloring material. Examples of specific coloring materials include titanium oxide, carbon black, or a mixture thereof.
 第1充填部14が着色されている場合、第1充填部14中の着色材料の含有量は、0.1質量%以上50質量%以下であることが好ましい。着色材料の含有量が、0.1質量%以上であれば、目視で第1充填部14を確認することができ、また50質量%以下であれば、着色材料が無機材料または有機材料であっても、リワーク性を良好に維持できる。 When the first filling portion 14 is colored, the content of the coloring material in the first filling portion 14 is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less. If the content of the coloring material is 0.1% by mass or more, the first filling portion 14 can be visually confirmed, and if it is 50% by mass or less, the coloring material is an inorganic material or an organic material. However, the reworkability can be maintained well.
 第1充填部14が発光材料を含む場合、発光材料としては、特に限定されないが、蛍光材料や蓄光材料が挙げられる。第1充填部14が蛍光材料や蓄光材料を含む場合には、第1充填部14に紫外線や可視光等の光を照射することによって、第1充填部14中の蛍光材料や蓄光材料を発光させることができる。 When the first filling portion 14 contains a light emitting material, the light emitting material is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a fluorescent material and a phosphorescent material. When the first filling portion 14 contains a fluorescent material or a phosphorescent material, the fluorescent material or the phosphorescent material in the first filling portion 14 is emitted by irradiating the first filling portion 14 with light such as ultraviolet rays or visible light. Can be made to.
 第1充填部14の表面14Bの形状は、上に凸状であることが好ましい。表面14Bの形状が上に凸状であれば、下に凹状よりもシート12を持ち上げることができるので、上記段差を緩和することができる。表面14Bの形状が、上に凸状であるか否かは、厚みT2と同様に位置変位曲線のグラフから判断することができる。具体的には、まず、上記グラフにおいて、第1充填部14が存在する箇所では巻芯11の高さよりも位置が高くなるので、変位量が上昇する。変位量が上昇し始める箇所における変位量0mmラインと位置変位曲線の交点である位置E2(図10参照)を把握する。そして、位置E1と位置E2を通る仮想線IL3(図10参照)を引く。位置E1と位置E2の間に存在する位置変位曲線のピーク数のうち仮想線IL3よりも上側に位置するピーク数の割合が50%以上であれば、第1充填部14の表面14Bの形状は上に凸状であると判断でき、また位置E1と位置E2の間に存在する位置変位曲線のピーク数のうち50%以上のピーク数のうち仮想線IL3よりも下側に位置するピーク数の割合が50%未満であれば、第1充填部14の形状は下に凹状であると判断できる。なお、仮想線IL3と位置変位曲線が重なる場合は、下に凹状であると判断する。第1充填部14の形状を判断するグラフは、横軸の1目盛りを5mmとし、縦軸の1目盛りを0.02mmとする。 The shape of the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is preferably convex upward. If the shape of the surface 14B is convex upward, the sheet 12 can be lifted more than concave downward, so that the step can be alleviated. Whether or not the shape of the surface 14B is convex upward can be determined from the graph of the position displacement curve as in the thickness T2. Specifically, first, in the above graph, since the position is higher than the height of the winding core 11 at the position where the first filling portion 14 exists, the displacement amount increases. The position E2 (see FIG. 10), which is the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the point where the displacement amount starts to increase, is grasped. Then, a virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 10) passing through the positions E1 and E2 is drawn. If the ratio of the number of peaks located above the virtual line IL3 to the number of peaks of the position displacement curve existing between the positions E1 and E2 is 50% or more, the shape of the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is It can be judged that it is convex upward, and the number of peaks located below the virtual line IL3 among the number of peaks of 50% or more of the number of peaks of the position displacement curve existing between the positions E1 and E2. If the ratio is less than 50%, it can be determined that the shape of the first filling portion 14 is concave downward. If the virtual line IL3 and the position displacement curve overlap, it is determined that the virtual line IL3 is concave downward. In the graph for determining the shape of the first filling portion 14, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
 第1充填部14の表面14Bの形状が上に凸状である場合、縦軸方向における仮想線IL3から位置変位曲線までの平均距離D1は、0.003mm以上であることが好ましい。平均距離D1が0.003mm以上であれば、シート12を有効に持ち上げることができるので、より上記段差を緩和することができる。この平均距離D1の下限は、0.01mm以上であることがより好ましい。平均距離D1の上限は、過剰に凸状であると新たな段差の原因になる可能性があるから0.1mm以下、更には0.07mm以下であることが好ましい。上記平均距離D1とは、仮想線IL3を基準線とし、この仮想線IL3よりも上に凸状となっているピークを7点読みとり、最大値と最小値を除いた5点の値を平均したものである。なお、読み取るピークは山部で、大きな部分を選択する。 When the shape of the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 is convex upward, the average distance D1 from the virtual line IL3 to the position displacement curve in the vertical axis direction is preferably 0.003 mm or more. When the average distance D1 is 0.003 mm or more, the sheet 12 can be effectively lifted, so that the above-mentioned step can be further alleviated. The lower limit of the average distance D1 is more preferably 0.01 mm or more. The upper limit of the average distance D1 is preferably 0.1 mm or less, more preferably 0.07 mm or less, because if it is excessively convex, it may cause a new step. The average distance D1 is defined by using the virtual line IL3 as a reference line, reading 7 points of peaks that are convex above the virtual line IL3, and averaging the values of 5 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value. It is a thing. The peak to be read is the mountain part, and a large part is selected.
 位置変位曲線のグラフの横軸に対する仮想線IL3の傾きは、0.0020以上0.0130以下であることが好ましく、0.0030以上0.0070以下であることがより好ましく、0.0050以上0.0060以下であることがさらに好ましい。この傾きが、0.0050以上であれば、凹むことなく充填材料を充填することができ、また、0.0060以下であれば、大きく凸することがなく充填材料を充填することができる。この傾きの下限は、0.0020以上、0.0030以上、または0.040以上であることが好ましく、上限は、0.0130以下、0.0120以下、または0.0100以下であることが好ましい。 The slope of the virtual line IL3 with respect to the horizontal axis of the graph of the position displacement curve is preferably 0.0020 or more and 0.0130 or less, more preferably 0.0030 or more and 0.0070 or less, and 0.0050 or more and 0. It is more preferably .0060 or less. If the inclination is 0.0050 or more, the filling material can be filled without dents, and if it is 0.0060 or less, the filling material can be filled without large protrusions. The lower limit of this inclination is preferably 0.0020 or more, 0.0030 or more, or 0.040 or more, and the upper limit is preferably 0.0130 or less, 0.0120 or less, or 0.0100 or less. ..
 第1充填部14の厚みは、上記離間位置P1付近から先端面12A1に向けて、徐々に大きくなっていることが好ましい。第1充填部14の厚みが、このように変化することによって、シート12における巻芯11の径方向DR3(外周面11Aの外周面11Aの法線方向)の急激な高さ変化を抑制できるので、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和することができる。 It is preferable that the thickness of the first filling portion 14 gradually increases from the vicinity of the separation position P1 toward the tip surface 12A1. By changing the thickness of the first filling portion 14 in this way, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in height of the winding core 11 in the sheet 12 in the radial direction DR3 (normal direction of the outer peripheral surface 11A of the outer peripheral surface 11A). , The step caused by the winding start end 12A can be alleviated.
 第1充填部の厚みが急激に変化すると、この厚みの変化部分に起因して変形が残存してしまい、巻き始め端部に起因する段差が十分に緩和されないおそれがある。このため、シートの厚みに対して十分な第1充填部の長さを確保することが好ましい。ただし、第1充填部の長さを長くすることで、巻取りなどの他の影響が出る場合には、敢えて第1充填部の長さを最適状態よりも短くすることで、最適な第1充填部の長さを有する状態よりも上記変形緩和長さは長くなるが、第1充填部を設けないよりは上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができる。したがって、図4のように第4介在部18が存在する場合には、第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2に対する第1充填部14におけるシート12の長手方向DR2に沿った長さL1(図4参照)および第4介在部18におけるシート12の長手方向DR2に沿った長さL2(図4参照)の合計の比((長さL1+長さL2)/厚みT2)が90以上であることが好ましい。また、図7のように第4介在部18が存在しない場合には、第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2に対する第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2に対する第1充填部14におけるシート12の長手方向DR2に沿った長さL1(図7参照)の比(長さL1/厚みT2)が、90以上であることが好ましい。これらの比の下限は、上記変形緩和長さを短くする点から、100以上、110以上、120以上、または140以上であることが好ましい。また、これらの比の上限は、特に限定されないが、例えば、1200以下、1000以下、800以下、500以下、または300以下であってもよい。 If the thickness of the first filling portion changes abruptly, the deformation will remain due to this change in thickness, and there is a risk that the step caused by the winding start end will not be sufficiently alleviated. Therefore, it is preferable to secure a sufficient length of the first filling portion with respect to the thickness of the sheet. However, if the length of the first filling portion is increased to have other effects such as winding, the length of the first filling portion is intentionally made shorter than the optimum state to obtain the optimum first. The deformation relaxation length is longer than that of the state having the length of the filling portion, but the deformation relaxation length can be shortened as compared with the case where the first filling portion is not provided. Therefore, when the fourth intervening portion 18 is present as shown in FIG. 4, along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 in the first filling portion 14 with respect to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14. The ratio of the total length L1 (see FIG. 4) and the length L2 (see FIG. 4) along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 at the fourth interposition 18 ((length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2). Is preferably 90 or more. Further, when the fourth intervening portion 18 does not exist as shown in FIG. 7, the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14 is in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14. The ratio (length L1 / thickness T2) of the length L1 (see FIG. 7) along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 in the first filling portion 14 to the thickness T2 is preferably 90 or more. The lower limit of these ratios is preferably 100 or more, 110 or more, 120 or more, or 140 or more from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length. The upper limit of these ratios is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1200 or less, 1000 or less, 800 or less, 500 or less, or 300 or less.
 長さL1は、シート12の長手方向DR2に沿った第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置から離間位置P1側の端までの長さである。長さL2は、シート12の長手方向DR2に沿った先端面12A1の直上の位置から1周目のシート12と2周目のシート12が接触する位置側の端までの長さである。長さL1および長さL2は、厚みT2と同様に位置変位曲線のグラフから求めることができる。具体的には、まず、後述する方法によって第4介在部の存在確認を行う。第4介在部が存在する場合には、位置変位曲線のグラフから上記位置E1および位置E2を見付け出す。次いで、上記位置E2を通り、変位量0mmラインに垂直な仮想線IL4(図10参照)を引く。そして、仮想線IL4と変位量0mmラインの交点を位置E3とすると、位置E2と位置E3との距離を求めることにより長さL1と長さL2の合計の長さを求めることができる。また、第4介在部が存在しない場合には、上記の方法によって、位置E2と位置E3との距離を求めることにより長さL1を求めることができる。 The length L1 is the length from the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14 along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 to the end on the separation position P1 side. The length L2 is the length from the position directly above the tip surface 12A1 along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 to the end on the position side where the sheet 12 on the first lap and the sheet 12 on the second lap come into contact with each other. The length L1 and the length L2 can be obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve in the same manner as the thickness T2. Specifically, first, the existence of the fourth intervening portion is confirmed by the method described later. When the fourth intervening portion is present, the position E1 and the position E2 are found from the graph of the position displacement curve. Next, a virtual line IL4 (see FIG. 10) that passes through the above position E2 and is perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line is drawn. Then, assuming that the intersection of the virtual line IL4 and the displacement amount 0 mm line is the position E3, the total length of the length L1 and the length L2 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the position E2 and the position E3. Further, when the fourth intervening portion does not exist, the length L1 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the position E2 and the position E3 by the above method.
 長さL1は、上記段差を緩和する観点からは、長いほど良く、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下である場合、長さL1は、110μm以上であることが好ましく、より上記変形緩和長さを短くするためには、1mm以上、更には10mm以上であることが好ましい。ただし、長さL1が長すぎると、加工上、上に凸状の第1充填部が形成されにくくなり、また第1充填部に波状の厚みむらが発生するおそれがあるので、長さL1の上限は、上に凸状の第1充填部14を得やすく、また波状の厚みむらを抑制する観点から、100mm以下であることが好ましい。 The length L1 is better from the viewpoint of alleviating the step. For example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, the length L1 is preferably 110 μm or more, and the deformation mitigation is further improved. In order to shorten the length, it is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more. However, if the length L1 is too long, it becomes difficult to form the first convex filling portion upward due to processing, and the first filling portion may have wavy thickness unevenness. Therefore, the length L1 The upper limit is preferably 100 mm or less from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the upwardly convex first filling portion 14 and suppressing wavy thickness unevenness.
 上記(長さL1+長さL2)/厚みT2や長さL1/厚みT2は、第1充填部14の形状を大まかに表すことができるが、より適正に第1充填部14における上に凸状等の形状を表すには、さらにシート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3を含む平面での第1充填部14の面積を用いることが好ましい。具体的には、図4のように第4介在部18が存在する場合には、第1充填部14における先端面12A1に接する位置での厚みT2に対する、シート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3を含む平面(図4で表される平面)における巻芯11の外周面11Aと第1充填部14の表面14Bで挟まれる領域R1の面積S1(図6参照)および巻芯11の外周面11Aと第4介在部18の表面18Aで挟まれる領域R2の面積S2(図6参照)の合計の比((面積S1+面積S2)/厚みT2)が、3.0以上であることが好ましい。図6における領域R1の面積S1は、第1充填部14の断面積を表している。また、図6における領域R2の面積S2は、第4介在部18の断面積、および領域R2内のシート12の断面積、および領域R2内の固定部材17の断面積の合計を表している。なお、図6においては、第1充填部14上および第4介在部18上のシート12を剥がして、第1充填部14および第4介在部18を露出させた状態を示している。第4介在部18が存在しない場合には、第1充填部14の厚みT2に対する、シート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3を含む平面(図7で表される平面)における巻芯11の外周面11Aと第1充填部14の表面14Bで挟まれる領域R1の面積S1の比(面積S1/厚みT2)が、3.0以上であることが好ましい。これらの比が3.0以上であれば、厚みT2に対して面積S1と面積S2の合計または面積S1が大きいので、第1充填部14でシート12を有効に持ち上げることができ、これにより上記段差をより緩和することができる。これらの比の下限は、上記段差をさらに緩和する観点から、4.0以上、5.0以上、6.0以上、7.0以上、または8.0以上であることが好ましい。また、これらの比の上限は、特に限定されないが、例えば、50.0以下、更には17.0以下であってもよい。 The above (length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2 and length L1 / thickness T2 can roughly represent the shape of the first filling portion 14, but more appropriately convex upward in the first filling portion 14. In order to express such a shape, it is preferable to use the area of the first filling portion 14 on the plane including the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11. Specifically, when the fourth intervening portion 18 is present as shown in FIG. 4, the longitudinal direction DR2 and the winding core 11 of the sheet 12 with respect to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface 12A1 of the first filling portion 14. Area S1 (see FIG. 6) and the winding core 11 of the region R1 sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 and the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 in the plane including the radial DR3 (see FIG. 4). The total ratio ((area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2) of the area S2 (see FIG. 6) of the region R2 sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface 11A and the surface 18A of the fourth intervening portion 18 is 3.0 or more. Is preferable. The area S1 of the region R1 in FIG. 6 represents the cross-sectional area of the first filling portion 14. Further, the area S2 of the region R2 in FIG. 6 represents the total of the cross-sectional area of the fourth intervening portion 18, the cross-sectional area of the sheet 12 in the region R2, and the cross-sectional area of the fixing member 17 in the region R2. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the sheet 12 on the first filling portion 14 and the fourth interposing portion 18 is peeled off to expose the first filling portion 14 and the fourth interposing portion 18. When the fourth intervening portion 18 is not present, the winding in the plane (the plane represented by FIG. 7) including the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11 with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion 14. The ratio of the area S1 of the region R1 sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface 11A of the core 11 and the surface 14B of the first filling portion 14 (area S1 / thickness T2) is preferably 3.0 or more. When these ratios are 3.0 or more, the total area S1 and the area S2 or the area S1 is large with respect to the thickness T2, so that the sheet 12 can be effectively lifted by the first filling portion 14, which is described above. The step can be further relaxed. The lower limit of these ratios is preferably 4.0 or more, 5.0 or more, 6.0 or more, 7.0 or more, or 8.0 or more from the viewpoint of further alleviating the step. Further, the upper limit of these ratios is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 50.0 or less, further 17.0 or less.
 面積S1と面積S2の合計や面積S1は、位置E2から位置E3までの領域において、図11に示されるように各測定点MPでの厚みtと測定点MP間毎の幅dとの積を求め、それを合計することによって求めることができる。なお、測定点間の幅は、サンプリング周期、巻芯の回転速度、および巻芯の外径から求めることができる。具体的には、測定点間の幅は、以下の数式(3)によって求めることができる。数式(3)において、d(μm)は測定点間の幅であり、ΔT(s)はサンプリング周期であり、r(rpm)は巻芯の回転速度であり、φ(mm)は巻芯の外径であり、πは円周率である。
 d=ΔT×(r/60)×φ×π×1000  …(3)
The sum of the areas S1 and the area S2 and the area S1 are the products of the thickness t at each measurement point MP and the width d between the measurement points MP in the region from the position E2 to the position E3 as shown in FIG. It can be calculated by calculating and summing it. The width between the measurement points can be obtained from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core. Specifically, the width between the measurement points can be obtained by the following mathematical formula (3). In formula (3), d (μm) is the width between measurement points, ΔT (s) is the sampling period, r (rpm) is the rotation speed of the winding core, and φ (mm) is the winding core. It is the outer diameter, and π is the pi.
d = ΔT × (r / 60) × φ × π × 1000… (3)
 上記したように巻芯はロール体の使用後に再利用されることが多いため、リワーク性が求められている。このため、第1充填部14は、巻芯11に対して接着されていないことが好ましい。リワーク性が良好であれば、巻芯はロール体の使用後に再利用できる状態となる。本明細書における「巻芯が再利用できる状態」とは、目視で巻芯の外周面を全て観察し、段差の原因となる付着物がない状態を意味する。除去の方法は、第1充填部に用いる充填材料によって異なる。表示装置用途のハードコート層のように架橋密度が高く、硬い場合には、エッジ厚みT1の厚みは薄い方が除去しやすい場合がある。一方で、架橋密度があまり高くなくゴム弾性を有する場合は、エッジ厚みT1は厚い方が除去しやすい場合がある。いずれの場合も、段差の原因となる付着物が目視観察によって残存していなければよい。また、本明細書における「接着」とは、粘着を含む概念である。第1充填部14は、巻芯11に対して接着されていないことにより、容易に第1充填部14を剥がすことができるので、良好なリワーク性を有する。第1充填部14は、巻芯11の洗浄や拭き取りによって、または第1充填部14の端部に巻芯11を傷つけないように刃状のものできっかけを作り、指などでゆっくりと巻芯11から剥がせることがより好ましい。また、第1充填部14は、接着成分を実質的に含んでいないことがより好ましい。 As mentioned above, the winding core is often reused after the roll body is used, so reworkability is required. Therefore, it is preferable that the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11. If the reworkability is good, the winding core can be reused after the roll body is used. The "state in which the winding core can be reused" in the present specification means a state in which the entire outer peripheral surface of the winding core is visually observed and there is no deposit that causes a step. The method of removal depends on the filling material used for the first filling portion. When the crosslink density is high and hard as in the hard coat layer used for display devices, the thinner the edge thickness T1, the easier it may be removed. On the other hand, when the crosslink density is not so high and the rubber has elasticity, the thicker the edge thickness T1, the easier it may be removed. In either case, it is sufficient that the deposits that cause the step do not remain by visual observation. Further, "adhesion" in the present specification is a concept including adhesion. Since the first filling portion 14 is not adhered to the winding core 11, the first filling portion 14 can be easily peeled off, and thus has good reworkability. The first filling portion 14 is formed by cleaning or wiping the winding core 11 or at the end of the first filling portion 14 with a blade-shaped object so as not to damage the winding core 11, and the winding core 14 is slowly wound with a finger or the like. It is more preferable that it can be peeled off from 11. Further, it is more preferable that the first filling portion 14 does not substantially contain an adhesive component.
 第1充填部14の構成材料を巻芯11の外周面11Aに対し垂直に剥離する90°剥離試験を行ったとき、2.0N未満の引張力で巻芯11の外周面11Aから剥がれることが好ましい。2.0N未満の引張力で上記構成材料が剥がれた場合には、容易に第1充填部14を剥がすことができるので、良好なリワーク性を有し、また0.3N以下の引張力で上記構成材料が剥がれた場合には、より容易に第1充填部14を剥がすことができるので、優れたリワーク性を有する。 When a 90 ° peeling test is performed in which the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is peeled perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, it may be peeled from the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 with a tensile force of less than 2.0N. preferable. When the constituent material is peeled off with a tensile force of less than 2.0 N, the first filling portion 14 can be easily peeled off, so that it has good reworkability and has a tensile force of 0.3 N or less. When the constituent material is peeled off, the first filling portion 14 can be peeled off more easily, so that it has excellent reworkability.
 90°剥離試験は、サンプルおよびバネ式テンションゲージ(株式会社大場計器製作所製)を用いて行うことができる。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置する。そして、この型に第1充填部14を形成するための塗布材料を流し込み、必要に応じて硬化させて、材料層を得る。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、裁断機等により20mm×100mmの大きさに材料層を切り出して、巻芯11の外周面11Aに設けられた10個のサンプルを得る。そして、サンプルの一端をバネ式テンションゲージにより保持して、温度25℃、相対湿度30%以上70%以下の環境下で、引張力を測定しながら、巻芯11の外周面11Aに対し垂直に前記一端を引き上げて、サンプルを剥離速度10mm/秒で剥離する。そして、90°剥離試験を行った10個のサンプル中、引張力が最大となったサンプルと最小となったサンプルを除いた8個のサンプルの引張力の算術平均値を上記構成材料の引張力とする。 The 90 ° peeling test can be performed using a sample and a spring type tension gauge (manufactured by Oba Keiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. Then, the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is cut out to a size of 20 mm × 100 mm by a cutting machine or the like to obtain 10 samples provided on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, one end of the sample is held by a spring type tension gauge, and the tensile force is measured in an environment where the temperature is 25 ° C. and the relative humidity is 30% or more and 70% or less, and the winding core 11 is perpendicular to the outer peripheral surface 11A. The one end is pulled up to peel the sample at a peeling speed of 10 mm / sec. Then, among the 10 samples subjected to the 90 ° peeling test, the arithmetic mean value of the tensile force of 8 samples excluding the sample having the maximum tensile force and the sample having the minimum tensile force was calculated as the tensile force of the above constituent materials. And.
 第1充填部14の構成材料の引張強さは、3.0MPa以上であることが好ましい。上記構成材料の引張強さが、3.0MPa以上であれば、第1充填部14を剥がす際に第1充填部14が千切れにくく、良好なリワーク性を得ることができる。上記構成材料の引張強さの下限は、優れたリワーク性を得る観点から、3.2MPa以上または3.4MPa以上であることがより好ましい。また、上記構成材料の引張強さが大きすぎると、第1充填部のクッション性に劣るため、上記構成材料の引張強さの上限は、良好なクッション性を得るために16.0MPa以下、8.0MPa以下、または5.5MPa以下であることが好ましい。 The tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 3.0 MPa or more. When the tensile strength of the constituent material is 3.0 MPa or more, the first filled portion 14 is not easily torn when the first filled portion 14 is peeled off, and good reworkability can be obtained. The lower limit of the tensile strength of the constituent material is more preferably 3.2 MPa or more or 3.4 MPa or more from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability. Further, if the tensile strength of the constituent material is too large, the cushioning property of the first filling portion is inferior. Therefore, the upper limit of the tensile strength of the constituent material is 16.0 MPa or less, 8 in order to obtain good cushioning property. It is preferably 0.0 MPa or less, or 5.5 MPa or less.
 上記構成材料の引張強さは、JIS K6251:2017に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ製)を用いて測定することができる。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置する。そして、この型に第1充填部14を形成するための塗布材料を流し込み、必要に応じて硬化させて、材料層を得る。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、打抜刃(例えば、高分子計器株式会社製の引張2号形ダンベル状打抜刃)によりJIS K6251:2017に記載のダンベル状2号形の大きさに材料層を打ち抜き、10個のサンプルを得る。その後、サンプルを25℃の環境下で24時間保持する。そして、上記テンシロン万能試験機の一対の把持具にサンプルの長手方向の両端部を把持させて、温度25℃、相対湿度30%~70%の環境下で初期把持具間距離20mmおよび引張速度100mm/分の条件で引張試験を行い、サンプルの引張強さを測定する。10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの引張強さの算術平均値を上記構成材料の引張強さとする。 The tensile strength of the above constituent materials can be measured using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. .. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. After that, the material layer is removed from the mold, and a punching blade (for example, a tension No. 2 dumbbell-shaped punching blade manufactured by Polymer Instruments Co., Ltd.) is used to make the size of the dumbbell-shaped No. 2 described in JIS K6251: 2017. Punch the material layer to obtain 10 samples. The sample is then held in an environment of 25 ° C. for 24 hours. Then, both ends of the sample in the longitudinal direction are gripped by the pair of grippers of the Tencilon universal testing machine, and the initial grip distance between the grippers is 20 mm and the tensile speed is 100 mm in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%. Perform a tensile test under the condition of / minute and measure the tensile strength of the sample. The arithmetic mean value of the tensile strengths of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the tensile strength of the constituent material.
 第1充填部14の構成材料の切断時伸びは、200%以上であることが好ましい。上記構成材料の切断時伸びが200%以上であれば、第1充填部14が伸びやすいので、第1充填部14を剥がす際に第1充填部14が千切れにくく、良好なリワーク性を得ることができる。上記構成材料の切断時伸びの下限は、優れたリワーク性を得る観点から、250%以上、300%以上、または350%以上であることがより好ましい。また、上記構成材料の切断時伸びの上限は、850%以下、600%以下、または500%以下であってもよい。上記構成材料の切断時伸びは、JIS K6251:2017に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ製)を用いて引張強さの測定方法と同様にして測定することができる。 The elongation of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 during cutting is preferably 200% or more. When the elongation at the time of cutting of the constituent material is 200% or more, the first filling portion 14 is easily stretched, so that the first filling portion 14 is not easily torn when the first filling portion 14 is peeled off, and good reworkability is obtained. be able to. The lower limit of the elongation during cutting of the constituent material is more preferably 250% or more, 300% or more, or 350% or more from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability. Further, the upper limit of the elongation at the time of cutting of the constituent material may be 850% or less, 600% or less, or 500% or less. The elongation during cutting of the above constituent materials is measured by measuring the tensile strength using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. It can be measured in the same manner as the method.
 第1充填部14の構成材料の引裂強さは、1.0N/mm以上であることが好ましい。上記構成材料の引裂強さが1.0N/mm以上であれば、第1充填部14を剥がす際に第1充填部14が引き裂かれにくく、良好なリワーク性を得ることができる。上記構成材料の引裂強さの下限は、優れたリワーク性を得る観点から、2.0N/mm以上、4.0N/mm以上、6.0N/mm以上、8.0N/mm以上、または10N/mm以上であることがより好ましい。また、上記構成材料の引裂強さの上限は、35N/mm以下、30N/mm以下、または25N/mm以下であってもよい。上記構成材料の引裂強さは、JIS K6252:2007に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ製)を用いて測定することができる。サンプルは、引張強さの欄に記載した方法で作製するものとする。 The tear strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 1.0 N / mm or more. When the tear strength of the constituent material is 1.0 N / mm or more, the first filled portion 14 is less likely to be torn when the first filled portion 14 is peeled off, and good reworkability can be obtained. The lower limit of the tear strength of the constituent material is 2.0 N / mm or more, 4.0 N / mm or more, 6.0 N / mm or more, 8.0 N / mm or more, or 10 N from the viewpoint of obtaining excellent reworkability. It is more preferably / mm or more. Further, the upper limit of the tear strength of the constituent material may be 35 N / mm or less, 30 N / mm or less, or 25 N / mm or less. The tear strength of the above constituent materials can be measured using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6252: 2007. .. The sample shall be prepared by the method described in the column of tensile strength.
 デュロメータータイプAで測定した第1充填部14の構成材料の硬さは、95°以下であることが好ましい。第1充填部の先端部には、巻取り時の圧力が常に加わっており、さらに経時変化や環境変化(温度、湿度および/または圧力)によっても圧力が加わる場合がある。第1充填部の先端部に起因する段差を抑制するためには、第1充填部の先端部が薄いことも有効であるが、デュロメータータイプAで測定した上記構成材料の硬さが95°以下のような柔らかい樹脂を用いることでシートの巻取り時の圧力で第1充填部が変形し、第1充填部の先端部に起因する段差を抑制できる。上記硬さの上限は、95°以下、80°以下、70°以下、または50°以下であることがより好ましい。一方で、シートが硬く、かつ第1充填部が柔らかい場合等、シートと第1充填部の硬さの差が大きい場合、第4介在部が存在しない場合には、シートの巻取り時の圧力によって第1充填部のみが圧縮されて、巻き始め端部に起因する段差が十分に緩和されず、シートに変形が若干生じておそれがある。このため、上記硬さの下限は、10°以上、15°以上、20°以上、または25°以上であることが好ましい。 The hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 measured by the durometer type A is preferably 95 ° or less. The pressure at the time of winding is always applied to the tip of the first filling portion, and the pressure may be further applied due to aging and environmental changes (temperature, humidity and / or pressure). In order to suppress the step caused by the tip of the first filling, it is effective that the tip of the first filling is thin, but the hardness of the constituent material measured by the durometer type A is 95 ° or less. By using a soft resin such as the above, the first filling portion is deformed by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet, and the step caused by the tip portion of the first filling portion can be suppressed. The upper limit of the hardness is more preferably 95 ° or less, 80 ° or less, 70 ° or less, or 50 ° or less. On the other hand, when the difference in hardness between the sheet and the first filling portion is large, such as when the sheet is hard and the first filling portion is soft, or when the fourth intervening portion does not exist, the pressure at the time of winding the sheet Therefore, only the first filling portion is compressed, the step caused by the winding start end portion is not sufficiently relaxed, and the sheet may be slightly deformed. Therefore, the lower limit of the hardness is preferably 10 ° or more, 15 ° or more, 20 ° or more, or 25 ° or more.
 デュロメータータイプAでの硬さ測定は、JIS K6253:1997に準拠して行われる。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置する。そして、この型に第1充填部14を形成するための塗布材料を流し込み、必要に応じて硬化させて、材料層を得る。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、裁断機等により材料層を切り出して、大きさ100mm×100mm、厚み10mmの10個のサンプルを得る。そして、デュロメータータイプA(製品名「GS-719N(TYPEA)」、株式会社テクロック製)を用いて、温度25℃、相対湿度30%~70%の環境下で硬さを測定する。10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの硬さの算術平均値を上記構成材料の硬さとする。 Hardness measurement with durometer type A is performed in accordance with JIS K6253: 1997. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample is prepared, and this mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Then, the coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into this mold, and if necessary, it is cured to obtain a material layer. Then, the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is cut out by a cutting machine or the like to obtain 10 samples having a size of 100 mm × 100 mm and a thickness of 10 mm. Then, using a durometer type A (product name "GS-719N (TYPEA)", manufactured by TECLOCK Co., Ltd.), the hardness is measured in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%. The arithmetic mean value of the hardness of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the hardness of the constituent material.
 シートの巻取り時に、巻き始め端部に起因する段差を緩和するように塗布材料が流動するが、塗布材料が硬化性高分子組成物である場合において、その後の硬化時に収縮してしまうと、特に第4介在部が存在しない場合には、第1充填部で十分に段差を緩和されず、シートが若干変形してしまうおそれがある。このため、第1充填部14の構成材料の線収縮率は、1.5%以下であることが好ましい。上記構成材料の線収縮率が1.5%以下であれば、寸法安定性に優れた第1充填部を形成できるので、第1充填部で十分に段差を緩和することができる。第1充填部14の線収縮率の上限は、段差をより十分に緩和する観点から、1.3%以下、1.0%以下、0.7%以下であることがより好ましい。また、上記熱収縮率の下限は、0%以上あってもよい。 When the sheet is wound, the coating material flows so as to alleviate the step caused by the winding start end, but when the coating material is a curable polymer composition, if it shrinks during the subsequent curing, In particular, when the fourth intervening portion does not exist, the step is not sufficiently relaxed at the first filling portion, and the sheet may be slightly deformed. Therefore, the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14 is preferably 1.5% or less. When the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material is 1.5% or less, the first filling portion having excellent dimensional stability can be formed, so that the step can be sufficiently relaxed at the first filling portion. The upper limit of the linear shrinkage rate of the first filling portion 14 is more preferably 1.3% or less, 1.0% or less, 0.7% or less from the viewpoint of more sufficiently relaxing the step. Further, the lower limit of the heat shrinkage rate may be 0% or more.
 上記構成材料の線収縮率は、以下のようにして測定することができる。まず、厚み2mm、130mm角以上の大きさの金型を用意し、この金型に第1充填部14を形成するための塗布材料を流し込み、硬化させて、サンプル(成形物)を得る。完全に硬化した後、サンプルの寸法を測定し、金型の内側の寸法と比較して、JIS K6249:2003に基づいて線収縮率を求める。10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの線収縮率の算術平均値を上記構成材料の線収縮率とする。 The linear shrinkage rate of the above constituent materials can be measured as follows. First, a mold having a thickness of 2 mm and a size of 130 mm square or more is prepared, and a coating material for forming the first filling portion 14 is poured into the mold and cured to obtain a sample (molded product). After the sample is completely cured, the size of the sample is measured and compared with the inside size of the mold to obtain the linear shrinkage ratio based on JIS K6249: 2003. The arithmetic mean value of the linear shrinkage rate of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples is defined as the linear shrinkage rate of the constituent material.
 第1充填部14は、充填材料を流動または変形させることによって形成することが可能である。充填材料が流動性を示す場合には、シートの巻回前またはシートの巻回時において流動性を示せば、必ずしも常時流動性を示さなくともよい。充填材料としては、塗布材料または充填テープが挙げられる。 The first filling portion 14 can be formed by flowing or deforming the filling material. When the filling material exhibits fluidity, it does not necessarily have to always exhibit fluidity if it exhibits fluidity before winding the sheet or at the time of winding the sheet. Examples of the filling material include a coating material or a filling tape.
 塗布材料は塗布可能な材料であり、例えば、塗布時または巻回時に流動性を有する。流動性を有する塗布材料としては、液体のみならず、液体から固体に変化する材料、加熱等によって流動性を有する固体、または硬化性材料が挙げられる。塗布材料が硬化性材料の場合には、第1充填部14は硬化性材料の硬化物から形成されている。 The coating material is a material that can be coated, and has fluidity at the time of coating or winding, for example. Examples of the coating material having fluidity include not only a liquid but also a material that changes from a liquid to a solid, a solid that has fluidity by heating or the like, or a curable material. When the coating material is a curable material, the first filling portion 14 is formed from a cured product of the curable material.
 塗布材料としては、例えば、硬化性高分子組成物、熱可塑性樹脂、油、でんぷん、粘着剤、密着剤、またはゾル等が挙げられる。 Examples of the coating material include curable polymer compositions, thermoplastic resins, oils, starches, adhesives, adhesives, sol and the like.
 硬化性高分子組成物としては、硬化性樹脂組成物や硬化性ゴム組成物が挙げられる。塗布材料として熱可塑性樹脂を用いる場合、塗布時および巻回時には、加熱によって流動性を有する状態とすることが必要である。 Examples of the curable polymer composition include a curable resin composition and a curable rubber composition. When a thermoplastic resin is used as the coating material, it is necessary to make it fluid by heating at the time of coating and winding.
 充填テープは、第1隙間13に充填されることによって第1充填部14となるテープであって、シート12の巻回時の圧力で毛細管現象によって広がる性質を有するもの、またはゲルテープである。充填テープは、巻芯11の外周面11Aに貼り付けて、または密着させて用いられる。 The filling tape is a tape that becomes the first filling portion 14 by being filled in the first gap 13, and has a property of spreading by a capillary phenomenon under the pressure at the time of winding the sheet 12, or a gel tape. The filling tape is used by being attached to or in close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
 上記したように第1充填部にはリワーク性が求められている。ここで、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)がシーラント材料であると、シーラント材料は巻芯に強固に付着してしまうので、リワーク性に劣る。これに対し、型取り用材料は、型から外すことが前提となるものであるので、リワーク性に優れる。このため、リワーク性の観点から、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)として、型取り用材料が好ましい。 As mentioned above, the first filling portion is required to have reworkability. Here, if the filling material (for example, a coating material) is a sealant material, the sealant material firmly adheres to the winding core, so that the reworkability is inferior. On the other hand, the molding material is premised on being removed from the mold, and therefore has excellent reworkability. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reworkability, a molding material is preferable as a filling material (for example, a coating material).
 25℃、剪断速度が1/s時の充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)の剪断粘度は、500Pa・s以下であることが好ましい。例えば、巻芯に塗布された充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)をへら等を用いながら、充填材料を展延させて、シートの巻回前に充填材料の形状を整えることも考えられるが、このような工程によって充填材料を展延した場合、多大な手間を要する。これに対し、充填材料の剪断粘度が500Pa・s以下であれば、シートの巻取り時の圧力で充填材料を所望の形状に展延させることができるので、充填材料を展延させる特段の工程を省略することができる。上記剪断粘度は、200Pa・s以下であることがより好ましい。上記剪断粘度は、充填材料を容易に展延させる観点からは、300Pa・s以下、100Pa・s以下、または50Pa・s以下であることが好ましい。 The shear viscosity of the filling material (for example, coating material) at 25 ° C. and a shear rate of 1 / s is preferably 500 Pa · s or less. For example, it is conceivable to spread the filling material while using a spatula or the like for the filling material coated on the winding core (for example, the coating material) to adjust the shape of the filling material before winding the sheet. When the filling material is spread by such a process, a great deal of labor is required. On the other hand, if the shear viscosity of the filling material is 500 Pa · s or less, the filling material can be spread into a desired shape by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet, so that a special step of spreading the filling material. Can be omitted. The shear viscosity is more preferably 200 Pa · s or less. The shear viscosity is preferably 300 Pa · s or less, 100 Pa · s or less, or 50 Pa · s or less from the viewpoint of easily spreading the filling material.
 一方で、上記剪断粘度は、上記変形緩和長さを短くする観点からは、10Pa・s以上75Pa・s以下が好ましく、20Pa・s以上50Pa・s以下であることがより好ましい。この剪断粘度が10Pa・s以上であれば、流動性が高くなり過ぎないため、シート12の変形を緩和でき、また75Pa・s以下であれば、第1充填部の先端部による変形を抑制できる。 On the other hand, the shear viscosity is preferably 10 Pa · s or more and 75 Pa · s or less, and more preferably 20 Pa · s or more and 50 Pa · s or less, from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length. If the shear viscosity is 10 Pa · s or more, the fluidity does not become too high, so that the deformation of the sheet 12 can be alleviated, and if it is 75 Pa · s or less, the deformation due to the tip of the first filling portion can be suppressed. ..
 さらに、上記剪断粘度は、充填材料のはみ出しをより抑制する観点からは、15Pa・s以上、更には20Pa・s以上であれば、塗布時に巻芯11とシート12の間からの充填材料のはみ出しを抑制できるので、好ましい。更には、剪断粘度は、60Pa・s以上であることが好ましい。この剪断粘度が60Pa・s以上であれば、充填材料の流動性が低く、充填材料が巻芯とシートの間から塗布時に、および/または巻き取り時の圧力によってもはみ出すことを抑制できる。 Further, if the shear viscosity is 15 Pa · s or more, and further 20 Pa · s or more, from the viewpoint of further suppressing the protrusion of the filling material, the filling material protrudes from between the winding core 11 and the sheet 12 at the time of coating. Is preferable because it can suppress. Further, the shear viscosity is preferably 60 Pa · s or more. When the shear viscosity is 60 Pa · s or more, the fluidity of the filling material is low, and it is possible to prevent the filling material from squeezing out from between the winding core and the sheet due to the pressure at the time of application and / or at the time of winding.
 充填材料の上記剪断粘度は、動的粘弾性測定装置(例えば、株式会社アントンパール・ジャパン製)を用いて測定することができる。具体的には、直径25mmのパラレルプレートを用いて、温度25℃、相対湿度30%~70%の環境下において剪断速度1[1/s]時の充填材料の剪断粘度を10回測定し、測定された10の剪断粘度中、最大値と最小値を除いた8つの剪断粘度の算術平均値を求めることによって剪断粘度を求める。 The shear viscosity of the filling material can be measured using a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device (for example, manufactured by Anton Pearl Japan Co., Ltd.). Specifically, using a parallel plate having a diameter of 25 mm, the shear viscosity of the filling material at a shear rate of 1 [1 / s] was measured 10 times in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 30% to 70%. The shear viscosity is obtained by obtaining the arithmetic average value of 8 shear viscosities excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 measured shear viscosities.
 充填材料(例えば、塗布材料)は、溶媒等の揮発成分を含まないことが好ましい。充填材料が揮発成分を含まないことにより、第1充填部14におけるひび割れ等の形状変化が小さく、またシート痕が生じにくい。 It is preferable that the filling material (for example, coating material) does not contain volatile components such as a solvent. Since the filling material does not contain a volatile component, the shape change such as cracks in the first filling portion 14 is small, and sheet marks are unlikely to occur.
(塗布材料)
 塗布材料は、第1充填部の形成時には塗布可能であるが、ロール体10の状態では流動性が低い材料であることが好ましい。本明細書における「ロール体の状態では流動性が低い」とは、ロール体の輸送時や製造時にロール体から塗布材料のはみ出しが生じないことを意味する。第1隙間13に第1充填部14を形成する際には、塗布材料は塗布可能であることが必要であるが、ロール体10の状態で、塗布材料の流動性が高いと、輸送時や製造時等の際に第1充填部がはみ出し、汚れが生じるおそれがある。これに対し、塗布材料が、第1充填部14の形成時に塗布可能であり、かつロール体10の状態では流動性が低い材料であれば、第1隙間13に第1充填部14を形成できるとともに、第1充填部14のはみ出しや汚れを抑制することができる。このような第1充填部の形成時には塗布可能であるが、ロール体10の状態では流動性が低い材料としては、硬化性高分子組成物が挙げられる。
(Coating material)
The coating material can be coated when the first filling portion is formed, but it is preferable that the coating material has low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10. In the present specification, "low fluidity in the state of the roll body" means that the coating material does not protrude from the roll body during transportation or production of the roll body. When forming the first filling portion 14 in the first gap 13, it is necessary that the coating material can be applied. However, if the coating material has high fluidity in the state of the roll body 10, it may occur during transportation. At the time of manufacturing or the like, the first filling portion may protrude and become dirty. On the other hand, if the coating material is a material that can be applied at the time of forming the first filling portion 14 and has low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10, the first filling portion 14 can be formed in the first gap 13. At the same time, it is possible to suppress protrusion and dirt of the first filling portion 14. A curable polymer composition can be mentioned as a material having low fluidity in the state of the roll body 10, although it can be applied at the time of forming such a first filling portion.
 塗布材料が硬化性高分子組成物である場合、塗布材料として、例えば、電離放射線硬化性高分子組成物(電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物や電離放射線硬化性ゴム組成物)、熱硬化性高分子組成物(熱硬化性樹脂組成物や熱硬化性ゴム組成物)、室温硬化性高分子組成物(摂氏20°~30°程度の室温で硬化する高分子組成物)(室温硬化性樹脂組成物や室温硬化性ゴム組成物)等を用いることができる。 When the coating material is a curable polymer composition, the coating material includes, for example, an ionizing radiation curable polymer composition (ionizing radiation curable resin composition or ionizing radiation curable rubber composition), a thermosetting polymer. Composition (thermosetting resin composition or thermosetting rubber composition), room temperature curable polymer composition (polymer composition that cures at room temperature of about 20 ° to 30 ° C) (room temperature curable resin composition) And room temperature curable rubber composition) and the like can be used.
 室温硬化性高分子組成物には、例えば、主剤および硬化剤からなる2液硬化性高分子組成物や空気中の水分で硬化する1液硬化性高分子組成物がある。第1充填部におけるシート中央に存在する部分はシートが巻回された状態で、ほぼ密封状態にあるので、この部分には空気が接触しにくく、十分に硬化しないおそれがある。これに対し、2液硬化性高分子組成物は、主剤と硬化剤を混合すれば、反応が開始するので、時間管理のみで硬化が可能である。また、2液硬化性高分子組成物は、1液硬化性高分子組成物に比べて保存安定性に優れる点で好ましい。 Room temperature curable polymer compositions include, for example, two-component curable polymer compositions composed of a main agent and a curing agent, and one-component curable polymer compositions that are cured by moisture in the air. Since the portion of the first filling portion existing in the center of the sheet is in a substantially sealed state in a state where the sheet is wound, it is difficult for air to come into contact with this portion, and there is a possibility that the sheet will not be sufficiently cured. On the other hand, the two-component curable polymer composition can be cured only by time management because the reaction starts when the main agent and the curing agent are mixed. Further, the two-component curable polymer composition is preferable in that it is superior in storage stability to the one-component curable polymer composition.
 電離放射線硬化性高分子組成物としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、アリル基等のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物を含む組成物が挙げられる。電離放射線硬化性高分子組成物を硬化させる際に照射する電離放射線としては、可視光線、紫外線、X線、電子線、α線、β線、およびγ線が挙げられる。 Examples of the ionizing radiation curable polymer composition include a composition containing a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group. Ionizing radiation Examples of the ionizing radiation irradiated when curing the curable polymer composition include visible light, ultraviolet rays, X-rays, electron beams, α rays, β rays, and γ rays.
 電離放射線硬化性高分子組成物は、例えば、電離放射線を照射することによってアクリル系ゲルを形成するアクリルゲル組成物が挙げられる。アクリルゲル組成物は、例えば、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、i-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、i-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、n-アミル(メタ)アクリレート、i-アミル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、i-オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、i-ミリスチル(メタ)アクリレート、ラウリル(メタ)アクリレート、ノニル(メタ)アクリレート、i-ノニル(メタ)アクリレート、i-デシル(メタ)アクリレート、トリデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ステアリル(メタ)アクリレート、i-ステアリル(メタ)アクリレート等を含む。本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」とは、「アクリレート」および「メタクリレート」の両方を含む意味である。 Examples of the ionizing radiation curable polymer composition include an acrylic gel composition that forms an acrylic gel by irradiating with ionizing radiation. Acrylic gel compositions include, for example, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, i-propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl ( Meta) acrylate, n-hexyl (meth) acrylate, n-amyl (meth) acrylate, i-amyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, i-octyl (meth) acrylate, i-myristyl (meth) acrylate, Includes lauryl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, i-nonyl (meth) acrylate, i-decyl (meth) acrylate, tridecyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate, i-stearyl (meth) acrylate and the like. .. As used herein, the term "(meth) acrylate" means to include both "acrylate" and "methacrylate".
 熱硬化性高分子組成物および室温硬化性高分子組成物としては、例えば、ウレタン樹脂組成物、エポキシ樹脂組成物、シリコーン組成物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、シリコーン組成物を好ましく用いることができる。シリコーン組成物としては、シリコーンゲル組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物が挙げられ、いずれも上記段差および変形を緩和しやすく、好適である。 Examples of the thermosetting polymer composition and the room temperature curable polymer composition include urethane resin compositions, epoxy resin compositions, and silicone compositions. Among these, a silicone composition can be preferably used. Examples of the silicone composition include a silicone gel composition and a silicone rubber composition, both of which are suitable because they can easily alleviate the above-mentioned steps and deformations.
 本明細書におけるシリコーンゲル組成物を硬化して形成される「シリコーンゲル硬化物(シリコーンゲル)」とは、オルガノポリシロキサンを主成分とする架橋密度の非常に低い硬化物であって、JIS K2220:2013(1/4コーン)による針入度が10~150のものを意味する。これは、JIS K6249:2003によるゴム硬度測定では測定値(ゴム硬度値)が0となり、有効なゴム硬度値を示さない程低硬度(すなわち、軟らか)であるものに相当し、この点において、いわゆるシリコーンゴム組成物およびシリコーンゴム硬化物(ゴム状弾性体)とは別異のものである。 The "silicone gel cured product (silicone gel)" formed by curing the silicone gel composition in the present specification is a cured product containing organopolysiloxane as a main component and having a very low crosslink density, and is JIS K2220. : It means that the degree of needle insertion by 2013 (1/4 cone) is 10 to 150. This corresponds to a rubber hardness measurement by JIS K6249: 2003 in which the measured value (rubber hardness value) is 0, and the hardness is so low (that is, soft) that it does not show an effective rubber hardness value. In this respect, It is different from the so-called silicone rubber composition and the cured silicone rubber product (rubber-like elastic body).
 シリコーンゴム組成物には、1液硬化性のシリコーンゴム組成物と2液硬化性のシリコーンゴム組成物がある。1液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物には、室温で硬化する縮合反応硬化性ゴム組成物と、加熱によって硬化する付加反応性ゴム組成物がある。また、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物には、室温で硬化する縮合反応硬化性ゴム組成物および付加反応性ゴム組成物と、加熱によって硬化する付加反応性ゴム組成物がある。また、シリコーンゴム組成物に他の樹脂を変性させることで、電離放射線硬化性ゴム組成物とすることも可能である。本発明においてはいずれの硬化方法のものでも可能であるが、これらの中でも均一に硬化できるとともに保存安定性が優れる点から、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物が好ましい。 Silicone rubber compositions include one-component curable silicone rubber compositions and two-component curable silicone rubber compositions. The one-component curable silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable rubber composition that cures at room temperature and an addition reaction rubber composition that cures by heating. Further, the two-component curable silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable rubber composition and an addition reaction rubber composition that cure at room temperature, and an addition reaction rubber composition that cures by heating. It is also possible to obtain an ionizing radiation curable rubber composition by modifying the silicone rubber composition with another resin. In the present invention, any curing method can be used, but among these, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition is preferable because it can be cured uniformly and has excellent storage stability.
 シリコーンゴム組成物としては、例えば、RTV(Room Temperature Vulcanizing)シリコーンゴム組成物が挙げられる。RTVシリコーンゴム組成物は、電離放射線硬化性高分子組成物より収縮率が小さく、寸法安定性が良好であり、また、硬化前には流動性に優れているため巻芯11とシート12やシート12間の隙間に侵入しやすく、また硬化後には流動性が低い。さらに、このRTVシリコーンゴム組成物は、深部硬化性を有するため、塗布時の厚みに関係なく一様に硬化反応が進行しやすい。また、この組成物は、離型性にも優れているため、硬化物を剥離して、再びロール体として利用できる状態にしやすい。 Examples of the silicone rubber composition include RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanizing) silicone rubber compositions. The RTV silicone rubber composition has a smaller shrinkage rate and better dimensional stability than the ionizing radiation curable polymer composition, and has excellent fluidity before curing, so that the core 11 and the sheet 12 or the sheet It easily penetrates into the gap between the 12 and has low fluidity after curing. Further, since this RTV silicone rubber composition has deep curability, the curing reaction tends to proceed uniformly regardless of the thickness at the time of coating. In addition, since this composition is also excellent in releasability, it is easy to peel off the cured product so that it can be used again as a roll.
 上記RTVシリコーンゴム組成物には、硬化反応機構により、縮合反応硬化性RTVシリコーンゴム組成物や付加反応硬化性RTVシリコーンゴム組成物等がある。本発明においては、どちらでも好ましく用いることができる。縮合反応硬化性RTVシリコーンゴム組成物であると、硬化阻害がない点好ましく、付加反応硬化性RTVシリコーンゴム組成物であると硬化収縮率が更に小さい点が好ましい。本発明においては、硬化収縮が大きい材料ほど上記段差の緩和に必要な塗布材料の厚みが大きくなる傾向があるため、特に薄いシート(例えば、シート12の厚みが3μm~45μm)においては、付加反応硬化性RTVシリコーンゴム組成物が好ましく用いられる。 The RTV silicone rubber composition includes a condensation reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition, an addition reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition, and the like, depending on the curing reaction mechanism. In the present invention, either can be preferably used. The condensation reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferable in that there is no curing inhibition, and the addition reaction curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably in that the curing shrinkage rate is even smaller. In the present invention, a material having a larger curing shrinkage tends to have a larger thickness of the coating material required for alleviating the step. Therefore, especially in a thin sheet (for example, the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 μm to 45 μm), the addition reaction A curable RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably used.
 上記RTVシリコーンゴム組成物は、特別な加工装置を必要としないこと等から液状シリコーンゴムLSR(Liquid Silicone Rubber)が好ましい。 The RTV silicone rubber composition is preferably a liquid silicone rubber LSR (Liquid Silicone Rubber) because it does not require a special processing device.
 なお、上記した各種組成物に、所望の機能を発揮させるために機能性成分を含ませてもよい。例えば、シリコーンゴム組成物は、一般的に電気絶縁体であるため、巻芯11、シート12、またはその他の物質との接触により帯電してしまう場合がある。その場合、シリコーンゴム組成物に導電性充填剤を含ませてもよい。このようにすることで、塵などの異物混入を防ぐことができるので、上記段差の原因となることを抑制できる。 The various compositions described above may contain a functional component in order to exert a desired function. For example, since the silicone rubber composition is generally an electrical insulator, it may be charged by contact with the winding core 11, the sheet 12, or other substances. In that case, the silicone rubber composition may contain a conductive filler. By doing so, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from being mixed in, so that it is possible to suppress the cause of the above-mentioned step.
 シリコーンゴム組成物に混入する導電性充填剤としては、カーボンブラック(アセチレンブラックやケッチェンブラック)、銀粉末、金メッキされたシリカやグラファイト、導電性亜鉛華等が挙げられる。また近年、イオン導電性シリコーンゴムも開発されており、このイオン導電性シリコーンゴムも使用することができる。 Examples of the conductive filler mixed in the silicone rubber composition include carbon black (acetylene black and Ketjen black), silver powder, gold-plated silica and graphite, and conductive zinc oxide. Further, in recent years, an ion conductive silicone rubber has also been developed, and this ion conductive silicone rubber can also be used.
 上記シリコーンゲル組成物には、本発明の目的を損なわない範囲で任意成分を配合することができる。この任意成分としては、例えば、反応抑制剤、無機質充填剤、ケイ素原子結合水素原子及びケイ素原子結合アルケニル基を含有しないオルガノポリシロキサン、耐熱性付与剤、難燃性付与剤、チクソ性付与剤、顔料、染料等が挙げられる。 Any component can be added to the silicone gel composition as long as the object of the present invention is not impaired. Examples of the optional component include a reaction inhibitor, an inorganic filler, an organopolysiloxane containing no silicon atom-bonded hydrogen atom and a silicon atom-bonded alkenyl group, a heat resistance imparting agent, a flame retardant imparting agent, and a thixo property imparting agent. Examples include pigments and dyes.
 反応抑制剤は、上記組成物の反応を抑制するための成分であって、具体的には、例えば、アセチレン系、アミン系、カルボン酸エステル系、亜リン酸エステル系等の反応抑制剤が挙げられる。  The reaction inhibitor is a component for suppressing the reaction of the above composition, and specific examples thereof include reaction inhibitors such as acetylene-based, amine-based, carboxylic acid ester-based, and phosphite ester-based. Be done.
 無機質充填剤としては、例えば、ヒュームドシリカ、結晶性シリカ、沈降性シリカ、中空フィラー、シルセスキオキサン、ヒュームド二酸化チタン、酸化マグネシウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化鉄、水酸化アルミニウム、炭酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、炭酸亜鉛、層状マイカ、カーボンブラック、ケイ藻土、ガラス繊維等の無機質充填剤;これらの充填剤をオルガノアルコキシシラン化合物、オルガノクロロシラン化合物、オルガノシラザン化合物、低分子量シロキサン化合物等の有機ケイ素化合物で表面疎水化処理した充填剤等が挙げられる。また、シリコーンゴムパウダー、シリコーンレジンパウダー等を配合してもよい。 Examples of the inorganic filler include fumed silica, crystalline silica, precipitated silica, hollow filler, silsesquioxane, fumed titanium dioxide, magnesium oxide, zinc oxide, iron oxide, aluminum hydroxide, magnesium carbonate, and calcium carbonate. , Zinc oxide, layered mica, carbon black, diatomaceous earth, glass fiber and other inorganic fillers; these fillers are made of organic silicon compounds such as organoalkoxysilane compounds, organochlorosilane compounds, organosilazane compounds and low molecular weight siloxane compounds. Examples thereof include fillers that have been surface-hydrophobicized. Further, silicone rubber powder, silicone resin powder and the like may be blended.
 塗布材料が粘着剤である場合、粘着剤としては、義歯安定剤が挙げられる。義歯安定剤は、義歯粘着剤とホームリライナーに大別でき、粘着剤としては、義歯安定剤の中でも義歯粘着剤を用いることができる。粘着剤を、義歯粘着剤のように、例えば、粉末タイプ、クリームタイプ、またはテープタイプに分類した場合、塗布材料として用いられる粘着剤は、粉末タイプやクリームタイプの粘着剤である。 When the coating material is an adhesive, the adhesive may be a denture stabilizer. The denture stabilizer can be roughly classified into a denture adhesive and a home reliner, and as the adhesive, a denture adhesive can be used among the denture stabilizers. When the pressure-sensitive adhesive is classified into, for example, a powder type, a cream type, or a tape type like a denture pressure-sensitive adhesive, the pressure-sensitive adhesive used as a coating material is a powder-type or cream-type pressure-sensitive adhesive.
 粘着剤は、粘着剤自体が粘着性を示す他、水分によって粘着性を示すものであってもよい。粉末タイプの粘着剤は、例えば、水分に触れると、吸水して、粘着性を示すものである。クリームタイプの粘着剤は、例えば、粘着性粉末成分を軟膏基剤でクリーム化したものであり、粘着性を示すものである。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive itself may be sticky, or may be sticky due to moisture. The powder type pressure-sensitive adhesive, for example, absorbs water when it comes into contact with water and exhibits stickiness. The cream-type pressure-sensitive adhesive is, for example, a sticky powder component creamed with an ointment base, and exhibits stickiness.
 粘着剤は、水溶性高分子を含むことが好ましい。水溶性高分子としては、特に限定されず、例えば、アルギン酸、アルギン酸塩類(例えば、アルギン酸ナトリウム、アルギン酸カリウム、アルギン酸アンモニウム、アルギン酸エステル等)、天然高分子化合物(例えば、アラビアガム、トラガントガム、ローカストビーンガム、キサンタンガム、グアーガム、寒天、ゼラチン、カラヤガム、カラギーナン等)、セルロース系高分子(例えば、メチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロースナトリウム、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース等)、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリビニルアルコール、メチルビニルエーテル、カルボキシビニルポリマー、アクリルアミドとアクリル酸との共重合体、ポリアクリル酸ナトリウム、ポリエチレンオキサイド等を挙げることができる。これらの水溶性高分子は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を任意に組み合わせて用いてもよい。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive preferably contains a water-soluble polymer. The water-soluble polymer is not particularly limited, and is, for example, alginate, alginates (for example, sodium alginate, potassium alginate, ammonium alginate, alginate ester, etc.), and natural polymer compounds (for example, arabic gum, tragant gum, locust bean gum). , Xanthan gum, guar gum, agar, gelatin, karaya gum, carrageenan, etc.), Cellulosic polymers (eg, methyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, etc.), polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, Examples thereof include methyl vinyl ether, carboxyvinyl polymer, copolymer of acrylamide and acrylic acid, sodium polyacrylate, polyethylene oxide and the like. These water-soluble polymers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 上記セルロース系高分子の中でも、カルボキシメチルセルロースナトリウムが好ましい。カルボキシメチルセルロースナトリウムは、セルロースの多価カルボキシメチルエーテルのナトリウム塩であり、別名カルメロースナトリウムともいう。カルボキシメチルセルロースナトリウムは、粉末であり、湿らされた際には、水和し、粘着または弾性を示すため、粘着剤にさらなる粘着性を付与する。 Among the above cellulosic polymers, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is preferable. Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is a sodium salt of polyvalent carboxymethyl ether of cellulose, also known as carmellose sodium. Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose is a powder that, when moistened, hydrates and exhibits adhesiveness or elasticity, thus imparting additional adhesiveness to the adhesive.
 塗布材料としての粘着剤は、塗布可能である限り、さらに油性基剤、水性基剤、粉体基剤、ガム基剤、賦形剤、乳化剤、湿潤剤、pH調整剤、粘度調整剤、可塑剤、色素などを配合することができる。これら基剤や添加剤としては、従来から義歯安定剤に広く使用されている基剤や添加剤が挙げられる。 As long as the pressure-sensitive adhesive as a coating material can be applied, it is further oil-based base, aqueous base, powder base, gum base, excipient, emulsifier, wetting agent, pH adjuster, viscosity adjuster, plasticizer. Agents, pigments, etc. can be blended. Examples of these bases and additives include bases and additives that have been widely used in denture stabilizers.
 例えば、油性基剤は、粘着剤をクリームタイプなどペースト状の形態に調製する場合に、その基剤として使用される。油性基剤としては、非水系の粘着剤(例えば、クリームタイプ)に通常用いられている鉱油成分(例えば、流動パラフィン、ワセリン、ゲル化炭化水素など)が挙げられる。 For example, an oil-based base is used as a base when a pressure-sensitive adhesive is prepared in a paste-like form such as a cream type. Examples of the oil-based base include mineral oil components (for example, liquid paraffin, petrolatum, gelled hydrocarbons, etc.) usually used for non-aqueous adhesives (for example, cream type).
 クリームタイプの粘着剤として、例えば、新ポリグリップ(登録商標)S、新ポリグリップ(登録商標)V、新ポリグリップ(登録商標)無添加、ポリデント(登録商標)NEO入れ歯安定剤(いずれも、グラクソ・スミスクライン・コンシューマー・ヘルスケア・ジャパン社製)、タフグリップ(登録商標)クリーム無添加(小林製薬株式会社製)、コレクト(登録商標)クリーム(塩野義製薬株式会社製)を用いることができる。 As cream type adhesives, for example, New Polygrip (registered trademark) S, New Polygrip (registered trademark) V, New Polygrip (registered trademark) additive-free, Polydent (registered trademark) NEO tooth stabilizer (all) Glaxo Smith Kline Consumer Healthcare Japan Co., Ltd.), Tough Grip (registered trademark) cream-free (Kobayashi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), Collect (registered trademark) cream (Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) can be used. it can.
 塗布材料が密着剤である場合、密着剤としては、義歯安定剤のホームリライナー(クッションタイプ)が挙げられる。密着剤は、辺縁閉鎖効果を改善することにより密着力を増強させるものである。このような密着剤は、例えば、非水溶性高分子を含んでいても良い。非水溶性高分子としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、酢酸ビニル系樹脂のようなポリビニル系樹脂が挙げられる。 When the coating material is an adhesive, the adhesive may be a denture stabilizer home reliner (cushion type). The adhesive agent enhances the adhesive force by improving the edge closing effect. Such an adhesive may contain, for example, a water-insoluble polymer. The water-insoluble polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyvinyl-based resins such as vinyl acetate-based resins.
 密着剤として、例えば、ポリデント(登録商標)クッション(グラクソ・スミスクライン・コンシューマー・ヘルスケア・ジャパン社製)、タフグリップ(登録商標)クッション透明、タフグリップ(登録商標)クッションピンク、やわらかタフグリップ(登録商標)(いずれも小林製薬株式会社製)、クッションコレクト(登録商標)EZ(塩野義製薬株式会社製)、新ライオデント白色、新ライオデントピンク(いずれもライオン株式会社)等を用いることができる。 As adhesives, for example, Polydent (registered trademark) cushion (GlaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare Japan), Tough Grip (registered trademark) cushion transparent, Tough grip (registered trademark) cushion pink, Soft tough grip ( Registered trademark) (all manufactured by Kobayashi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), Cushion Collect (registered trademark) EZ (manufactured by Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), New Riodent White, New Riodent Pink (all manufactured by Lion Corporation), etc. can be used. ..
 塗布材料がゾルである場合、ゾルとしては、シリカゾル、アルミナゾル、およびジルコニアゾル、酸化チタンゾル、酸化セリウムゾル、酸化スズゾル、酸化ニオブゾル等の金属酸化物ゾルが挙げられる。 When the coating material is a sol, examples of the sol include silica sol, alumina sol, and metal oxide sol such as zirconia sol, titanium oxide sol, cerium oxide sol, tin oxide sol, and niobium oxide sol.
 塗布材料が流動し過ぎない一方で、1周目のシート12が巻芯11の外周面11Aから離れる位置(離間位置)P1付近まで塗布材料を流動させるためには、塗布材料の塗布時の粘度を適宜調整することが望ましい。 In order to allow the coating material to flow to the vicinity of P1 at a position (separation position) away from the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 while the coating material does not flow too much, the viscosity at the time of coating the coating material It is desirable to adjust as appropriate.
 塗布材料は線状に塗布されるが、塗布材料の単位幅当たりの塗布量は、第1充填部14における上記範囲の厚みT1~T3がそれぞれ得られるような量であることが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、塗布材料の単位幅当たりの塗布量の下限は、0.2cm/m以上であることが好ましい。塗布材料の上記塗布量が少なすぎると、例えば、シリンジで塗布する場合に空気を噛んでしまい、シリンジから塗布材料を吐出しにくくなる場合やシートを走行させて塗布する場合に塗布切れを生じる場合があるが、上記塗布量が0.2cm/m以上であれば、このようなことを抑制できる。また、塗布材料の単位幅当たりの塗布量の上限は、3.5cm/m以下であることが好ましい。塗布材料の上記塗布量が多すぎると、自重で塗布材料が垂れてしまう場合や新たな段差を生じる場合があるが、上記塗布量が3.5cm/m以下であれば、このようなことを抑制できる。上記塗布量の下限は、0.3cm/m以上であることがより好ましく、また上記塗布量の上限は、2.0cm/m以下、または1.5cm/m以下であることがより好ましい。 The coating material is applied linearly, and the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably an amount such that the thicknesses T1 to T3 in the above range of the first filling portion 14 can be obtained. Specifically, for example, the lower limit of the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably 0.2 cm 3 / m or more. If the above-mentioned coating amount of the coating material is too small, for example, when the coating material is applied with a syringe, air is bitten and it becomes difficult to discharge the coating material from the syringe, or when the sheet is run and applied, the coating is cut off. However, if the coating amount is 0.2 cm 3 / m or more, such a situation can be suppressed. Further, the upper limit of the coating amount per unit width of the coating material is preferably 3.5 cm 3 / m or less. If the coating amount of the coating material is too large, the coating material may hang down due to its own weight or a new step may be generated. However, if the coating amount is 3.5 cm 3 / m or less, this is the case. Can be suppressed. The lower limit of the coating amount is more preferably 0.3 cm 3 / m or more, and the upper limit of the coating amount is 2.0 cm 3 / m or less or 1.5 cm 3 / m or less. preferable.
(充填テープ)
 充填テープの構成材料としては、上記塗布材料の欄で説明した粘着剤、密着剤、またはゲル等が挙げられる。ゲルとしては、例えば、上記シリコーンゲル組成物から形成したシリコーン系ゲル、上記アクリルゲル組成物から形成したアクリル系ゲル、ポリオレフィン系ゲル、ポリウレタン系ゲル、ブタジエン系ゲル、イソプレン系ゲル、ブチル系ゲル、スチレンブタジエン系ゲル、エチレン酢酸ビニル共重合体系ゲル、エチレン-プロピレン-ジエン三元共重合体系ゲル、またはフッ素系ゲル等が挙げられる。充填テープとして、例えば、タッチコレクト(登録商標)II(塩野義製薬株式会社製)やαGEL(登録商標)(株式会社タイカ製)を用いることができる。
(Filling tape)
Examples of the constituent material of the filling tape include the pressure-sensitive adhesive, the adhesive, the gel and the like described in the above section of the coating material. Examples of the gel include a silicone gel formed from the silicone gel composition, an acrylic gel formed from the acrylic gel composition, a polyolefin gel, a polyurethane gel, a butadiene gel, an isoprene gel, and a butyl gel. Examples thereof include styrene butadiene gels, ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer gels, ethylene-propylene-diene ternary copolymer gels, and fluorine gels. As the filling tape, for example, Touch Collect (registered trademark) II (manufactured by Shionogi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) or αGEL (registered trademark) (manufactured by Taica Corporation) can be used.
 充填テープの長さは、巻芯11の幅方向DR1において有効領域の幅以上であることが好ましい。充填テープの長さがこのような長さにすることにより、第1充填部を有効領域の幅全体に形成することができ、これにより、有効領域の幅全体においてシート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和することができる。充填テープは、シート12の巻回時に充填テープのはみ出しを抑制する観点から、巻芯11の幅方向DR1においてシート12の短手方向の両端から内側にそれぞれ1mm以上、10mm以上、または30mm以上離れるように配置されることが好ましい。なお、充填テープの長さとは、充填テープにおける幅方向DR1の長さを意味する。 The length of the filling tape is preferably equal to or greater than the width of the effective region in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. By setting the length of the filling tape to such a length, the first filling portion can be formed over the entire width of the effective region, whereby the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be formed over the entire width of the effective region. It is possible to alleviate the step caused by. From the viewpoint of suppressing the filling tape from sticking out when the sheet 12 is wound, the filling tape is separated from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 inward by 1 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 30 mm or more, respectively, in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. It is preferable that they are arranged in such a manner. The length of the filling tape means the length of the DR1 in the width direction of the filling tape.
 充填テープの幅は、5mm以上であることが好ましい。充填テープの幅をこのような幅にすることにより、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。充填テープの幅の下限は、6mm以上、7mm以上、または8mm以上であることがより好ましい。充填テープの幅の上限は、充填テープの重なりを抑制する観点から、巻芯11の外周長未満であることが好ましい。なお、充填テープの幅とは、充填テープにおけるシート12の長手方向DR2の長さを意味する。 The width of the filling tape is preferably 5 mm or more. By setting the width of the filling tape to such a width, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12. The lower limit of the width of the filling tape is more preferably 6 mm or more, 7 mm or more, or 8 mm or more. The upper limit of the width of the filling tape is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the filling tapes. The width of the filling tape means the length of the DR2 in the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12 in the filling tape.
 充填テープの厚みは、巻き始め端部12Aの上面12A2の高さ以上となることが好ましい。充填テープの厚みをこのような厚みにすることにより、シート12の巻回時に充填テープを広範囲に広げることができるので、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。具体的な充填テープの厚みは、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下の場合には、52μm以上220μm以下であることが好ましく、またシート12の厚みが3μm以上50μm未満である場合、50.5μm以上100μm以下であることが好ましい。 The thickness of the filling tape is preferably equal to or greater than the height of the upper surface 12A2 of the winding start end 12A. By setting the thickness of the filling tape to such a thickness, the filling tape can be spread over a wide range when the sheet 12 is wound, so that the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be more effectively relaxed. Can be done. The specific thickness of the filling tape is, for example, 52 μm or more and 220 μm or less when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, and 50 when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm. It is preferably 5.5 μm or more and 100 μm or less.
<第2充填部>
 第2充填部16は、第2隙間15に充填されている。すなわち、第2充填部16は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、シート12の裏面12Cと、固定部材17の第1端面17Aとに接している。
<Second filling part>
The second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15. That is, the second filling portion 16 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12, and the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17.
 第2充填部16の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性は、第1充填部14の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 Since the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the second filling portion 16 are the same as the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 第2充填部16は、充填材料を塗布または変形させることによって形成することが可能である。充填材料としては、塗布材料、または充填テープが挙げられる。この充填材料、塗布材料および充填テープは、第1充填部14で説明した充填材料、塗布材料および充填テープと同様であるので、説明を省略するものとする。第2充填部の構成材料は、第1充填部14の構成材料と同じものであってもよいが、異なるものであってもよい。 The second filling portion 16 can be formed by applying or deforming a filling material. Examples of the filling material include a coating material and a filling tape. Since the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape are the same as the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape described in the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted. The constituent material of the second filling portion may be the same as the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, but may be different.
 第2充填部16の厚みは、第1端面17Aから1周目のシート12が巻芯11の外周面11Aに到達する到達位置P2付近に向けて、徐々に小さくなっていることが好ましい。第2充填部16の厚みが、このように変化することによって、シート12における急激な高さ方向の変化を抑制できるので、固定部材17に起因する段差を緩和することができる。 It is preferable that the thickness of the second filling portion 16 gradually decreases toward the vicinity of the arrival position P2 where the sheet 12 on the first lap from the first end surface 17A reaches the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. By changing the thickness of the second filling portion 16 in this way, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the height direction of the sheet 12, so that the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be alleviated.
 シート12の長手方向DR2に延びる両端部12Gは、製品としては使用しない部分であるので、巻芯11の幅方向DR1における第2充填部16の長さは、ロール体10における製品化するための有効領域以上であれば、シート12の幅W2よりも小さくてもよい。 Since both end portions 12G extending in the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 are not used as a product, the length of the second filling portion 16 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 is for commercialization in the roll body 10. As long as it is equal to or larger than the effective area, it may be smaller than the width W2 of the sheet 12.
<第4介在部>
 第1充填部はシートよりも柔らかい傾向があるので、第1充填部における巻き始め端部の先端面に接触する位置での高さが巻き始め端部の上面と同じ高さであると、シートを巻回したときに、巻き始め端部の先端面と上面の角で段差が生じるおそれがある。これに対し、第4介在部18を形成した場合には、第4介在部18が第1充填部14とシート12の硬さの差を吸収することができるので、巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1と上面12A2の角の段差を小さくすることができる。また、第4介在部18が存在することにより、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差の部分に応力が集中することを抑制でき、3周目以降のシート12の変形が緩やかにすることができるので、この段差を緩和することができる。
<Fourth intervention>
Since the first filling portion tends to be softer than the sheet, if the height at the position of contacting the tip surface of the winding start end portion in the first filling portion is the same height as the upper surface of the winding start end portion, the sheet When winding, there is a possibility that a step may occur at the corner between the tip surface and the upper surface of the winding start end. On the other hand, when the fourth intervening portion 18 is formed, the fourth intervening portion 18 can absorb the difference in hardness between the first filling portion 14 and the sheet 12, so that the tip of the winding start end portion 12A The step between the corners of the surface 12A1 and the upper surface 12A2 can be reduced. Further, the presence of the fourth intervening portion 18 can suppress the concentration of stress on the stepped portion caused by the winding start end portion 12A, and the deformation of the sheet 12 after the third lap can be moderated. Therefore, this step can be alleviated.
 第4介在部18は、第1充填部14と同様に、着色材料や発光材料を含んでいることが好ましい。第4介在部18が着色材料や発光材料を含むことにより、ロール体10から第4介在部18がはみ出したときに目視により認識しやすい。また、第4介在部18の存在を確認しやすくなる。第4介在部18に含ませる着色材料や発光材料は、第1充填部14の欄で説明した着色材料や発光材料と同様であるので、説明を省略するものとする。 The fourth intervening portion 18 preferably contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, similarly to the first filling portion 14. Since the fourth intervening portion 18 contains a coloring material or a light emitting material, it is easy to visually recognize when the fourth intervening portion 18 protrudes from the roll body 10. In addition, it becomes easy to confirm the existence of the fourth intervening portion 18. Since the coloring material and the light emitting material contained in the fourth intervening portion 18 are the same as the coloring material and the light emitting material described in the column of the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted.
 シート12が透明であり、かつ第4介在部18が着色されている場合には、第4介在部18が存在するか否かは、目視によって容易に確認することができる。具体的には、まず、表面が2周目のシート12となるまでロール体10からシート12を繰り出す。そして、2周目のシート12が表面となったロール体10において、巻き始め端部12A付近を目視観察し、巻き始め端部12A上に着色されている部分が存在するか観察する。巻き始め端部12A上に着色されている部分が存在する場合には、第4介在部18が存在すると判断でき、また着色されている部分が存在しない場合には、第4介在部18が存在しないと判断できる。 When the sheet 12 is transparent and the fourth intervening portion 18 is colored, it can be easily visually confirmed whether or not the fourth intervening portion 18 is present. Specifically, first, the sheet 12 is fed out from the roll body 10 until the surface becomes the sheet 12 on the second lap. Then, in the roll body 10 having the sheet 12 on the second lap as the surface, the vicinity of the winding start end portion 12A is visually observed, and whether or not there is a colored portion on the winding start end portion 12A is observed. If there is a colored portion on the winding start end portion 12A, it can be determined that the fourth intervening portion 18 is present, and if there is no colored portion, the fourth intervening portion 18 is present. It can be judged not to.
 シート12が透明であり、かつ第4介在部18が発光材料を含む場合にも、第4介在部18が存在するか否かは、上記と同様にして、目視によって容易に確認することができる。発光材料が紫外線や可視光等の光の照射によって発光する材料である場合には、光を照射して、第4介在部18が存在するか否か確認する。 Even when the sheet 12 is transparent and the fourth interposition portion 18 contains a light emitting material, whether or not the fourth interposition portion 18 is present can be easily visually confirmed in the same manner as described above. .. When the light emitting material is a material that emits light by irradiation with light such as ultraviolet rays or visible light, the light is irradiated to confirm whether or not the fourth intervening portion 18 is present.
 シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下の場合、第4介在部18の厚みT3(図4参照)は2μm以上110μm以下であることが好ましい。第4介在部18の厚みT3がこの範囲であれば、シート12の巻取りへの悪影響を避けつつ上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができる。なお、第4介在部18の厚みT3が110μmを超える場合も、上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができるが、シート12の巻取りに悪影響が出ることがある。 When the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, the thickness T3 (see FIG. 4) of the fourth interposition portion 18 is preferably 2 μm or more and 110 μm or less. When the thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 is within this range, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding an adverse effect on the winding of the sheet 12. When the thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 exceeds 110 μm, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected.
 シート12の厚みが3μm以上50μm未満、更には40μm以下の場合、シート12の厚みが厚い場合よりも巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差によってシート12が変形しやすい。このため、第4介在部18の厚みT3は、0.5μm以上50μm以下であることが好ましい。第4介在部18の厚みT3がこの範囲であれば、シート12の巻取りの悪影響を避けつつ上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができる。 When the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm, and further 40 μm or less, the sheet 12 is more easily deformed due to the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A than when the thickness of the sheet 12 is thick. Therefore, the thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 50 μm or less. When the thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 is within this range, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding the adverse effect of winding the sheet 12.
 第4介在部18の厚みT3は、第4介在部18の最大厚みとする。第4介在部18の厚みT3は、以下のようにして測定するものとする。まず、巻き始め端部12A、第4介在部18、および2周目のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を採取し、固定する。そして、固定されたこの部分の断面を研磨し、第4介在部18の厚みT3を実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定する。 The thickness T3 of the fourth intervening portion 18 is the maximum thickness of the fourth intervening portion 18. The thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 shall be measured as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the fourth intervening portion 18, and the sheet 12 on the second lap is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the thickness T3 of the fourth interposition portion 18 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
 第4介在部18は、充填材料を塗布または変形させることによって形成することが可能である。充填材料としては、塗布材料、または充填テープが挙げられる。この充填材料、塗布材料および充填テープは、第1充填部14で説明した充填材料、塗布材料および充填テープと同様であるので、説明を省略するものとする。第4介在部18の構成材料は、第1充填部14の構成材料と同じものであってもよいが、異なるものであってもよい。 The fourth interposition portion 18 can be formed by applying or deforming a filling material. Examples of the filling material include a coating material and a filling tape. Since the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape are the same as the filling material, the coating material and the filling tape described in the first filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted. The constituent material of the fourth interposition portion 18 may be the same as the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, but may be different.
<<他のロール体>>
 ロール体10は、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1と固定部材17の第2端面17Bがシート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3に沿った断面においてほぼ揃っているが、図12に示されるロール体20のように、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bよりも突き出ていてもよい。この場合、第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されているとともに、巻芯11の外周面11Aと1周目のシート12の裏面12Cの間に位置し、第2端面17B側の第3隙間21に第3充填部22が充填されていてもよい。
<< Other rolls >>
In the roll body 10, the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17 are substantially aligned in a cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11. However, as in the roll body 20 shown in FIG. 12, the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 may protrude from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. In this case, the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling portion 16, and the second filling portion 16 is located between the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 and the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first lap, and is located on the second end surface 17B side. The third filling portion 22 may be filled in the three gaps 21.
<第3隙間>
 第3隙間21は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接する隙間である。具体的には、図12に示される第3隙間21は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、固定部材17の第2端面17Bとによって囲まれる隙間である。
<Third gap>
The third gap 21 is a gap in contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. Specifically, the third gap 21 shown in FIG. 12 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. is there.
<第3充填部>
 第3充填部22は、第3隙間21に充填されている以外は、第2充填部16と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。
<Third filling part>
Since the third filling portion 22 is the same as the second filling portion 16 except that the third gap 21 is filled, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 ロール体10は、第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されているが、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和する観点からは、第1隙間13に第1充填部14が充填されていればよいので、図13に示されるロール体30のように第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されていなくともよい。ロール体30は、第2隙間15が空洞になっている。 In the roll body 10, the second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, the first filling portion 13 is filled with the first filling portion 13. Since it is sufficient that 14 is filled, the second filling portion 16 does not have to be filled in the second gap 15 as in the roll body 30 shown in FIG. The roll body 30 has a hollow second gap 15.
 ロール体10は、第1隙間13に第1充填部14が充填されているが、固定部材17に起因する段差を緩和する観点からは、第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されていればよいので、図14に示されるロール体40のように第1隙間13に第1充填部14が充填されていなくともよい。ロール体40は、第1隙間13が空洞になっている。 In the roll body 10, the first filling portion 14 is filled in the first gap 13, but the second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15 from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the fixing member 17. Therefore, it is not necessary that the first filling portion 14 is not filled in the first gap 13 as in the roll body 40 shown in FIG. In the roll body 40, the first gap 13 is hollow.
 ロール体10は、1つの固定部材17を備えているが、図15に示されるように2以上の固定部材を備えていてもよい。図15に示されるロール体50においては、固定部材17の他、固定部材17の第1端面17A側に固定部材51を備えている。図15に示されるロール体50においては、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1が、固定部材17の第2端面17Bよりも突き出ているので、固定部材17に起因する段差を抑制するために、第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されており、また第3隙間21に第3充填部22が充填されていることが好ましい。また、同様に、図15に示されるロール体50においては、固定部材51に起因する段差を抑制するために、固定部材51の後述する第1端面51A側の第2隙間52には、第2充填部53が充填されており、また固定部材51の後述する第2端面51B側の第3隙間54には、第3充填部55が充填されていることが好ましい。 The roll body 10 includes one fixing member 17, but may include two or more fixing members as shown in FIG. In the roll body 50 shown in FIG. 15, in addition to the fixing member 17, the fixing member 51 is provided on the first end surface 17A side of the fixing member 17. In the roll body 50 shown in FIG. 15, since the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 protrudes from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, the step caused by the fixing member 17 is suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling portion 16 and the third gap 21 is filled with the third filling portion 22. Similarly, in the roll body 50 shown in FIG. 15, in order to suppress a step caused by the fixing member 51, a second gap 52 on the first end surface 51A side of the fixing member 51, which will be described later, is filled with a second. It is preferable that the filling portion 53 is filled, and the third filling portion 55 on the second end surface 51B side of the fixing member 51, which will be described later, is filled with the third filling portion 55.
<固定部材>
 固定部材51は、第1端面51Aと反対側の第2端面51Bを有している。第1端面51Aおよび第2端面51Bは、いずれも巻芯11の幅方向DR1に延びている。固定部材51は、固定部材17と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。
<Fixing member>
The fixing member 51 has a second end surface 51B opposite to the first end surface 51A. Both the first end surface 51A and the second end surface 51B extend in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. Since the fixing member 51 is the same as the fixing member 17, the description thereof will be omitted here.
<第2隙間>
 第2隙間52は、固定部材51の第1端面51Aに接する隙間である。具体的には、図15に示される第2隙間52は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、固定部材51の第1端面51Aとによって囲まれる隙間である。
<Second gap>
The second gap 52 is a gap in contact with the first end surface 51A of the fixing member 51. Specifically, the second gap 52 shown in FIG. 15 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first circumference, and the first end surface 51A of the fixing member 51. is there.
<第3隙間>
 第3隙間54は、固定部材51の第2端面51Bに接する隙間である。具体的には、図15に示される第3隙間54は、巻芯11の外周面11Aと、1周目のシート12の裏面12Cと、固定部材51の第2端面51Bとによって囲まれる隙間である。
<Third gap>
The third gap 54 is a gap in contact with the second end surface 51B of the fixing member 51. Specifically, the third gap 54 shown in FIG. 15 is a gap surrounded by the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the back surface 12C of the sheet 12 on the first lap, and the second end surface 51B of the fixing member 51. is there.
<第2充填部および第3充填部>
 第2充填部53は、第2隙間52に充填されている以外は、第2充填部16と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。第3充填部55は、第3隙間54に充填されている以外は、第2充填部16と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。
<2nd filling part and 3rd filling part>
Since the second filling portion 53 is the same as the second filling portion 16 except that the second gap 52 is filled, the description thereof will be omitted here. The third filling portion 55 is the same as the second filling portion 16 except that the third gap 54 is filled, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.
 ロール体10は、固定部材17を備えているが、図15に示されるロール体60のように固定部材17を備えていなくともよい。 Although the roll body 10 includes the fixing member 17, it does not have to be provided with the fixing member 17 as in the roll body 60 shown in FIG.
 図12、図13、図15、図16においては、長さL1、長さL2、厚みT2、厚みT3、面積S1、面積S2を示していないが、ロール体20、30、50、60においては、長さL1、長さL2、厚みT2、厚みT3、(長さL1+L2)/厚みT2、(面積S1+S2)/厚みT2は、ロール体10の場合と同様である。 12, FIG. 13, FIG. 15, and FIG. 16 do not show the length L1, the length L2, the thickness T2, the thickness T3, the area S1, and the area S2, but the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 show the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60. , Length L1, Length L2, Thickness T2, Thickness T3, (Length L1 + L2) / Thickness T2, (Area S1 + S2) / Thickness T2 are the same as in the case of the roll body 10.
 ロール体20、30、50、60は、全て第4介在部18を備えているが、第4介在部を備えていなくともよい。この場合、長さL1/厚みT2や面積S1/厚みT2は、図7に示されるロール体10の場合と同様である。 The roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 all include the fourth intervening portion 18, but the roll bodies 20, 30, 50, and 60 do not have to include the fourth intervening portion. In this case, the length L1 / thickness T2 and the area S1 / thickness T2 are the same as in the case of the roll body 10 shown in FIG.
 図13においては、固定部材17の表面は、全て巻き始め端部12Aに密着しているが、図8に示されるロール体10と同様に、巻き始め端部12Aと固定部材17の間に第1充填部14が入り込んでいてもよい。 In FIG. 13, all the surfaces of the fixing member 17 are in close contact with the winding start end portion 12A, but similarly to the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 8, there is a position between the winding start end portion 12A and the fixing member 17. 1 The filling portion 14 may be inserted.
<<ロール体の製造方法>>
 ロール体10は、例えば、以下の方法によって製造することができる。まず、図17(A)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置する。
<< Manufacturing method of roll body >>
The roll body 10 can be manufactured, for example, by the following method. First, as shown in FIG. 17A, the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 固定部材17を配置した後、ディスペンサーやシリンジ等の塗布装置を用いて、図17(B)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに塗布材料201、202を塗布する。塗布材料201は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接触するように塗布され、塗布材料202は、固定部材17の第1端面17Aに接触するように塗布される。この場合、例えば、2つの塗布装置を用いて、塗布材料201、202を同時に塗布してもよい。 After arranging the fixing member 17, the coating material 201 is applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 17B by using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe. , 202 is applied. The coating material 201 is applied so as to come into contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 202 is applied so as to come into contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17. In this case, for example, the coating materials 201 and 202 may be coated at the same time using two coating devices.
 上記においては、塗布材料201は第2端面17Bに接触するように塗布され、また塗布材料202を第1端面17Aに接触するように塗布されているが、塗布材料の濡れ性が高く、また塗布材料の粘度が低い場合には、第2端面や第1端面に接触するように塗布されると、塗布材料が巻き始め端部と固定部材の間に含侵し、また巻き始め端部とシートの裏面の間にまで濡れ広がる可能性がある。塗布材料の制御によって好ましい状態にもできるが、余分な含侵や濡れ広がりがあると、制御できない位置で硬化してしまい、その結果、新たな段差を生じる場合もある。また、充填材料の粘度が高い場合(例えば、テープ状のもの)や塗布材料の濡れ性が低い場合には、充填材料や塗布材料を配置すると、配置した近辺にしか濡れ広がらない状態で硬化する可能性が高いので、後工程の巻き回しによって十分に濡れ広げられなかった場合には、巻き始め端部付近が厚い状態で硬化する材料が多くなり、却って段差が大きくなってしまうおそれもある。このため、塗布材料201は固定部材17の第2端面17Bに近接するように塗布されることが好ましく、また塗布材料202は固定部材17の第1端面17Aに近接するように塗布されることが好ましい。本明細書における「近接」とは、巻き始め端部や固定部材に対し明らかに離間した位置を意味する。例えば、塗布材料が低粘度の材料であっても、巻き始め端部や固定部材からの離間距離は0.3mm以上であることが良い。この離間距離は、0.5mm以上であることが好ましく、最も安定させる観点から1mm以上であることが好ましい。なお、この離間距離が大きすぎると、段差を緩和する効果が得られにくくなるので、図3等の第1充填部14が完成できる範囲で距離を調整することが好ましい。例えば、この離間距離の上限は、10mm以下、7mm以下、更には5mm以下であることが好ましい。なお、この離間距離が10mmを超えると、第1隙間が充填されない可能性以外に、巻芯の直径にもよるが、塗布材料がシートの巻回前に流れ落ちるおそれがある。なお、塗布材料の粘度が低い場合には、塗布量を多くするとよい。離間距離は、10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の離間距離中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の離間距離の算術平均値を求めることによって求める。 In the above, the coating material 201 is applied so as to be in contact with the second end surface 17B, and the coating material 202 is applied so as to be in contact with the first end surface 17A, but the coating material has high wettability and is applied. When the viscosity of the material is low, when it is applied so as to come into contact with the second end face or the first end face, the coated material impregnates between the winding start end and the fixing member, and the winding start end and the sheet It may get wet and spread between the back surfaces. Although it can be made into a preferable state by controlling the coating material, if there is extra impregnation or wet spread, it will be cured at an uncontrollable position, and as a result, a new step may be generated. In addition, when the viscosity of the filling material is high (for example, a tape-like material) or the wettability of the coating material is low, when the filling material or the coating material is placed, the filling material or the coating material is cured in a state where it is wet and spreads only in the vicinity of the placement. Since there is a high possibility that if the material is not sufficiently wetted and spread by the winding in the subsequent process, many materials will be cured in a state where the vicinity of the winding start end is thick, and the step may be rather large. Therefore, the coating material 201 is preferably applied so as to be close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 202 may be applied so as to be close to the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17. preferable. As used herein, "proximity" means a position that is clearly separated from the winding start end and the fixing member. For example, even if the coating material is a low-viscosity material, the separation distance from the winding start end and the fixing member is preferably 0.3 mm or more. This separation distance is preferably 0.5 mm or more, and preferably 1 mm or more from the viewpoint of maximum stability. If this separation distance is too large, it becomes difficult to obtain the effect of alleviating the step. Therefore, it is preferable to adjust the distance within the range in which the first filling portion 14 as shown in FIG. 3 can be completed. For example, the upper limit of this separation distance is preferably 10 mm or less, 7 mm or less, and more preferably 5 mm or less. If this separation distance exceeds 10 mm, the coating material may flow down before winding the sheet, although it depends on the diameter of the winding core, in addition to the possibility that the first gap is not filled. When the viscosity of the coating material is low, the coating amount may be increased. The separation distance is obtained by measuring 10 points and calculating the arithmetic mean value of the separation distances at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured 10 points.
 塗布材料の粘度が高粘度の場合、塗布材料は広がりにくいので、上記離間距離は近い方が好ましく、塗布材料の粘度が低粘度の場合、上記離間距離が小さすぎると、塗布材料が固定部材上に多量に存在するおそれがあり、また上記離間距離が大きすぎると、別の方向に広がるために目的の隙間に充分に充填できないおそれがあるため、上記離間距離は小さすぎず、かつ大きすぎないことが好ましい。 When the viscosity of the coating material is high, the coating material is difficult to spread. Therefore, it is preferable that the separation distance is short. When the viscosity of the coating material is low, if the separation distance is too small, the coating material is placed on the fixing member. If the separation distance is too large, it may not be sufficiently filled in the target gap because it spreads in another direction. Therefore, the separation distance is neither too small nor too large. Is preferable.
 上記においては、巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置した後に、同時に固定部材17の両側に塗布材料201、202を塗布しているが、下記製造方法(1)~(3)のような順序で塗布材料201、202の塗布および固定部材17の配置をしてもよい。これらの中でも、下記製造方法(2)が好ましい。後述する塗布材料204、205も同様である。 In the above, after the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the coating materials 201 and 202 are simultaneously applied to both sides of the fixing member 17, but the following manufacturing methods (1) to (3) have been applied. The coating materials 201 and 202 may be coated and the fixing member 17 may be arranged in such an order. Among these, the following production method (2) is preferable. The same applies to the coating materials 204 and 205 described later.
 製造方法(1)は、巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置した後、固定部材17の第2端面17B側に、上記離間距離となるように塗布材料201を塗布し、その後、固定部材17の第1端面17A側に、上記離間距離となるように塗布材料202を塗布する方法である。 In the manufacturing method (1), after the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the coating material 201 is applied to the second end surface 17B side of the fixing member 17 so as to have the above-mentioned separation distance, and then the coating material 201 is applied. This is a method of applying the coating material 202 to the first end surface 17A side of the fixing member 17 so as to have the above-mentioned separation distance.
 製造方法(2)は、巻芯11の外周面11Aに塗布材料201を塗布した後に、塗布材料201からの距離が上記離間距離となるように固定部材17を配置し、その後、固定部材17からの距離が上記離間距離となるように固定部材17における塗布材料201とは反対側に塗布材料202を塗布する方法である。このような順序で塗布材料201、202の塗布および固定部材17の配置を行うことにより、安定して離間距離を有して配置でき、固定部材17上に余分な塗布材料201、202等が塗布されることを抑制できるので、固定部材17上に新たな段差が生じることを抑制することができる。 In the manufacturing method (2), after the coating material 201 is applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the fixing member 17 is arranged so that the distance from the coating material 201 is the above-mentioned separation distance, and then from the fixing member 17. This is a method of applying the coating material 202 on the side of the fixing member 17 opposite to the coating material 201 so that the distance between the two is the above-mentioned separation distance. By coating the coating materials 201 and 202 and arranging the fixing members 17 in such an order, the coating materials 201 and 202 can be stably arranged with a separation distance, and the excess coating materials 201 and 202 and the like are coated on the fixing members 17. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a new step on the fixing member 17.
 製造方法(3)は、巻芯11の外周面11Aに、所定の間隔で、塗布材料201、202を塗布し、その後、塗布材料201、202間に固定部材17を配置する方法である。 The manufacturing method (3) is a method in which the coating materials 201 and 202 are applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 at predetermined intervals, and then the fixing member 17 is arranged between the coating materials 201 and 202.
 なお、第1充填部14を形成するが、第2充填部16を形成しない場合には、まず、塗布材料201を塗布し、その後塗布材料201からの距離が上記離間距離となるように固定部材17を配置し、また、第2充填部16を形成するが、第1充填部14を形成しない場合には、まず、塗布材料202を塗布し、その後塗布材料202からの距離が上記離間距離となるように固定部材17を配置することが好ましい。 When the first filling portion 14 is formed but the second filling portion 16 is not formed, the coating material 201 is first applied, and then the fixing member is set so that the distance from the coating material 201 is the above-mentioned separation distance. When 17 is arranged and the second filling portion 16 is formed, but the first filling portion 14 is not formed, the coating material 202 is first applied, and then the distance from the coating material 202 is the above-mentioned separation distance. It is preferable to arrange the fixing member 17 so as to be.
 塗布材料201、202は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1において有効領域の幅以上に塗布されることが好ましい。塗布材料201、202をこのように塗布することにより、第1充填部および第2充填部を有効領域の幅全体に塗布材料201~205を存在させることができ、これにより、有効領域の幅全体においてシート12の巻き始め端部に起因する段差および固定部材17に起因する段差を緩和することができる。塗布材料201、202は、シート12の巻回時に塗布材料201、202のはみ出しを抑制する観点から、巻芯11の幅方向DR1においてシート12の短手方向の両端から内側にそれぞれ1mm以上、10mm以上、または30mm以上離れるように塗布されることが好ましい。 It is preferable that the coating materials 201 and 202 are applied to the width of the effective region or more in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. By coating the coating materials 201 and 202 in this way, the coating materials 201 to 205 can be present in the first filling portion and the second filling portion over the entire width of the effective region, whereby the entire width of the effective region can be present. The step caused by the winding start end of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be alleviated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the protrusion of the coating materials 201 and 202 when the sheet 12 is wound, the coating materials 201 and 202 are 1 mm or more and 10 mm, respectively, from both ends in the lateral direction of the sheet 12 in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. It is preferable to apply the coating so as to be separated by 30 mm or more.
 塗布材料201は、塗布材料201の幅が5mm以上、10mm以上、または30mm以上となるように塗布されることが好ましい。塗布材料201をこのように塗布することにより、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。塗布材料201の幅の上限は、塗布材料の重なりを抑制する観点から、巻芯11の外周長未満であることが好ましい。 The coating material 201 is preferably coated so that the width of the coating material 201 is 5 mm or more, 10 mm or more, or 30 mm or more. By applying the coating material 201 in this way, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12. The upper limit of the width of the coating material 201 is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the coating materials.
 塗布材料202は、塗布材料202の幅が0.5mm以上、1mm以上、または5mm以上となるように塗布されることが好ましい。塗布材料202をこのように塗布することにより、固定部材17に起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。塗布材料202の幅の上限は、塗布材料の重なりを抑制する観点から、巻芯11の外周長未満であることが好ましい。 The coating material 202 is preferably coated so that the width of the coating material 202 is 0.5 mm or more, 1 mm or more, or 5 mm or more. By coating the coating material 202 in this way, it is possible to more effectively alleviate the step caused by the fixing member 17. The upper limit of the width of the coating material 202 is preferably less than the outer peripheral length of the winding core 11 from the viewpoint of suppressing the overlap of the coating materials.
 塗布材料201は、塗布材料201の厚みが巻き始め端部12Aの上面12A2の高さ以上となるように塗布されることが好ましい。塗布材料201をこのように塗布することにより、十分な量の塗布材料201が塗布されるので、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。具体的な塗布材料201の厚みは、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下の場合には、52μm以上2000μm以下であることが好ましく、またシート12の厚みが3μm以上50μm未満である場合には、50.5μm以上2000μm以下であることが好ましい。なお、上記塗布材料201の厚みは、シート12を巻回する前の厚みである。 The coating material 201 is preferably coated so that the thickness of the coating material 201 is equal to or greater than the height of the upper surface 12A2 of the end portion 12A. By applying the coating material 201 in this way, a sufficient amount of the coating material 201 is applied, so that the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be more effectively relaxed. The specific thickness of the coating material 201 is, for example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, it is preferably 52 μm or more and 2000 μm or less, and when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm. Is preferably 50.5 μm or more and 2000 μm or less. The thickness of the coating material 201 is the thickness before winding the sheet 12.
 塗布材料202は、塗布材料202の厚みが固定部材17の表面の高さ以上となるように塗布されることが好ましい。塗布材料202をこのように塗布することにより、十分な量の塗布材料202が塗布されるので、固定部材17に起因する段差をより有効に緩和することができる。具体的な塗布材料202の厚みの下限は、固定部材17の厚みが3μm以上10μm以下である場合には、3μm以上12μm以下であることが好ましい。なお、上記塗布材料202の厚みは、シート12を巻回する前の厚みである。 The coating material 202 is preferably coated so that the thickness of the coating material 202 is equal to or greater than the height of the surface of the fixing member 17. By applying the coating material 202 in this way, a sufficient amount of the coating material 202 is applied, so that the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be more effectively relaxed. The lower limit of the thickness of the specific coating material 202 is preferably 3 μm or more and 12 μm or less when the thickness of the fixing member 17 is 3 μm or more and 10 μm or less. The thickness of the coating material 202 is the thickness before winding the sheet 12.
 塗布材料201、202を塗布した後、図18(A)に示されるように、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1が塗布材料201に接触し、かつシート12が塗布材料202を覆うように巻き始め端部12Aを配置する。具体的には、固定部材17にシート12の巻き始め端部12Aを貼り付けて、固定部材17を介して巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定する。 After applying the coating materials 201 and 202, as shown in FIG. 18A, the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 comes into contact with the coating material 201, and the sheet 12 covers the coating material 202. The winding start end 12A is arranged so as to. Specifically, the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 is attached to the fixing member 17, and the winding start end 12A is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via the fixing member 17.
 シート12の巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11に固定した後、図18(B)に示されるように、巻芯11の外周面11Aに沿ってシート12を巻回する。シート12を巻回すると、塗布材料201、202が流動して広がるので、第1隙間13に塗布材料201が充填されるとともに第2隙間15に塗布材料202が充填され、第1隙間13に充填された第1充填部14および第2隙間15に充填された第2充填部16が形成される。これにより、ロール体10が得られる。なお、塗布材料201等を第1隙間13等に確実に広げて、充填するため、シート12が1000mを超える場合には、シート12を1000m以上巻き、またシート12が1000mに満たない場合には、シート12の全長を巻くことが好ましい。 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 18B. When the sheet 12 is wound, the coating materials 201 and 202 flow and spread, so that the first gap 13 is filled with the coating material 201, the second gap 15 is filled with the coating material 202, and the first gap 13 is filled. A second filling portion 16 filled in the first filling portion 14 and the second gap 15 is formed. As a result, the roll body 10 is obtained. In addition, in order to surely expand and fill the coating material 201 or the like in the first gap 13 or the like, when the sheet 12 exceeds 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound 1000 m or more, and when the sheet 12 is less than 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound. , It is preferable to wind the entire length of the sheet 12.
 また、塗布材料201、202が、硬化性高分子組成物である場合には、少なくとも2周目のシート12の巻回後に、硬化性高分子組成物を硬化させる。硬化性高分子組成物が、1液硬化性高分子組成物(水分硬化性高分子組成物)である場合には、この組成物は空気中の湿度と反応して室温で放置することで硬化するので、加熱装置や電離放射線照射装置等の特別な装置を用いずに硬化させることができる。また、硬化性高分子組成物が2液硬化性高分子組成物である場合には、主剤と硬化剤を混合することによって硬化させることができる。 Further, when the coating materials 201 and 202 are curable polymer compositions, the curable polymer composition is cured at least after winding the sheet 12 on the second lap. When the curable polymer composition is a one-component curable polymer composition (moisture-curable polymer composition), this composition reacts with humidity in the air and is cured by leaving it at room temperature. Therefore, it can be cured without using a special device such as a heating device or an ionizing radiation irradiation device. When the curable polymer composition is a two-component curable polymer composition, it can be cured by mixing the main agent and the curing agent.
 ロール体20は、例えば、以下の方法によって製造することができる。まず、巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置する。 The roll body 20 can be manufactured by, for example, the following method. First, the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 固定部材17を配置した後、ディスペンサーやシリンジ等の塗布装置を用いて、図19(A)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに塗布材料203~205を塗布する。塗布材料204は、固定部材17の第1端面17Aに接触するように塗布され、塗布材料205は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接触するように塗布される。塗布材料203は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bおよび塗布材料205とは離れた箇所に塗布される。なお、塗布材料203は、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1に近接するように塗布され、塗布材料204は、固定部材17の第1端面17Aに近接するように塗布され、塗布材料205は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに近接するように塗布されてもよい。また、巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置した後に、塗布材料203~205を塗布しているが、塗布材料203~205を塗布した後に、塗布材料204が固定部材17の第1端面17Aに接触または近接するように、また塗布材料205が固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接触または近接するように固定部材17を配置してもよい。 After arranging the fixing member 17, the coating material 203 is applied to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 19A by using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe. ~ 205 is applied. The coating material 204 is applied so as to be in contact with the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17, and the coating material 205 is applied so as to be in contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. The coating material 203 is applied to a portion of the fixing member 17 apart from the second end surface 17B and the coating material 205. The coating material 203 is applied so as to be close to the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12, and the coating material 204 is applied so as to be close to the first end surface 17A of the fixing member 17, and the coating material is applied. 205 may be applied so as to be close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. Further, after the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the coating materials 203 to 205 are applied, but after the coating materials 203 to 205 are applied, the coating material 204 is the first fixing member 17. The fixing member 17 may be arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the end surface 17A and so that the coating material 205 is in contact with or close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
 塗布材料203~205を塗布した後、図19(B)に示されるように、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1が塗布材料203に接触し、かつシート12が塗布材料204、205をそれぞれ覆うように巻き始め端部12Aを配置する。具体的には、固定部材17にシート12の巻き始め端部12Aを貼り付けて、固定部材17を介して巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定する。 After coating the coating materials 203 to 205, as shown in FIG. 19B, the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 comes into contact with the coating material 203, and the sheets 12 contact the coating materials 204 and 205. The winding start end 12A is arranged so as to cover each of them. Specifically, the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 is attached to the fixing member 17, and the winding start end 12A is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via the fixing member 17.
 シート12の巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11に固定した後、図19(C)に示されるように、巻芯11の外周面11Aに沿ってシート12を巻回する。シート12を巻回すると、塗布材料203~205が流動して広がるので、第1隙間13に塗布材料203が充填され、第2隙間15に塗布材料204が充填され、第3隙間21に塗布材料205が充填されて、第1隙間13に充填された第1充填部14、第2隙間15に充填された第2充填部16、および第3隙間21に充填された第3充填部22が形成される。これにより、ロール体20が得られる。なお、塗布材料203等を第1隙間13等に確実に広げて、充填するため、シート12が1000mを超える場合には、シート12を1000m以上巻き、またシート12が1000mに満たない場合には、シート12の全長を巻くことが好ましい。 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 19C. When the sheet 12 is wound, the coating materials 203 to 205 flow and spread, so that the first gap 13 is filled with the coating material 203, the second gap 15 is filled with the coating material 204, and the third gap 21 is filled with the coating material. 205 is filled to form a first filling portion 14 filled in the first gap 13, a second filling portion 16 filled in the second gap 15, and a third filling portion 22 filled in the third gap 21. Will be done. As a result, the roll body 20 is obtained. In order to surely expand and fill the coating material 203 or the like in the first gap 13 or the like, when the sheet 12 exceeds 1000 m, the sheet 12 is wound 1000 m or more, and when the sheet 12 is less than 1000 m. , It is preferable to wind the entire length of the sheet 12.
 上記製造方法においては、いずれも、塗布材料201~205をシート12の巻回によって流動させているが、シート12の巻回前に予め塗布材料201等を流動させてもよい。ただし、シート12の巻回前に塗布材料201等を流動させると、工程が増えるので、塗布材料201~205をシート12の巻回によって流動させる方が好ましい。 In all of the above manufacturing methods, the coating materials 201 to 205 are flowed by winding the sheet 12, but the coating material 201 and the like may be flowed in advance before the sheet 12 is wound. However, if the coating material 201 or the like is flowed before the sheet 12 is wound, the number of steps is increased, so it is preferable to flow the coating materials 201 to 205 by winding the sheet 12.
 上記製造方法においては、塗布材料201~205をディスペンサやシリンジ等の塗布装置を用いて、塗布しているが、塗布装置とともにスリットを有する型を用いて、塗布材料201~205を塗布してもよい。スリットを有する型を用いて塗布材料201~205の塗布を行うことにより、塗布材料201~205の厚みや幅などの部分的なばらつきを低減させることができる。型の構成材料は、特に限定されないが、例えば、樹脂や金属等が挙げられる。 In the above manufacturing method, the coating materials 201 to 205 are applied using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, but even if the coating materials 201 to 205 are applied using a mold having a slit together with the coating device. Good. By applying the coating materials 201 to 205 using a mold having a slit, it is possible to reduce partial variations in the thickness and width of the coating materials 201 to 205. The constituent material of the mold is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include resin and metal.
 具体的には、まず、図20(A)に示されるようにスリット210Aを有する型210を用意する。この型210は、塗布材料201を塗布するために用いられるものである。スリット210Aの長さ、幅、深さは、塗布材料201の長さ、幅、厚みとそれぞれ同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 20A, a mold 210 having a slit 210A is prepared. This mold 210 is used for coating the coating material 201. Since the length, width, and depth of the slit 210A are the same as the length, width, and thickness of the coating material 201, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 型210を用意した後、図20(B)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11A上に型を配置する。型210は、型210を直上から見たとき、スリットの幅方向の固定部材17側の内面が、固定部材17の第2端面17Bと重なるように、または近接するように配置される。 After preparing the mold 210, the mold is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 20 (B). When the mold 210 is viewed from directly above, the mold 210 is arranged so that the inner surface of the slit on the fixing member 17 side in the width direction overlaps with or is close to the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17.
 型210を巻芯11の外周面11A上に配置した後、ディスペンサやシリンジ等の塗布装置を用いて、図20(B)に示されるように塗布材料201をスリット210A内に供給する。塗布装置は、ディスペンサやシリンジであってもよいが、スプレーやダイコーターであってもよい。その後、必要に応じて、ドクターブレード等で型210の表面に存在している余分な塗布材料201を掻き取る。そして、型210を取り除くことにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに塗布材料201を配置することができる。その後の工程は、ロール体10、20の上記した工程と同様である。塗布材料202~205も同様の手順でスリット210Aを有する型210を用いて配置することができる。 After arranging the mold 210 on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the coating material 201 is supplied into the slit 210A as shown in FIG. 20B using a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe. The coating device may be a dispenser or a syringe, but may be a spray or a die coater. Then, if necessary, the excess coating material 201 existing on the surface of the mold 210 is scraped off with a doctor blade or the like. Then, by removing the mold 210, the coating material 201 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. The coating materials 202 to 205 can also be arranged by using the mold 210 having the slit 210A in the same procedure.
 塗布材料201~205を塗布する代わりに充填テープを巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置してもよい。具体的には、まず、図21(A)に示されるように基材221の表面にディスペンサやシリンジ等の塗布装置によって塗布材料201をテープ状に塗布して、基材221と塗布材料201からなる充填テープ222とを備える積層体220を形成する。なお、ここでは、塗布材料201から充填テープ222を形成しているが、充填テープはシートの巻回時の圧力で広がる材料から形成されていれば、塗布材料201を用いなくともよい。 Instead of applying the coating materials 201 to 205, the filling tape may be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the coating material 201 is coated on the surface of the base material 221 in the form of a tape by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, and the base material 221 and the coating material 201 are used. The laminated body 220 including the filling tape 222 is formed. Although the filling tape 222 is formed from the coating material 201 here, the coating material 201 may not be used as long as the filling tape is made of a material that spreads by the pressure at the time of winding the sheet.
 基材221の構成材料としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等のポリエステル系樹脂、トリアセチルセルロース等のセルロース系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂等が挙げられる。また、基材221として、公知の離型フィルムを用いてもよい。基材221の表面に塗布材料201を塗布する際には、基材221に予め位置合わせ線221Aを引いておき、その位置合わせ線221Aに沿って塗布材料201を塗布することが好ましい。基材221に予めこのような位置合わせ線221Aを引くことにより、塗布材料201の位置ずれを抑制することができる。また、基材221の表面に塗布材料201を塗布する際には、塗布装置を固定した状態で、巻出装置を用いて、基材221を定速で巻き出すことが好ましい。基材221の定速で巻き出すことにより、塗布むらを抑制できる。 The constituent material of the base material 221 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate, cellulosic resins such as triacetyl cellulose, and acrylic resins. Further, a known release film may be used as the base material 221. When the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the base material 221, it is preferable to draw an alignment line 221A on the base material 221 in advance and apply the coating material 201 along the alignment line 221A. By drawing such an alignment line 221A on the base material 221 in advance, the misalignment of the coating material 201 can be suppressed. Further, when the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the base material 221, it is preferable to unwind the base material 221 at a constant speed by using the unwinding device with the coating device fixed. By unwinding the base material 221 at a constant speed, uneven coating can be suppressed.
 積層体220を形成した後、図21(B)に示されるように、充填テープ222が巻芯11の外周面11Aに接触するように積層体220を巻芯11の外周面11Aに貼り付け、または密着させる。充填テープ222は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接触するように、または近接するように貼り付け、または密着させる。その後、基材221を剥離する。これにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに充填テープ222を配置することができる。その後の工程は、ロール体10、20の上記した工程と同様である。 After forming the laminate 220, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the laminate 220 is attached to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 so that the filling tape 222 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Or make it adhere. The filling tape 222 is attached or brought into close contact with or in close contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. After that, the base material 221 is peeled off. As a result, the filling tape 222 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20.
 上記では1枚の基材および充填テープを有する積層体を形成しているが、2枚の基材、充填テープ、および厚み調節部材を有する積層体を形成してもよい。具体的には、図22(A)に示されるように第1基材231の表面にディスペンサやシリンジ等の塗布装置によって塗布材料201を塗布する。 In the above, a laminate having one base material and a filling tape is formed, but a laminate having two base materials, a filling tape, and a thickness adjusting member may be formed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22A, the coating material 201 is applied to the surface of the first base material 231 by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe.
 そして、図22(B)に示されるように、塗布材料201および塗布材料201を所望の厚みにするために所望の厚みを有する厚み調節部材232を挟むように、塗布材料201の上から、第2基材233を重ねて、積層体230を形成する。厚み調節部材232としては、例えば、スペーサーや粒子等が挙げられる。塗布材料201に対する第2基材233の剥離強度は、塗布材料201に対する第1基材231の剥離強度よりも小さいことが好ましい。このような関係を満たすことにより、第2基材233を容易に剥がすことができる。第2基材233の剥離強度は、引張り試験機(製品名「シングルコラム型材料試験機STA-1150」、株式会社A&D製)を用い、以下の測定方法により測定される値である。剥離強度の測定の際には、まず、縦30cm×横2.5cmのガラス板に両面テープ(株式会社寺岡製作所 No.751B)を貼り付ける。一方で、積層体230を縦200mm×横25mmの大きさに切り出し、第1基材231側をガラス板上の両面テープで貼り付け、引張り試験機の一対の治具に保持させる。そして、ガラス板に貼り付けられた積層体230を引張り試験機の一対の治具に保持させる。治具に積層体230を保持させる際には、人手で予め積層体230から第2基材233を若干剥離させて、きっかけを作り、片方の治具に第2基材233を保持させ、他方の治具にガラス板および積層体230を保持させる。そして、この状態で、剥離速度300mm/分、剥離距離50mm、剥離角度180°の条件で、第2基材233を剥離し、そのときの塗布材料201と第2基材233との剥離強度を測定する。なお、剥離強度は、3回測定した値の算術平均値とする。第1基材231の剥離強度も第2基材233の剥離強度と同様にして測定するものとする。第1基材231および第2基材233としては、基材221と同様のものを用いることができる。 Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, the coating material 201 and the coating material 201 are formed from above the coating material 201 so as to sandwich the thickness adjusting member 232 having a desired thickness in order to obtain the desired thickness. The two base materials 233 are stacked to form the laminated body 230. Examples of the thickness adjusting member 232 include spacers and particles. The peel strength of the second base material 233 with respect to the coating material 201 is preferably smaller than the peel strength of the first base material 231 with respect to the coating material 201. By satisfying such a relationship, the second base material 233 can be easily peeled off. The peel strength of the second base material 233 is a value measured by the following measuring method using a tensile tester (product name "single column type material tester STA-1150", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.). When measuring the peel strength, first, double-sided tape (Teraoka Seisakusho Co., Ltd. No. 751B) is attached to a glass plate measuring 30 cm in length and 2.5 cm in width. On the other hand, the laminate 230 is cut into a size of 200 mm in length × 25 mm in width, and the first base material 231 side is attached with double-sided tape on a glass plate and held by a pair of jigs of a tensile tester. Then, the laminate 230 attached to the glass plate is held by a pair of jigs of the tensile tester. When the jig holds the laminated body 230, the second base material 233 is slightly peeled off from the laminated body 230 in advance by hand to create a trigger, and one jig holds the second base material 233 and the other. Hold the glass plate and the laminate 230 on the jig of. Then, in this state, the second base material 233 is peeled off under the conditions of a peeling speed of 300 mm / min, a peeling distance of 50 mm, and a peeling angle of 180 °, and the peeling strength between the coating material 201 and the second base material 233 at that time is determined. Measure. The peel strength is the arithmetic mean value of the values measured three times. The peel strength of the first base material 231 shall be measured in the same manner as the peel strength of the second base material 233. As the first base material 231 and the second base material 233, the same ones as the base material 221 can be used.
 積層体230を形成した後、積層体230に所定の圧力を加える。これにより、塗布材料201の厚みが所望の厚みとなる。そして、テープ状に積層体230を切り出す。これにより、塗布材料201からなる充填テープ234を有する積層体230が形成される。 After forming the laminated body 230, a predetermined pressure is applied to the laminated body 230. As a result, the thickness of the coating material 201 becomes a desired thickness. Then, the laminated body 230 is cut out in the form of a tape. As a result, the laminate 230 having the filling tape 234 made of the coating material 201 is formed.
 その後、図22(C)に示されるように第2基材233を剥離する。そして、この状態で、図22(D)に示されるように充填テープ234が巻芯11の外周面11Aに接触するように積層体230を巻芯11の外周面11Aに貼り付け、または密着させる。充填テープ234は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bに接触するように、または近接するように貼り付け、または密着される。その後、第1基材231を剥離する。これにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに充填テープ234を配置することができる。その後の工程は、ロール体10、20の上記した工程と同様である。塗布材料202~205の代わりに充填テープを充填テープ234と同様の手順で巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置することができる。 After that, the second base material 233 is peeled off as shown in FIG. 22 (C). Then, in this state, as shown in FIG. 22D, the laminate 230 is attached or brought into close contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 so that the filling tape 234 comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. .. The filling tape 234 is attached or brought into close contact with or in close contact with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. Then, the first base material 231 is peeled off. As a result, the filling tape 234 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. Instead of the coating materials 202 to 205, the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 234.
 また、型を用いて、充填テープを形成するとともに転写してもよい。型を用いて、充填テープを転写することによって、固定部材17と同時に充填テープを容易に設置できる。具体的には、まず、図23(A)に示されるように型241を用意する。型241は、開口241Aを有する。型241は、型241の長手方向の側面は、型241から容易に後述する充填テープを外すことが可能なように、開放されていることが好ましい。型241は、例えば、U字状になっている。型241は、特に限定されないが、例えば、樹脂や金属等から形成することができる。型241の開口241Aの長さ、幅、深さは、充填テープの長さ、幅、厚みと同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 Alternatively, a mold may be used to form a filling tape and transfer it. By transferring the filling tape using a mold, the filling tape can be easily installed at the same time as the fixing member 17. Specifically, first, the mold 241 is prepared as shown in FIG. 23 (A). The mold 241 has an opening 241A. It is preferable that the side surface of the mold 241 in the longitudinal direction of the mold 241 is open so that the filling tape described later can be easily removed from the mold 241. The mold 241 is, for example, U-shaped. The mold 241 is not particularly limited, but can be formed from, for example, a resin, a metal, or the like. Since the length, width, and depth of the opening 241A of the mold 241 are the same as the length, width, and thickness of the filling tape, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 型241を用意した後、図23(B)に示されるように、型241に塗布材料201を流し込み、充填テープ242を形成する。そして、図23(C)に示されるように充填テープ242が巻芯11の外周面11Aに接触するように型241を押し当てる。型241を押し当てる際には、塗布材料201が水分によって粘着性を示す材料である場合には、充填テープ242の表面を水で濡らし、粘化させておくことが好ましい。充填テープ242の表面を粘化させることにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに貼り付け、または密着させることができる。 After preparing the mold 241, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the coating material 201 is poured into the mold 241 to form the filling tape 242. Then, as shown in FIG. 23C, the mold 241 is pressed against the filling tape 242 so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. When the mold 241 is pressed, if the coating material 201 is a material that exhibits adhesiveness due to moisture, it is preferable to wet the surface of the filling tape 242 with water to make it viscous. By thickening the surface of the filling tape 242, it can be attached to or adhered to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11.
 その後、充填テープ242から型241を外す。これにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに充填テープ242を配置することができる。その後の工程は、ロール体10、20の上記した工程と同様である。塗布材料202~205の代わりに充填テープを充填テープ242と同様の手順で巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置することができる。 After that, remove the mold 241 from the filling tape 242. As a result, the filling tape 242 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. Instead of the coating materials 202 to 205, the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 242.
 オフセット印刷を用いて充填テープを巻芯11の外周面11Aに転写してもよい。オフセット印刷を用いて、充填テープを形成するとともに転写することによって、時間管理が容易となり、設定した時間に位置精度良く充填テープを設置できる。具体的には、まず、図24(A)に示されるように、中間転写体251(例えば、中間転写ロール)の外周面にディスペンサやシリンジ等の塗布装置によって塗布材料201を塗布して、充填テープ252を形成する。そして、図24(B)に示されるように、中間転写体251の外周面に形成された充填テープ252を巻芯11の外周面11Aにオフセット印刷法によって転写する。これにより、巻芯11の外周面11Aに充填テープ252を配置することができる。その後の工程は、ロール体10、20の上記した工程と同様である。塗布材料202~205の代わりに充填テープを充填テープ252と同様の手順で巻芯11の外周面11Aに配置することができる。 The filling tape may be transferred to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 by using offset printing. By forming and transferring the filling tape by using offset printing, time management becomes easy, and the filling tape can be installed at a set time with high position accuracy. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the coating material 201 is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate transfer body 251 (for example, the intermediate transfer roll) by a coating device such as a dispenser or a syringe, and filled. Form tape 252. Then, as shown in FIG. 24B, the filling tape 252 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate transfer body 251 is transferred to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 by an offset printing method. As a result, the filling tape 252 can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. Subsequent steps are the same as the steps described above for the roll bodies 10 and 20. Instead of the coating materials 202 to 205, the filling tape can be arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 in the same procedure as the filling tape 252.
 本実施形態によれば、第1隙間13に第1充填部14が充填されているので、第1充填部14上の1周目のシート12の部分を離間位置P1から先端面12A1に向けてなだらかに持ち上げることができる。これにより、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和できる。 According to the present embodiment, since the first filling portion 14 is filled in the first gap 13, the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the first filling portion 14 is directed from the separation position P1 toward the tip surface 12A1. Can be lifted gently. As a result, the step caused by the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 can be alleviated.
 本実施形態によれば、第2隙間15に第2充填部16が充填されているので、第2充填部16上の1周目のシート12の部分を第1端面17Aから到達位置P2に向けて、なだらかに下げることができる。これにより、固定部材17に起因する段差を有効に緩和できる。 According to the present embodiment, since the second filling portion 16 is filled in the second gap 15, the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the second filling portion 16 is directed from the first end surface 17A toward the arrival position P2. It can be lowered gently. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be effectively alleviated.
 ロール体20においては、第3隙間21に第3充填部22が充填されているので、第3充填部22上の1周目のシート12の部分をなだらかに持ち上げることができる。これにより、固定部材17に起因する段差をより有効に緩和できる。 In the roll body 20, since the third filling portion 22 is filled in the third gap 21, the portion of the sheet 12 on the first lap on the third filling portion 22 can be gently lifted. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be more effectively relaxed.
 シートが変形等してしまうと、シートにおいて製品として使用できない部分が存在するので、有効長さを確保するために、シートの有効長さを補償している。すなわち、シートが変形によって製品とならない部分が長くなると、シートロスが増大する。これに対し、本実施形態によれば、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差や固定部材17、51に起因する段差を緩和できるので、シート12の変形を抑制することができる。これにより、シートロスを低減できる。 If the sheet is deformed, there are some parts of the sheet that cannot be used as a product, so the effective length of the sheet is compensated to ensure the effective length. That is, when the portion of the sheet that does not become a product due to deformation becomes long, the sheet loss increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing members 17 and 51 can be alleviated, so that the deformation of the sheet 12 can be suppressed. As a result, seat loss can be reduced.
[第2実施形態]
 以下、本発明の第2実施形態に係るロール体について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図25は、本実施形態に係るロール体の斜視図であり、図26は、図25のロール体の一部を拡大した図であり、図27は、図25のロール体の各構成要素の寸法を説明するための図であり、図28は、図25に示される第2介在部の最大厚みおよび長さを測定するときの図であり、図29は、断面積S3を示す図である。図30~図37は、本実施形態に係る他のロール体の一部を拡大した図であり、図38および図39は、本実施形態に係るロール体の製造工程を模式的に示した図である。
[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the roll body according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 25 is a perspective view of the roll body according to the present embodiment, FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a part of the roll body of FIG. 25, and FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of each component of the roll body of FIG. 25. It is a figure for demonstrating the dimension, FIG. 28 is a figure at the time of measuring the maximum thickness and length of the 2nd interposition part shown in FIG. 25, and FIG. 29 is a figure which shows the cross-sectional area S3. .. 30 to 37 are enlarged views of a part of another roll body according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are views schematically showing a manufacturing process of the roll body according to the present embodiment. Is.
<<<ロール体>>>
 図25に示されるロール体70は、巻芯11と、巻芯11の外周面11Aに巻回された長尺状のシート12とを備えている。ロール体70は、図25に示されるように、1周目以降のシート12間に設けられた第1介在部71および第2介在部72と、シート12の一部を巻芯11に固定するための固定部材17とをさらに備えている。シート12は、巻芯11に複数周、例えば2周以上巻回されている。ロール体70は、第1隙間13および第2隙間15が空洞になっているので、第1隙間13には第1充填部14が充填されておらず、また第2隙間15には第2充填部16が充填されていない。
<<< Roll body >>
The roll body 70 shown in FIG. 25 includes a winding core 11 and a long sheet 12 wound around the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11. As shown in FIG. 25, the roll body 70 fixes the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 provided between the sheets 12 after the first lap and a part of the sheet 12 to the winding core 11. A fixing member 17 for the purpose is further provided. The sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 in a plurality of turns, for example, two or more turns. In the roll body 70, since the first gap 13 and the second gap 15 are hollow, the first gap 13 is not filled with the first filling portion 14, and the second gap 15 is filled with the second filling. Part 16 is not filled.
<<第1介在部>>
 第1介在部71は、1周目以降のシート12間に設けられている。具体的には、第1介在部71は、第1介在部71よりも下側(巻芯11側)に位置し、かつ第1介在部71に接触している下側のシート12と、第1介在部71よりも上側に位置し、かつ第1介在部71に接触している上側のシート12よって挟まれている。したがって、第1介在部71上には、必ずシート12が存在する。また、第1介在部71は、1周目以降のシート12間に設けられているが、具体的には、第1介在部71は、1周目以降のシート12間における、第1隙間13に対応する第1領域12Dに少なくとも設けられている。また第1介在部71は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1に延びている。
<< 1st intervention >>
The first intervening portion 71 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the first intervening portion 71 is located on the lower side (winding core 11 side) of the first intervening portion 71, and is in contact with the first intervening portion 71. It is sandwiched by the upper sheet 12 located above the 1 intervening portion 71 and in contact with the 1st intervening portion 71. Therefore, the sheet 12 is always present on the first intervening portion 71. Further, the first intervening portion 71 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the first intervening portion 71 is the first gap 13 between the seats 12 after the first lap. It is provided at least in the first region 12D corresponding to. Further, the first intervening portion 71 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 第1介在部71における下側のシート12から上側のシート12が離間する離間位置P3(図26参照)側の端部71Aのエッジ厚みT4(図27参照)は、この厚みが厚いとこの厚みに起因して新たな段差が形成されるおそれがあるので、薄い方が好ましい。具体的には、例えば、エッジ厚みT4は、50μm以下であることが好ましい。エッジ厚みT4は、変形緩和長さを短くできる点から、10μm以下、更には2μm以下であることがより好ましい。 The edge thickness T4 (see FIG. 27) of the end portion 71A on the side of the separation position P3 (see FIG. 26) at which the upper sheet 12 is separated from the lower sheet 12 in the first intervening portion 71 is this thickness when this thickness is thick. Since there is a possibility that a new step may be formed due to the above, a thinner step is preferable. Specifically, for example, the edge thickness T4 is preferably 50 μm or less. The edge thickness T4 is more preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 2 μm or less, from the viewpoint that the deformation relaxation length can be shortened.
 また、シート12が3μm以上50μm未満の厚みを有する薄膜フィルムの場合は、厚みが厚い場合よりも巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差の影響を受けやすいので、このような薄膜フィルムを用いる場合には、エッジ厚みT4は、10μm以下であることが好ましく、また上記変形緩和長さを最短にする点から、5μm以下、更には1μm以下がより好ましい。 Further, when the sheet 12 is a thin film having a thickness of 3 μm or more and less than 50 μm, it is more susceptible to the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A than when the thickness is thick. Therefore, when such a thin film is used, The edge thickness T4 is preferably 10 μm or less, and more preferably 5 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or less, from the viewpoint of minimizing the deformation relaxation length.
 エッジ厚みT4の測定は、走査型光干渉式表面形状測定機(製品名「New View7300」、Zygo社製)を用いて、エッジ厚みT1と同様の方法によって測定することができる。また、以下のようにして、測定することもできる。まず、端部71Aと、端部71Aに接する下側のシート12と上側のシート12とを含む部分を切り出し、刃物で切断または研磨によりこの部分の断面を得て、実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)による観察で行うものとする。 The edge thickness T4 can be measured by the same method as the edge thickness T1 using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). It can also be measured as follows. First, a portion including the end portion 71A, the lower sheet 12 in contact with the end portion 71A, and the upper sheet 12 is cut out, and a cross section of this portion is obtained by cutting or polishing with a cutting tool, and a stereomicroscope (for example, a product name) is obtained. Observation with "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) shall be performed.
 第1介在部71は、図26および図27に示されるように、第1隙間13に対応している第1領域12Dに介在している第1部分71Bと、第1部分71Bより上側のシート12が下側のシート12に到達する到達位置P4(図26参照)側に位置する第2部分71Cとを有している。第1介在部71が、第1部分71Bのみならず、第2部分71Cを有していることにより、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差の部分に応力が集中することを抑制でき、上側のシート12以降のシート12の変形が緩やかにすることができるので、この段差を緩和することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first intervening portion 71 includes a first portion 71B interposed in the first region 12D corresponding to the first gap 13 and a sheet above the first portion 71B. 12 has a second portion 71C located on the arrival position P4 (see FIG. 26) side to reach the lower sheet 12. Since the first intervening portion 71 has not only the first portion 71B but also the second portion 71C, it is possible to suppress the concentration of stress on the stepped portion caused by the winding start end portion 12A, and the upper side can be suppressed. Since the deformation of the sheet 12 after the sheet 12 can be made gentle, this step can be alleviated.
 第2部分71Cの厚みT5(図27参照)は2μm以上300μm以下であることが好ましい。第2部分71Cの厚みT5がこの範囲であれば、シート12の巻取りへの悪影響を避けつつ上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができる。なお、第2部分71Cの厚みT3が300μmを超える場合も、上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができるが、シート12の巻取りに悪影響が出ることがある。 The thickness T5 (see FIG. 27) of the second portion 71C is preferably 2 μm or more and 300 μm or less. When the thickness T5 of the second portion 71C is within this range, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened while avoiding an adverse effect on the winding of the sheet 12. When the thickness T3 of the second portion 71C exceeds 300 μm, the deformation relaxation length can be shortened, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected.
 第2部分71Cの厚みT5は、第2部分71Cの最大厚みとする。第2部分71Cの厚みT5は、走査型光干渉式表面形状測定機(製品名「New View7300」、Zygo社製)を用いて、エッジ厚みT1と同様の方法によって測定することができる。または、以下のようにして、測定することができる。まず、下側のシート12、第2部分71C、および上側のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を採取し、固定する。そして、固定されたこの部分の断面を研磨し、第2部分71Cの厚みT5を実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定する。 The thickness T5 of the second portion 71C is the maximum thickness of the second portion 71C. The thickness T5 of the second portion 71C can be measured by the same method as the edge thickness T1 using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name “New View7300”, manufactured by Zygo). Alternatively, it can be measured as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the lower sheet 12, the second portion 71C, and the upper sheet 12 is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the thickness T5 of the second portion 71C is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name "digital microscope VHX-7000", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
 第1介在部の厚みが急激に変化すると、この厚みの変化部分に起因して変形が残存してしまい、巻き始め端部に起因する段差が十分に緩和されないおそれがある。このため、シートの厚みに対して十分な第1介在部の長さを確保することが好ましい。ただし、第1介在部の長さを長くすることで、巻取りなどの他の影響が出る場合には、敢えて第1介在部の長さを最適状態よりも短くすることで、最適な第1介在部の長さを有する状態よりも上記変形緩和長さは長くなるが、第1介在部を設けないよりは上記変形緩和長さを短くすることができる。したがって、巻芯11の外周面11Aから巻き始め端部12Aの上面12A2までの距離D2(図27参照)に対する第1介在部71における先端面12A1に対応する位置から離間位置P3側の端までの長さL3の比(長さL3/距離D2)が1以上であることが好ましい。この比は、上記変形緩和長さを短くする点から、5以上、更には50以上であることが好ましい。 If the thickness of the first intervening portion changes abruptly, the deformation will remain due to this change in thickness, and there is a risk that the step caused by the winding start end will not be sufficiently alleviated. Therefore, it is preferable to secure a sufficient length of the first intervening portion with respect to the thickness of the sheet. However, if the length of the first intervening portion is increased to have other effects such as winding, the length of the first intervening portion is intentionally made shorter than the optimum state to obtain the optimum first. The deformation relaxation length is longer than that of the state having the length of the intervening portion, but the deformation relaxation length can be shortened as compared with the case where the first intervening portion is not provided. Therefore, from the position corresponding to the tip surface 12A1 of the first intervening portion 71 with respect to the distance D2 (see FIG. 27) from the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 to the upper surface 12A2 of the winding start end portion 12A to the end on the separation position P3 side. The ratio of the length L3 (length L3 / distance D2) is preferably 1 or more. This ratio is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 50 or more, from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length.
 長さL3は、以下のようにして測定することができる。まず、下側のシート12および上側のシート12を残して、それ以外のシート12を巻き出す。ここで、シート12が透明または半透明であれば、第1介在部71が存在する領域を視認できる。このため、巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1から第1介在部71における離間位置P3側の端までの距離を定規や巻尺を用いて、シート12を透過観察して、シート12の幅方向に10点測定し、その平均値を求めて、長さL3を求める。一方、シート12を透過観察できない場合には、まず、下側のシート12、第1介在部71、および上側のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を採取する。そして、この部分を固定した上で、研磨して断面を出し、第1介在部における先端面12A1に対応する位置から離間位置側の端までの距離を実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定する。 The length L3 can be measured as follows. First, the other sheets 12 are unwound, leaving the lower sheet 12 and the upper sheet 12. Here, if the sheet 12 is transparent or translucent, the region where the first intervening portion 71 exists can be visually recognized. Therefore, the distance from the tip surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A to the end of the first intervening portion 71 on the separation position P3 side is observed through the sheet 12 using a ruler or a tape measure, and in the width direction of the sheet 12. Measure 10 points, find the average value, and find the length L3. On the other hand, when the sheet 12 cannot be transparently observed, first, this portion is collected so that the portion including the lower sheet 12, the first intervening portion 71, and the upper sheet 12 is not crushed. Then, after fixing this portion, the cross section is obtained by polishing, and the distance from the position corresponding to the tip surface 12A1 in the first interposition portion to the end on the separation position side is determined by a stereomicroscope (for example, the product name "digital microscope"). VHX-7000 ", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
 長さL3は、長いほど良いが、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下である場合、長さL3は、110μm以上であることが好ましく、より上記変形緩和長さを短くするためには、1mm以上、更には10mm以上であることが好ましい。 The longer the length L3, the better. For example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, the length L3 is preferably 110 μm or more, and in order to further shorten the deformation relaxation length. It is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more.
 第1介在部71の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性は、第1充填部14の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性と同様であり、また第1介在部71を構成する材料は、第1充填部14の材料と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 The physical properties such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first interposing portion 71 are the same as the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion 14, and the material constituting the first interposing portion 71 is the first. Since it is the same as the material of 1 filling portion 14, the description thereof will be omitted here.
<<第2介在部>>
 第2介在部72は、1周目以降のシート12間に設けられている。したがって、第2介在部72上には、必ずシート12が存在する。また、第2介在部72は、1周目以降のシート12間に設けられているが、具体的には、第2介在部72は、1周目以降のシート12間における、少なくとも第2隙間15に対応する第2領域12Eに設けられている。また第2介在部72は、巻芯11の幅方向DR1に延びている。
<< Second intervention >>
The second intervening portion 72 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Therefore, the sheet 12 is always present on the second intervening portion 72. Further, the second intervening portion 72 is provided between the seats 12 after the first lap. Specifically, the second interposing portion 72 is at least the second gap between the seats 12 after the first lap. It is provided in the second region 12E corresponding to 15. Further, the second intervening portion 72 extends in the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 第2介在部72は、第1介在部71と同じシート12間(例えば、2周目のシート12と3周目のシート12との間)に設けられているが、第2介在部72は、第1介在部71とは異なるシート12間に設けられていてもよい。 The second intervening portion 72 is provided between the same seats 12 as the first intervening portion 71 (for example, between the seat 12 on the second lap and the seat 12 on the third lap), but the second interposing portion 72 is provided. , May be provided between the sheets 12 different from the first intervening portion 71.
 第2介在部72の最大厚みT6(図27、図28参照)は、0.01mm以上であることが好ましい。第2介在部72の最大厚みT6が0.01mm以上であれば、固定部材17に起因する段差を有効に緩和することができる。最大厚みT6は、上記段差をより有効に緩和する観点から、0.02mm以上、0.03mm以上、または0.04mm以上であることがより好ましい。一方で、最大厚みT6が厚すぎると、巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和することができるが、シート12の巻取りに悪影響が出ることがある。このため、最大厚みT6の上限は、0.2mm以下または0.1mm以下であることが好ましい。 The maximum thickness T6 (see FIGS. 27 and 28) of the second intervening portion 72 is preferably 0.01 mm or more. When the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is 0.01 mm or more, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be effectively alleviated. The maximum thickness T6 is more preferably 0.02 mm or more, 0.03 mm or more, or 0.04 mm or more from the viewpoint of more effectively relaxing the step. On the other hand, if the maximum thickness T6 is too thick, the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A can be alleviated, but the winding of the sheet 12 may be adversely affected. Therefore, the upper limit of the maximum thickness T6 is preferably 0.2 mm or less or 0.1 mm or less.
 最大厚みT6は、レーザー変位計や実体顕微鏡を用いて、厚みT2と同様の方法によって測定することができる。最大厚みT6をレーザー変位計で測定する場合には、まず、厚みT2等の測定と同様に、ロール体70を治具に取り付けるとともに3台のレーザー変位計を所定の位置に配置した後、ロール体70から第2介在部72が露出するまでシート12を繰り出す。その後、第2介在部72が露出した状態で、巻芯11を回転速度30mm/sで回転させながらレーザー変位計によってサンプリング周期200μsで連続的に変位量を測定して、横軸を位置(mm)とし、縦軸を変位量(mm)とするグラフを得る。この測定は、第2介在部72の固定部材17側の第1先端72Aとは反対側の第2先端72Bから第1先端72Aに向けて行い、この測定においては、基準高さ(変位量0mmライン)を巻芯11の高さとし、基準高さと第2介在部72の高さの差を第2介在部72の厚みとする。そして、変位量0mmラインと変位量が最も高くなる位置での変位量の差を求めることによって、第2介在部72の最大厚みT6を求める。得られたグラフは、実質的にシートの長手方向および巻芯の径方向を含む平面を表すものである。また、このグラフは、横軸の1目盛りを5mmとし、縦軸の1目盛りを0.02mmとする。図27においては、第1先端72Aは、固定部材17の直上に存在している。 The maximum thickness T6 can be measured by the same method as the thickness T2 using a laser displacement meter or a stereomicroscope. When measuring the maximum thickness T6 with a laser displacement meter, first, as in the measurement of the thickness T2 and the like, the roll body 70 is attached to a jig, three laser displacement meters are arranged at predetermined positions, and then the roll is used. The sheet 12 is extended from the body 70 until the second interposition portion 72 is exposed. After that, with the second intervening portion 72 exposed, the displacement amount was continuously measured with a laser displacement meter at a sampling period of 200 μs while rotating the winding core 11 at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s, and the horizontal axis was positioned (mm). ), And the vertical axis is the displacement amount (mm). This measurement is performed from the second tip 72B on the side opposite to the first tip 72A on the fixing member 17 side of the second interposition 72 toward the first tip 72A, and in this measurement, the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm) is performed. The line) is defined as the height of the winding core 11, and the difference between the reference height and the height of the second interposing portion 72 is defined as the thickness of the second interposing portion 72. Then, the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is obtained by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount at the position where the displacement amount is the highest. The graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm. In FIG. 27, the first tip 72A exists directly above the fixing member 17.
 実体顕微鏡による最大厚みT6の測定は、以下のようにして行うことができる。まず、下側のシート12、第2介在部72、および上側のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を採取し、固定する。そして、固定されたこの部分の断面を研磨し、第2介在部72の最大厚みT6を実体顕微鏡(例えば、製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定する。 The maximum thickness T6 can be measured with a stereomicroscope as follows. First, this portion is collected and fixed so that the portion including the lower sheet 12, the second intervening portion 72, and the upper sheet 12 is not crushed. Then, the cross section of this fixed portion is polished, and the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is measured with a stereomicroscope (for example, product name “Digital Microscope VHX-7000”, manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION).
 第2介在部72の厚みをシート12の長手方向DR2に沿って測定したとき、第2介在部72の最大厚みT6(図27、図28参照)に対する、長手方向DR2において第2介在部72における第2先端72Bから第2介在部72の最大厚みT6となる位置までの長さL4(図27参照)の比(長さL4/最大厚みT6)が、12以上であることが好ましい。この比が12以上であれば、第2介在部72の第2先端72B近傍に変形が残存することを抑制でき、また第2介在部の厚みが厚すぎると、巻取り時に真円から外れること等によって巻取り性が劣ることもあるが、この比が12以上であれば、第2介在部72が厚すぎることもないので、巻取り性が劣ることを抑制できる。また、第2介在部の厚みが厚すぎると、第2介在部に起因した新たな変形が生じるおそれもあるが、この比が12以上であれば、このような新たな変形が生じることを抑制できる。この比の下限は、上記変形緩和長さを短くする点から、25以上、50以上、75以上、100以上、125以上、150以上、175以上、または200以上であることが好ましい。上記固定部材に起因する段差を有効に緩和する観点からは、第2介在部72の最大厚みT6は厚い方がよいので、この比の上限は、例えば、2000以下、1000以下、500以下、または375以下であることが好ましい。 When the thickness of the second intervening portion 72 is measured along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12, the second intervening portion 72 in the longitudinal direction DR2 with respect to the maximum thickness T6 (see FIGS. 27 and 28) of the second interposing portion 72. The ratio (length L4 / maximum thickness T6) of the length L4 (see FIG. 27) from the second tip 72B to the position where the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 is obtained is preferably 12 or more. If this ratio is 12 or more, it is possible to suppress the deformation remaining in the vicinity of the second tip 72B of the second interposition portion 72, and if the thickness of the second interposition portion is too thick, it deviates from the perfect circle at the time of winding. The take-up property may be inferior due to such factors, but if this ratio is 12 or more, the second intervening portion 72 is not too thick, so that the inferior take-up property can be suppressed. Further, if the thickness of the second intervening portion is too thick, new deformation due to the second intervening portion may occur, but if this ratio is 12 or more, the occurrence of such new deformation is suppressed. it can. The lower limit of this ratio is preferably 25 or more, 50 or more, 75 or more, 100 or more, 125 or more, 150 or more, 175 or more, or 200 or more from the viewpoint of shortening the deformation relaxation length. From the viewpoint of effectively alleviating the step caused by the fixing member, the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72 should be thick, so that the upper limit of this ratio is, for example, 2000 or less, 1000 or less, 500 or less, or It is preferably 375 or less.
 長さL4は、上記段差を緩和する観点からは、長いほど良く、例えば、シート12の厚みが50μm以上200μm以下である場合、長さL4は、5.0mm以上であることが好ましく、より上記変形緩和長さを短くするためには、7.0mm以上、更には9.0mm以上であることがより好ましい。ただし、長さL4が長すぎると、加工上、第2介在部の第2先端72Bから最大厚みT6となる位置までの領域R3(図28参照)において、表面が凸状の第2介在部が形成されにくくなり、また第2介在部に波状の厚みむらが発生するおそれがあるので、長さL4の上限は、領域R3における第2介在部72の表面72Cが凸状となりやすく、また波状の厚みむらを抑制する観点から、20mm以下であることが好ましい。 The length L4 is better from the viewpoint of alleviating the step. For example, when the thickness of the sheet 12 is 50 μm or more and 200 μm or less, the length L4 is preferably 5.0 mm or more, and more preferably. In order to shorten the deformation relaxation length, it is more preferably 7.0 mm or more, more preferably 9.0 mm or more. However, if the length L4 is too long, the second interposition portion having a convex surface is formed in the region R3 (see FIG. 28) from the second tip 72B of the second interposition portion to the position where the maximum thickness is T6 due to processing. Since it becomes difficult to form and there is a possibility that wavy thickness unevenness may occur in the second interposition portion, the upper limit of the length L4 is such that the surface 72C of the second interposition portion 72 in the region R3 tends to be convex and wavy. From the viewpoint of suppressing thickness unevenness, it is preferably 20 mm or less.
 長さL4は、最大厚みT6と同様に位置変位曲線のグラフから求めることができる。具体的には、まず、第2介在部72の第2先端72Bが存在すると、変位量が上昇するので、位置変位曲線のグラフから変位量が上昇し始める箇所における変位量0mmラインと位置変位曲線の交点である第1位置を見付ける。次いで、上記変位量が最も高くなる位置を通り、変位量0mmラインに垂直な仮想線を引く。そして、この仮想線と変位量0mmラインの交点を第2位置として、第1位置と第2位置との距離を求めることにより長さL4を求めることができる。 The length L4 can be obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve in the same manner as the maximum thickness T6. Specifically, first, when the second tip 72B of the second intervening portion 72 is present, the displacement amount increases. Therefore, from the graph of the position displacement curve, the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the position where the displacement amount starts to increase. Find the first position, which is the intersection of. Next, a virtual line perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line is drawn through the position where the displacement amount is the highest. Then, the length L4 can be obtained by obtaining the distance between the first position and the second position with the intersection of the virtual line and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the second position.
 上記長さL4/最大厚みT6は、第2介在部72の形状を大まかに表すことができるが、より適正に表面72Cが凸状の形状を表すには、さらに第2介在部72の断面積を用いることが好ましい。具体的には、第2介在部72の最大厚みT6に対するシート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3を含む平面(図28で表される平面)における第2先端72Bから最大厚みT6となる位置まで第2介在部72の断面積S3(図28参照)の比(断面積S3/最大厚みT6)が、2.5以上であることが好ましい。この比が2.5以上であれば、最大厚みT6に対して第2介在部72の断面積S3が大きいので、第2介在部72でシート12を有効に持ち上げることができ、これにより上記段差をより緩和することができる。断面積S3/最大厚みT6の下限は、上記段差をさらに緩和する観点から、3.0以上、3.5以上、4.0以上、5.0以上、5.5以上、6.0以上、6.5以上、または7.0以上であることが好ましい。また、断面積S3/最大厚みT6の上限は、特に限定されないが、例えば、20.0以下、17.5以下、15.0以下、または12.5以下、10.0以下であってもよい。断面積S3は、第2介在部72の領域R3の断面積(図29においては、第2介在部72のうち実線で囲まれる領域の断面積)であり、位置変位曲線のグラフの第1位置から第2位置までの領域における各測定点での厚みと測定点間毎の幅との積を求め、それを合計することによって求めることができる。 The length L4 / maximum thickness T6 can roughly represent the shape of the second interposition portion 72, but in order to more appropriately represent the convex shape of the surface 72C, the cross-sectional area of the second interposition portion 72 is further expressed. It is preferable to use. Specifically, the maximum thickness T6 from the second tip 72B in the plane (the plane represented by FIG. 28) including the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11 with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion 72. It is preferable that the ratio (cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6) of the cross-sectional area S3 (see FIG. 28) of the second interposition portion 72 up to the position is 2.5 or more. When this ratio is 2.5 or more, the cross-sectional area S3 of the second intervening portion 72 is larger than the maximum thickness T6, so that the sheet 12 can be effectively lifted by the second interposing portion 72, thereby causing the step. Can be more relaxed. The lower limit of the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 is 3.0 or more, 3.5 or more, 4.0 or more, 5.0 or more, 5.5 or more, 6.0 or more, from the viewpoint of further alleviating the step. It is preferably 6.5 or more, or 7.0 or more. The upper limit of the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 20.0 or less, 17.5 or less, 15.0 or less, or 12.5 or less, 10.0 or less. .. The cross-sectional area S3 is the cross-sectional area of the region R3 of the second intervening portion 72 (in FIG. 29, the cross-sectional area of the region surrounded by the solid line in the second interposing portion 72), and is the first position in the graph of the position displacement curve. It can be obtained by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the area from to the second position and totaling them.
 第2介在部72の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性は、第2充填部16の構成材料における引張強さ等の物性と同様であり、また第2介在部72を構成する材料は、第2充填部16の材料と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 The physical properties such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the second interposing portion 72 are the same as the physical characteristics such as the tensile strength of the constituent material of the second filling portion 16, and the material constituting the second interposing portion 72 is the first. Since it is the same as the material of the 2 filling portion 16, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 後述するように第1介在部71や第2介在部72よりも径方向DR3の外側のシート12(上側のシート12)においては、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差や固定部材17に起因する段差を抑制できるが、第1介在部71や第2介在部72よりも径方向DR3の内側(巻芯11側)のシート12(下側のシート12)においては、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差や固定部材17に起因する段差を抑制できない。このため、第1介在部71や第2介在部72は可能な限り径方向DR3の内側(例えば、1周目のシート12と2周目のシート12の間や2周目のシート12と3周目のシート12の間)に設けられることが好ましい。 As will be described later, in the sheet 12 (upper sheet 12) outside the DR3 in the radial direction from the first intervening portion 71 and the second intervening portion 72, the step and the fixing member 17 due to the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 Although it is possible to suppress the step caused by the above, the sheet 12 is wound on the sheet 12 (lower sheet 12) inside (the winding core 11 side) in the radial direction DR3 from the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72. It is not possible to suppress the step caused by the start end portion 12A and the step caused by the fixing member 17. Therefore, the first intervening portion 71 and the second intervening portion 72 are inside the radial DR3 as much as possible (for example, between the seat 12 on the first lap and the seat 12 on the second lap, and the sheets 12 and 3 on the second lap. It is preferable to be provided between the sheets 12 on the circumference.
<<他のロール体>>
 ロール体70は、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1と固定部材17の第2端面17Bがシート12の長手方向DR2および巻芯11の径方向DR3に沿った断面においてほぼ揃っているが、図30に示されるロール体80のように、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aの先端面12A1は、固定部材17の第2端面17Bよりも突き出ていてもよい。この場合、シート12間における第2領域12Eに第2介在部72が介在していることのみならず、シート12間における第2端面17B側の第3隙間21に対応する第3領域12Fにも第3介在部81が介在してもよい。
<< Other rolls >>
In the roll body 70, the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17 are substantially aligned in the cross section along the longitudinal direction DR2 of the sheet 12 and the radial direction DR3 of the winding core 11. However, as in the roll body 80 shown in FIG. 30, the tip end surface 12A1 of the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 may protrude from the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. In this case, not only the second intervening portion 72 is interposed in the second region 12E between the sheets 12, but also in the third region 12F corresponding to the third gap 21 on the second end surface 17B side between the sheets 12. A third intervening portion 81 may intervene.
<第3介在部>
 第3介在部81は、第3隙間21に対応する第3領域12Fに介在している以外は、第2介在部72と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。
<Third intervening part>
The third intervening portion 81 is the same as the second intervening portion 72 except that it is interposed in the third region 12F corresponding to the third gap 21, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.
 ロール体70は、シート12間における第2領域12Eに第2介在部72が設けられているが、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を緩和する観点からは、シート12間における第1領域12Dに第1介在部71が設けられていればよいので、図31に示されるロール体90のようにシート12間における第2領域12Eに第2介在部72が設けられていなくともよい。図31に示されるロール体90は、第2領域12Eにおいてはシート12同士が密着している。 The roll body 70 is provided with the second intervening portion 72 in the second region 12E between the sheets 12, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheets 12, the roll body 70 has a second intervening portion between the sheets 12. Since it is sufficient that the first intervening portion 71 is provided in the one region 12D, the second intervening portion 72 may not be provided in the second intervening portion 12E between the sheets 12 as in the roll body 90 shown in FIG. .. In the roll body 90 shown in FIG. 31, the sheets 12 are in close contact with each other in the second region 12E.
 ロール体70は、シート12間における第1領域12Dに第1介在部71が設けられているが、固定部材17に起因する段差を緩和する観点からは、シート12間における第2領域12Eに第2介在部72が設けられていればよいので、図32に示されるロール体100のようにシート12間における第1領域12Dに第1介在部71が設けられていなくともよい。図32に示されるロール体100は、第1領域12Dにおいてはシート12同士が密着している。 The roll body 70 is provided with the first intervening portion 71 in the first region 12D between the sheets 12, but from the viewpoint of alleviating the step caused by the fixing member 17, the roll body 70 has a second region 12E between the sheets 12. Since it is sufficient that the two intervening portions 72 are provided, the first intervening portion 71 may not be provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12 as in the roll body 100 shown in FIG. 32. In the roll body 100 shown in FIG. 32, the sheets 12 are in close contact with each other in the first region 12D.
 ロール体70は、第1介在部71を備えているが、図33に示されるロール体110のように第1介在部71の代わりに第1充填部14を設けてもよい。すなわち、第1隙間13には第1充填部14が充填され、かつシート12間における第2領域12Eには第2介在部72が設けられていてもよい。 Although the roll body 70 includes the first intervening portion 71, the first filling portion 14 may be provided instead of the first intervening portion 71 as in the roll body 110 shown in FIG. 33. That is, the first gap 13 may be filled with the first filling portion 14, and the second intervening portion 72 may be provided in the second region 12E between the sheets 12.
 ロール体110の第2介在部72は、2周目のシート12と3周目のシート12の間に設けられているが、図34に示されるロール体120のように1周目のシート12と2周目のシート12の間に第2介在部72が設けられていてもよい。 The second intervening portion 72 of the roll body 110 is provided between the seat 12 on the second lap and the sheet 12 on the third lap, but the seat 12 on the first lap is like the roll body 120 shown in FIG. A second intervening portion 72 may be provided between the seat 12 and the seat 12 on the second lap.
 ロール体70は、第2介在部72を備えているが、図35に示されるロール体130のように第2介在部72の代わりに第2充填部16を設けてもよい。すなわち、シート12間における第1領域12Dには第1介在部71が設けられ、かつ第2隙間15には第2充填部16が充填されていてもよい。 Although the roll body 70 includes the second intervening portion 72, the second filling portion 16 may be provided instead of the second intervening portion 72 as in the roll body 130 shown in FIG. 35. That is, the first intervening portion 71 may be provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12, and the second filling portion 16 may be filled in the second gap 15.
 ロール体70は、シート12を巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定する固定部材17を備えているが、図36に示されるロール体140のように固定部材17を備えていなくともよい。 The roll body 70 includes a fixing member 17 for fixing the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, but the roll body 70 does not have to be provided with the fixing member 17 as in the roll body 140 shown in FIG.
 ロール体70は、シート12の厚みは均一となっているが、図37に示されるロール体150のようにシート12の長手方向に沿って延びる両端部12Gに、巻芯11の径方向DR3の外側に突出した凸部12Hをそれぞれ形成していてもよい。充填材料(例えば、塗布材料)、第1介在部71、第2介在部72、または第3介在部81の粘度が低い場合やシートの厚みが均一である場合には、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)がシート間からはみ出し、意図しない箇所に充填材料等が存在してしまうおそれがある。これに対し、シート12の上記両端部12Gにそれぞれ凸部12Hを形成することにより、充填材料の配置後、例えば、塗布材料の塗布後に両端部12Gにおける充填材料(例えば、塗布材料等)のはみ出しを抑制できる。なお、シート12の両端部12Gは、切り落とされ、製品としては使用しない部分であるので、シートの両端部12Gにこのような凸部12Hを有しても製品には何ら問題がない。凸部12Hは、ナール加工やコーティングによって形成してもよく、またテープ(例えば、サイドテープ)を貼り付けて形成してもよい。コーティングの場合、第1充填部14の材料と同様の材料を用いることができる。 Although the thickness of the sheet 12 of the roll body 70 is uniform, the radial DR3 of the winding core 11 is formed on both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12 as in the roll body 150 shown in FIG. 37. The convex portions 12H protruding outward may be formed respectively. When the viscosity of the filling material (for example, coating material), the first interposing portion 71, the second interposing portion 72, or the third interposing portion 81 is low, or when the thickness of the sheet is uniform, the filling material (for example, coating) The material, etc.) may protrude from the sheets, and the filling material, etc. may exist in an unintended place. On the other hand, by forming the convex portions 12H on each of the both end portions 12G of the sheet 12, the filling material (for example, the coating material, etc.) protrudes from the both end portions 12G after the filling material is arranged, for example, after the coating material is applied. Can be suppressed. Since both ends 12G of the sheet 12 are cut off and are not used as a product, there is no problem in the product even if both ends 12G of the sheet have such convex portions 12H. The convex portion 12H may be formed by knurling or coating, or may be formed by attaching a tape (for example, a side tape). In the case of coating, the same material as the material of the first filling portion 14 can be used.
 図37に示されるロール体150においては、シート12の両端部12Gの全ての部分に凸部12Hが設けられているが、凸部12Hは部分的に設けられていてもよい。例えば、凸部12Hは、シート12の長手方向に沿って延びる両端部12Gにおける第1介在部71を挟む位置、シート12の長手方向に沿って延びる両端部12Gにおける第2介在部72を挟む位置、および/またはシート12の長手方向に沿って延びる両端部12Gにおける第3介在部81を挟む位置に部分的に設けられていてもよい。凸部12Hが第1介在部71を挟む位置に存在している場合には、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料)や第1介在部71のはみ出しを抑制することができ、凸部12Hが第2介在部72を挟む位置に存在している場合には、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料)や第2介在部72のはみ出しを抑制することができ、凸部12Hが第3介在部81を挟む位置に存在している場合には、充填材料(例えば、塗布材料)や第3介在部81のはみ出しを抑制することができる。 In the roll body 150 shown in FIG. 37, convex portions 12H are provided at all portions of both end portions 12G of the sheet 12, but the convex portions 12H may be partially provided. For example, the convex portion 12H is a position that sandwiches the first intervening portion 71 in both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12, and a position that sandwiches the second interposing portion 72 in both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12. , And / or may be partially provided at positions sandwiching the third intervening portion 81 at both end portions 12G extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet 12. When the convex portion 12H is present at a position sandwiching the first intervening portion 71, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) or the first intervening portion 71, and the convex portion 12H is the second. When it exists at a position where the intervening portion 72 is sandwiched, the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) or the second interposing portion 72 can be suppressed, and the convex portion 12H is at a position where the third interposing portion 81 is sandwiched. When present in, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the filling material (for example, the coating material) and the third intervening portion 81.
 図31~図36においては、距離D2、長さL3、長さL4、最大厚みT6、断面積S3を示していないが、第1介在部71が存在する場合には、距離D2、長さL3、長さL3/距離D2は、ロール体70の場合と同様であり、また第2介在部72が存在する場合には、長さL4、長さL4/最大厚みT6、断面積S3/最大厚みT6は、ロール体70の場合と同様である。 Although the distance D2, the length L3, the length L4, the maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 are not shown in FIGS. 31 to 36, when the first intervening portion 71 is present, the distance D2 and the length L3 are shown. The length L3 / distance D2 is the same as in the case of the roll body 70, and when the second intervening portion 72 is present, the length L4, the length L4 / maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness. T6 is the same as in the case of the roll body 70.
 また、図33、図34においては、固定部材17の表面は、全て巻き始め端部12Aに密着しているが、図8に示されるロール体10と同様に、巻き始め端部12Aと固定部材17の間に第1充填部14が入り込んでいてもよい。 Further, in FIGS. 33 and 34, the surfaces of the fixing member 17 are all in close contact with the winding start end portion 12A, but similarly to the roll body 10 shown in FIG. 8, the winding start end portion 12A and the fixing member The first filling portion 14 may be inserted between the 17.
<<ロール体の製造方法>>
 ロール体70は、例えば、以下の方法によって製造することができる。まず、図38(A)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定部材17を配置する。
<< Manufacturing method of roll body >>
The roll body 70 can be manufactured, for example, by the following method. First, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the fixing member 17 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11.
 固定部材17を配置した後、図38(B)に示されるように、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aにおける先端面12A1が固定部材17の第2端面17Bとほぼ揃うように、固定部材17を介してシート12の巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定する。 After arranging the fixing member 17, as shown in FIG. 38B, the fixing member 17 is arranged so that the tip end surface 12A1 at the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is substantially aligned with the second end surface 17B of the fixing member 17. The winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 via.
 シート12の巻き始め端部12Aを巻芯11の外周面11Aに固定した後、図38(C)に示されるように、巻芯11の外周面11Aに沿ってシート12を少なくとも1周巻回する。これにより、第1隙間13および第2隙間15を有する中間ロール体73が得られる。 After fixing the winding start end 12A of the sheet 12 to the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11, the sheet 12 is wound at least once along the outer peripheral surface 11A of the winding core 11 as shown in FIG. 38 (C). To do. As a result, the intermediate roll body 73 having the first gap 13 and the second gap 15 is obtained.
 中間ロール体73を得た後、図39(A)に示されるように巻芯11の幅方向DR1に沿って中間ロール体73の外周面73Aを構成するシート12の表面12Iに塗布材料206、207を塗布する。塗布材料206は少なくとも第1隙間13に対応する第1領域12Dに塗布され、塗布材料207は少なくとも第2隙間15に対応する第2領域12Eに塗布される。塗布材料74、75は、塗布材料201、202と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略するものとする。 After obtaining the intermediate roll body 73, as shown in FIG. 39A, the coating material 206 is applied to the surface 12I of the sheet 12 constituting the outer peripheral surface 73A of the intermediate roll body 73 along the width direction DR1 of the winding core 11. 207 is applied. The coating material 206 is applied to at least the first region 12D corresponding to the first gap 13, and the coating material 207 is applied to the second region 12E corresponding to at least the second gap 15. Since the coating materials 74 and 75 are the same as the coating materials 201 and 202, the description thereof will be omitted here.
 塗布材料206、207を塗布した後、図39(B)に示されるように巻芯11にシート12を再度巻回する。これにより、塗布材料206、207が流動して広がるので、シート12間における第1領域12Dに塗布材料206が設けられるとともにシート12間における第2領域12Eに塗布材料207が設けられて、第1介在部71および第2介在部72が形成される。これにより、ロール体70が得られる。なお、塗布材料206、207の少なくともいずれかが、硬化性材料である場合には、シート12の再度巻回した後に、硬化性材料を硬化させる。 After applying the coating materials 206 and 207, the sheet 12 is wound around the winding core 11 again as shown in FIG. 39 (B). As a result, the coating materials 206 and 207 flow and spread, so that the coating material 206 is provided in the first region 12D between the sheets 12 and the coating material 207 is provided in the second region 12E between the sheets 12. An intervening portion 71 and a second intervening portion 72 are formed. As a result, the roll body 70 is obtained. If at least one of the coating materials 206 and 207 is a curable material, the curable material is cured after the sheet 12 is wound again.
 ロール体70の製造方法においては、スリット210Aを有する型210を用いて塗布材料206、207の塗布を行っていないが、第1実施形態と同様にスリット210Aを有する型210を用いて塗布材料206、207の塗布を行ってもよい。また、第1実施形態と同様の方法によって塗布材料206、207の代わりに充填シートによって第1介在部71および第2介在部72を形成してもよい。 In the method for manufacturing the roll body 70, the coating materials 206 and 207 are not coated using the mold 210 having the slit 210A, but the coating material 206 is coated using the mold 210 having the slit 210A as in the first embodiment. , 207 may be applied. Further, the first interposing portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 may be formed by a filling sheet instead of the coating materials 206 and 207 by the same method as in the first embodiment.
 本実施形態によれば、シート12間における第1領域12Dに第1介在部71が設けられているので、第1介在部71上のシート12の部分を先端面12A1側に向けてなだらかに持ち上げることができる。これにより、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差を有効に緩和できる。 According to the present embodiment, since the first intervening portion 71 is provided in the first region 12D between the seats 12, the portion of the sheet 12 on the first intervening portion 71 is gently lifted toward the tip surface 12A1 side. be able to. As a result, the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 can be effectively alleviated.
 本実施形態によれば、シート12間における第2領域12Eに第2介在部72が設けられているので、第2介在部72上のシート12の部分をなだらかに持ち上げることができる。これにより、固定部材17に起因する段差を有効に緩和できる。 According to the present embodiment, since the second intervening portion 72 is provided in the second region 12E between the seats 12, the portion of the sheet 12 on the second intervening portion 72 can be gently lifted. Thereby, the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be effectively alleviated.
 また、シート12の巻き始め端部12Aに起因する段差や固定部材17に起因する段差を緩和できるので、シート12の変形を抑制することができる。 Further, since the step caused by the winding start end portion 12A of the sheet 12 and the step caused by the fixing member 17 can be alleviated, the deformation of the sheet 12 can be suppressed.
 第1隙間に第1充填部を充填し、また第2隙間に第2充填部を充填すると、第1充填部や第2充填部は、圧力が加わっていない部分に流動する場合がある。これに対し、本実施形態においては、シート12間に第1介在部71や第2介在部72を設けているので、第1介在部71や第2介在部72を構成する材料が流動しにくく、はみ出しにくい。 When the first gap is filled with the first filling portion and the second gap is filled with the second filling portion, the first filling portion and the second filling portion may flow to a portion where pressure is not applied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the first intervening portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 are provided between the sheets 12, the materials constituting the first interposing portion 71 and the second interposing portion 72 are difficult to flow. , Hard to stick out.
 本発明を詳細に説明するために、以下に実施例を挙げて説明するが、本発明はこれらの記載に限定されない。図40(A)は、実施例7に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフであり、図40(B)は、実施例8に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフであり、図40(C)は、実施例9に係るロール体の第1充填部周辺の位置に対する変位量を表したグラフである。 In order to explain the present invention in detail, examples will be given below, but the present invention is not limited to these descriptions. FIG. 40 (A) is a graph showing the amount of displacement of the roll body according to the seventh embodiment with respect to the position around the first filling portion, and FIG. 40 (B) is the first filling of the roll body according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the portion, and FIG. 40 (C) is a graph showing the amount of displacement with respect to the position around the first filled portion of the roll body according to the ninth embodiment.
<ハードコート層用組成物の調製>
 まず、下記に示す組成となるように各成分を配合して、ハードコート層用組成物1を得た。
<Preparation of composition for hard coat layer>
First, each component was blended so as to have the composition shown below to obtain a composition 1 for a hard coat layer.
(ハードコート層用組成物1)
・ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(製品名「KAYARAD-PET-30」、日本化薬株式会社製):60質量部
・光重合開始剤(1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン、製品名「Omnirad184」、IGM Resins B.V.社製):5質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤(製品名「セイカビーム10-28」、大日精化工業株式会社製、固形分10%):0.1質量部
・シリカ粒子(製品名「SIRMIBK-H84」、CIKナノテック株式会社製、平均粒子径30nm、固形分30%):3質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン(MIBK):80質量部
・シクロヘキサノン:20質量部
(Composition for hard coat layer 1)
-Pentaerythritol triacrylate (product name "KAYARAD-PET-30", manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.): 60 parts by mass-Photopolymerization initiator (1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, product name "Omnirad 184", IGM Resins B. V.): 5 parts by mass, silicone-based leveling agent (product name "Seika Beam 10-28", manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., solid content 10%): 0.1 parts by mass, silica particles (product name "Product name" SIRMIBK-H84 ”, manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., average particle size 30 nm, solid content 30%): 3 parts by mass ・ Methylisobutyl ketone (MIBK): 80 parts by mass ・ Cyclohexylnone: 20 parts by mass
<実施例1>
 まず、内径153mm、外径167mmおよび幅1600mmの繊維強化プラスチック製の円筒状の巻芯の外周面に、固定部材としての長さ1380mm、幅20mmおよび厚み10μmの長方形状の両面テープを巻芯の幅方向に沿って貼り付けた。
<Example 1>
First, a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 μm as a fixing member is wound on the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm. It was pasted along the width direction.
 両面テープを貼り付けた後、巻芯を巻取装置のチャッキング部材で保持して、巻取装置に固定した。その後、両面テープにおける巻芯の幅方向に沿って延びる第1端面および第2端面にそれぞれ接触するように、塗布材料として、1液硬化性シリコーン樹脂組成物(製品名「ハピオシールプロHG」、株式会社カンペハピオ製)を25℃の環境下で2本塗布した。このシリコーン樹脂組成物の色は灰色であった。また、このシリコーン樹脂組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、それぞれ180Pa・sであり、シリコーン樹脂組成物は、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が1cm/mとなるようにそれぞれ直線状に塗布された。 After the double-sided tape was attached, the winding core was held by the chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device. Then, as a coating material, a one-component curable silicone resin composition (product name "Hapio Seal Pro HG", so as to contact the first end face and the second end face extending along the width direction of the winding core of the double-sided tape, respectively. Two bottles (manufactured by Campe Hapio Co., Ltd.) were applied in an environment of 25 ° C. The color of this silicone resin composition was gray. Further, the shear viscosity at the time of coating of this silicone resin composition is 180 Pa · s, respectively, and the silicone resin composition is along the width direction of the winding core and the coating amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. Each was applied linearly.
 そして、シートとしての長さ3000m、幅1340mmおよび厚み80μmのアクリル樹脂フィルム(面内位相差Re:5nm)の長手方向の巻き始め端部を巻芯の幅方向に沿って両面テープに貼り付けて、アクリル樹脂フィルムを巻芯の外周面に固定した。なお、アクリル樹脂フィルムは、アクリル樹脂フィルムの巻き始め端部の長手方向の先端面がシリコーン樹脂組成物と接し、かつ巻芯の径方向において両面テープの第2端面とほぼ揃うように配置された。 Then, the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of an acrylic resin film (in-plane phase difference Re: 5 nm) having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 80 μm as a sheet is attached to a double-sided tape along the width direction of the winding core. , Acrylic resin film was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. The acrylic resin film was arranged so that the tip surface of the winding start end of the acrylic resin film in the longitudinal direction was in contact with the silicone resin composition and was substantially aligned with the second end face of the double-sided tape in the radial direction of the winding core. ..
 その後、アクリル樹脂フィルム全てを巻取装置によって巻芯に巻回して、巻芯と1周目のアクリル樹脂フィルムの間に位置し、かつアクリル樹脂フィルムの巻き始め端部の先端面に接する第1隙間にシリコーン樹脂組成物を充填するとともに、巻芯と1周目のアクリル樹脂フィルムの間に位置し、かつ両面テープの第1端面に接する第2隙間にシリコーン樹脂組成物を充填した。これにより、ロール体を得た。ロール体においては、シリコーン樹脂組成物は硬化して、第1隙間に充填された長さ20mm、幅1340mmおよび最大厚み300μmの第1充填部と、第2隙間に充填された長さ20mm、幅1340mmおよび最大厚み300μmの第2充填部が形成されていた。 After that, the entire acrylic resin film is wound around the winding core by a winding device, and is located between the winding core and the acrylic resin film on the first lap, and is in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the acrylic resin film. The gap was filled with the silicone resin composition, and the second gap located between the winding core and the acrylic resin film on the first lap and in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape was filled with the silicone resin composition. As a result, a roll body was obtained. In the roll body, the silicone resin composition was cured to fill the first gap with a first filling portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 μm, and a second gap having a length of 20 mm and a width. A second filling portion having a maximum thickness of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 μm was formed.
 シリコーン樹脂組成物の剪断粘度は、株式会社アントンパール・ジャパン製の動的粘弾性測定装置を用いて測定された。具体的には、シリコーン樹脂組成物の剪断粘度は、直径25mmのパラレルプレートを用いて、25℃において剪断速度1[1/s]の時の剪断粘度を測定することによって求められた。シリコーン樹脂組成物の粘度は、シリコーン樹脂組成物の粘度を10回測定し、測定された10の粘度中、最大値と最小値を除いた8つの剪断粘度の算術平均値を求めることによって求めた。以下の他の実施例で用いた塗布材料の剪断粘度も実施例1と同様にして測定された。 The shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition was measured using a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device manufactured by Anton Pearl Japan Co., Ltd. Specifically, the shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition was determined by measuring the shear viscosity at a shear rate of 1 [1 / s] at 25 ° C. using a parallel plate having a diameter of 25 mm. The viscosity of the silicone resin composition was determined by measuring the viscosity of the silicone resin composition 10 times and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of eight shear viscosities excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured 10 viscosities. .. The shear viscosities of the coating materials used in the following other examples were also measured in the same manner as in Example 1.
 アクリル樹脂フィルムの面内位相差Reは、位相差フィルム・光学材料検査装置(製品名「RETS-100」、大塚電子株式会社製)を用いて測定された。具体的には、まず、RETS-100の光源を安定させるため、光源を点灯させてから60分以上放置した。その後、回転検光子法を選択するとともに、θモード(角度方向位相差測定モード)選択する。このθモードを選択することにより、ステージは傾斜回転ステージとなった。 The in-plane retardation Re of the acrylic resin film was measured using a retardation film / optical material inspection device (product name "RETS-100", manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, in order to stabilize the light source of RETS-100, the light source was turned on and then left for 60 minutes or more. After that, the rotary photon method is selected and the θ mode (angle direction phase difference measurement mode) is selected. By selecting this θ mode, the stage became an inclined rotation stage.
 次いで、RETS-100に以下の測定条件を入力した。
(測定条件)
・リタデーション測定範囲:回転検光子法
・測定スポット径:φ5mm
・傾斜角度範囲:-40°~40°
・測定波長範囲:400nm~800nm
・サンプルの平均屈折率:1.5
・厚み:80μm
Next, the following measurement conditions were input to RETS-100.
(Measurement condition)
・ Reference measurement range: Rotational photon method ・ Measurement spot diameter: φ5 mm
-Inclination angle range: -40 ° to 40 °
-Measurement wavelength range: 400 nm to 800 nm
-Average refractive index of sample: 1.5
・ Thickness: 80 μm
 次いで、この装置にサンプルを設置せずに、バックグラウンドデータを得た。装置は閉鎖系とし、光源を点灯させる毎にこれを実施した。 Next, background data was obtained without installing a sample in this device. The device was a closed system, and this was done every time the light source was turned on.
 その後、この装置内のステージ上にサンプルを設置した。サンプルの大きさは50mm×50mmとした。 After that, the sample was installed on the stage in this device. The size of the sample was 50 mm × 50 mm.
 サンプルを設置した後、温度23℃および相対湿度50%の環境下で、XY平面上でステージを360°回転させて、進相軸および遅相軸を測定した。測定終了後、遅相軸を選択した。その後、遅相軸を中心にステージが設定した角度範囲に傾きながら測定が行われ、10°刻みで、設定傾斜角度範囲および設定波長範囲のデータ(Re)が得られた。面内位相差Reは、位置が異なる5点で測定した。具体的には、図2に示されるようにサンプルの中心A1および点A2~A4の合計5点で測定した。そして、5点の測定値中、最大値と最小値を除いた3点の算術平均値を面内位相差Reとした。 After installing the sample, the stage was rotated 360 ° on the XY plane in an environment with a temperature of 23 ° C and a relative humidity of 50%, and the phase-advancing axis and the slow-phase axis were measured. After the measurement was completed, the slow phase axis was selected. After that, the measurement was performed while tilting to the angle range set by the stage about the slow phase axis, and the data (Re) of the set tilt angle range and the set wavelength range were obtained in increments of 10 °. The in-plane phase difference Re was measured at 5 points at different positions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, measurements were taken at a total of 5 points, the center A1 of the sample and the points A2 to A4. Then, among the measured values of 5 points, the arithmetic mean value of 3 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value was defined as the in-plane phase difference Re.
<実施例2>
 実施例2においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーン樹脂組成物の代わりに、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「KE-24」、信越化学株式会社製)を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にしてロール体を得た。このシリコーンゴム組成物は混合時では白色であり、またシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、75Pa・sであった。
<Example 2>
In Example 2, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "KE-24", manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) ) Was used, and a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1. This silicone rubber composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 75 Pa · s.
<実施例3>
 実施例3においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーン樹脂組成物の代わりに、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にしてロール体を得た。このシリコーンゴム組成物は混合時では白色であり、またこのシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、40Pa・sであった。さらに、このシリコーンゴム組成物は、揮発成分や接着成分を含まないものであった。
<Example 3>
In Example 3, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4503", Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (condensation curable) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used. The silicone rubber composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 40 Pa · s. Further, this silicone rubber composition did not contain a volatile component or an adhesive component.
 実施例3に係るロール体における第1充填部の構成材料を巻芯の外周面に対し垂直に剥離速度10mm/分で剥離する90°剥離試験を行ったとき、0.2Nの引張力で、構成材料が剥がれた。 When a 90 ° peeling test was performed in which the constituent material of the first filling portion in the roll body according to Example 3 was peeled perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core at a peeling speed of 10 mm / min, the tensile force was 0.2 N. The constituent material has peeled off.
 上記90°剥離試験は、サンプルおよびバネ式テンションゲージ(株式会社大場計器製作所製)を用いて行われた。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯の外周面に配置した。そして、この型に2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を流し込み、硬化させて、材料層を得た。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、裁断機により20mm×100mmの大きさに材料層を切り出して、巻芯の外周面に設けられたサンプルを得た。そして、サンプルの一端をバネ式テンションゲージにより保持して、温度25℃、相対湿度50%の環境下で、引張力を測定しながら、巻芯の外周面に対し垂直に前記一端を引き上げて、サンプルを剥離速度10mm/秒で剥離した。そして、90°剥離試験を行った10個のサンプル中、引張力が最大となったサンプルと最小となったサンプルを除いた8個のサンプルの引張力の算術平均値を上記構成材料の引張力とした。 The 90 ° peeling test was performed using a sample and a spring type tension gauge (manufactured by Oba Keiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.). Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) was poured into this mold and cured to obtain a material layer. Then, the material layer was removed from the mold, and the material layer was cut out to a size of 20 mm × 100 mm by a cutting machine to obtain a sample provided on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, one end of the sample is held by a spring type tension gauge, and the one end is pulled up perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core while measuring the tensile force in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. The sample was peeled off at a peeling speed of 10 mm / sec. Then, among the 10 samples subjected to the 90 ° peeling test, the arithmetic mean value of the tensile force of 8 samples excluding the sample having the maximum tensile force and the sample having the minimum tensile force was calculated as the tensile force of the above constituent materials. And said.
 実施例3に係るロール体における第1充填部の構成材料の引張強さは3.5MPaであり、切断時伸びは450%であり、引裂強さは12.0N/mmであった。また、デュロメータータイプAで測定した第1充填部の構成材料の硬さは、28°であり、第1充填部の構成材料の線収縮率は、0.10%であった。 The tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion in the roll body according to Example 3 was 3.5 MPa, the elongation at the time of cutting was 450%, and the tear strength was 12.0 N / mm. The hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion measured by the durometer type A was 28 °, and the linear shrinkage ratio of the constituent material of the first filling portion was 0.10%.
 第1充填部の構成材料の引張強さは、JIS K6251:2017に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ製)を用いて測定した。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯の外周面に配置した。そして、この型に第1充填部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を流し込み、硬化させて、材料層を得た。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、高分子計器株式会社製の引張2号形ダンベル状打抜刃によりJIS K6251:2017に記載のダンベル状2号形の大きさに材料層を打ち抜き、サンプルを得た。その後、サンプルを25℃の環境下で24時間保持した。そして、上記テンシロン万能試験機の一対の把持具にサンプルの長手方向の両端部を把持させて、温度25℃、相対湿度50%の環境下で初期把持具間距離20mmおよび引張速度100mm/分の条件で引張試験を行い、サンプルの引張強さを測定した。そして、10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの引張強さの算術平均値を上記構成材料の引張強さとした。 The tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling part is measured using a sample and a Tensilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. did. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) for forming the first filling portion is poured into this mold and cured. The material layer was obtained. After that, the material layer is removed from the mold, and the material layer is punched to the size of the dumbbell-shaped No. 2 described in JIS K6251: 2017 with a tensile No. 2 dumbbell-shaped punching blade manufactured by Polymer Instruments Co., Ltd., and a sample is prepared. Obtained. The sample was then held in an environment of 25 ° C. for 24 hours. Then, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the sample are gripped by the pair of grippers of the Tencilon universal testing machine, and the initial gripping distance between the grippers is 20 mm and the tensile speed is 100 mm / min in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. A tensile test was performed under the conditions, and the tensile strength of the sample was measured. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the tensile strength of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was taken as the tensile strength of the constituent material.
 第1充填部の構成材料の切断時伸びは、JIS K6251:2017に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ製)を用いて引張強さの測定方法と同様にして測定した。そして、10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの切断時伸びの算術平均値を上記構成材料の切断時伸びとした。 The elongation at the time of cutting of the constituent material of the first filling part is tensioned using a sample and a Tencilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) in accordance with JIS K6251: 2017. It was measured in the same manner as the strength measuring method. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the elongation at the time of cutting of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was defined as the elongation at the time of cutting of the above constituent materials.
 第1充填部の構成材料の引裂強さは、JIS K6252:2007に準拠して、サンプルおよびテンシロン万能試験機(製品名「RTC-1310A」、株式会社エー・アンド・デイ株式会社製)を用いて引張強さの測定方法と同様にして測定した。そして、10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの引裂強さの算術平均値を上記構成材料の引裂強さとした。 The tear strength of the constituent material of the first filling part is based on JIS K6252: 2007, and a sample and Tensilon universal testing machine (product name "RTC-1310A", manufactured by A & D Co., Ltd.) are used. The measurement was performed in the same manner as the method for measuring the tensile strength. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the tear strength of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was taken as the tear strength of the constituent material.
 第1の充填部の構成材料におけるデュロメータータイプAでの硬さ測定は、JIS K6253:1997に準拠して測定された。具体的には、まず、サンプルの大きさよりも大きな型を用意し、この型を巻芯の外周面に配置した。そして、この型に第1充填部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を流し込み、必要に応じて硬化させて、材料層を得る。その後、材料層を型から外すとともに、裁断機等により材料層を切り出して、大きさ100mm×100mm、厚み10mmのサンプルを得た。そして、デュロメータータイプA(製品名「GS-719N(TYPEA)」、株式会社テクロック製)を用いて、温度25℃、相対湿度50%の環境下で硬さを測定した。そして、10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの硬さの算術平均値を上記構成材料の硬さとした。 The hardness of the durometer type A in the constituent material of the first filling portion was measured in accordance with JIS K6253: 1997. Specifically, first, a mold larger than the size of the sample was prepared, and this mold was placed on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. Then, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) for forming the first filling portion is poured into this mold, and it is necessary. To obtain a material layer by curing according to. Then, the material layer was removed from the mold, and the material layer was cut out by a cutting machine or the like to obtain a sample having a size of 100 mm × 100 mm and a thickness of 10 mm. Then, using a durometer type A (product name "GS-719N (TYPEA)", manufactured by TECLOCK Co., Ltd.), the hardness was measured in an environment of a temperature of 25 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. Then, the arithmetic mean value of the hardness of 8 samples excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the 10 samples was defined as the hardness of the constituent material.
 第1充填部の線収縮率は、以下のようにして測定することができる。まず、厚み2mm、130mm角の大きさの金型を用意し、この金型に第1充填部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を流し込み、硬化させて、サンプル(成形物)を得た。完全に硬化した後、サンプルの寸法を測定し、金型の内側の寸法と比較して、JIS K6249:2003に基づいて線収縮率を求めた。10個のサンプル中、最大値および最小値を除く8個のサンプルの線収縮率の算術平均値を上記構成材料の線収縮率とした。 The linear shrinkage rate of the first filling portion can be measured as follows. First, a mold having a thickness of 2 mm and a size of 130 mm square is prepared, and a two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming a first filling portion in this mold (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M4503"). , Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. (condensation curable) was poured and cured to obtain a sample (molded product). After the sample was completely cured, the dimensions of the sample were measured and compared with the dimensions inside the mold to determine the linear shrinkage ratio based on JIS K6249: 2003. The arithmetic mean value of the linear shrinkage of eight samples excluding the maximum and minimum values among the ten samples was taken as the linear shrinkage of the constituent materials.
<実施例4>
 実施例4においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーン樹脂組成物の代わりに、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4601」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、付加反応性)を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にしてロール体を得た。このシリコーンゴム脂組成物は混合時では白色であり、またこのシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、20Pa・sであった。
<Example 4>
In Example 4, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name “ELASTOSIL® M 4601”, Asahi Kasei A roll was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that (additional reactivity) manufactured by Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd. was used. The silicone rubber fat composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the silicone rubber composition was applied was 20 Pa · s.
<実施例5>
 実施例5においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーン樹脂組成物の代わりに、2液硬化性ウレタン樹脂組成物(製品名「人肌のゲル」、株式会社エクシールコーポレーション製)を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にしてロール体を得た。このウレタン樹脂組成物は混合時では白色であり、ウレタン樹脂組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、6.5Pa・sであった。
<Example 5>
In Example 5, instead of the silicone resin composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion, a two-component curable urethane resin composition (product name “human skin gel”, EXCEL CORPORATION). A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the product was used. This urethane resin composition was white when mixed, and the shear viscosity when the urethane resin composition was applied was 6.5 Pa · s.
<実施例6>
 まず、内径153mm、外径167mmおよび幅1600mmの繊維強化プラスチック製の円筒状の巻芯の外周面に、固定部材としての長さ1380mm、幅20mmおよび厚み10μmの長方形状の両面テープを巻芯の幅方向に沿って貼り付けた。
<Example 6>
First, a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 μm as a fixing member is wound on the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm. It was pasted along the width direction.
 両面テープを貼り付けた後、巻芯を巻取装置のチャッキング部材で保持して、巻取装置に固定した。そして、シートとしての長さ3000m、幅1490mmおよび厚み80μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(PETフィルム、面内位相差Re:1000nm、Nz係数:20)の長手方向の巻き始め端部を巻芯の幅方向に沿って両面テープに貼り付けて、PETフィルムを巻芯の外周面に固定した。 After attaching the double-sided tape, the winding core was held by the chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device. Then, the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of the polyethylene terephthalate film (PET film, in-plane retardation Re: 1000 nm, Nz coefficient: 20) having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1490 mm and a thickness of 80 μm as a sheet is set in the width direction of the winding core. The PET film was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core by sticking it on the double-sided tape along the line.
 その後、PETフィルムを巻取装置によって1周巻き取り、中間ロール体を得た。中間ロール体においては、巻芯と1周目のPETフィルムの間に位置し、かつPETフィルムの巻き始め端部の先端面に接する第1隙間と、巻芯と1周目のPETフィルムの間に位置し、両面テープの第1端面に接する第2隙間とが形成されていた。 After that, the PET film was wound around once by a winding device to obtain an intermediate roll body. In the intermediate roll body, the first gap located between the winding core and the PET film on the first lap and in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the PET film, and between the winding core and the PET film on the first lap. A second gap was formed in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape.
 中間ロール体を得た後、巻芯の幅方向に沿って中間ロール体の外周面を構成するPETフィルムの表面に、塗布材料として、1液硬化性シリコーン樹脂組成物(製品名「ハピオシールプロHG」、株式会社カンペハピオ製)を25℃の環境下で塗布した。シリコーン樹脂組成物の塗布時の粘度は、それぞれ180Pa・sであり、シリコーン樹脂組成物は、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が1cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布された。具体的には、シリコーン樹脂組成物は、第1隙間に対応する第1領域および第2隙間に対応する第2領域にそれぞれ塗布された。 After obtaining the intermediate roll body, a one-component curable silicone resin composition (product name "Hapio Seal Pro") is applied to the surface of the PET film forming the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core as a coating material. HG ”, manufactured by Campe Hapio Co., Ltd.) was applied in an environment of 25 ° C. The viscosity of the silicone resin composition at the time of application is 180 Pa · s, respectively, and the silicone resin composition is linear so as to be along the width direction of the winding core and the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. Was applied to. Specifically, the silicone resin composition was applied to the first region corresponding to the first gap and the second region corresponding to the second gap, respectively.
 シリコーン樹脂組成物を塗布した後、PETフィルム全てを巻取装置によって巻芯に再度巻回して、PETフィルム間の第1領域および第2領域のそれぞれにシリコーン樹脂組成物を介在させた。これにより、ロール体を得た。ロール体においては、シリコーン樹脂組成物は硬化して、PETフィルム間の第1領域に設けられた長さ20mm、幅1340mmおよび最大厚み300μmの第1介在部と、PETフィルム間の第2領域に設けられた長さ20mm、幅1340mmおよび最大厚み300μmの第2介在部が形成されていた。 After applying the silicone resin composition, the entire PET film was wound around the core again by a winding device, and the silicone resin composition was interposed in each of the first region and the second region between the PET films. As a result, a roll body was obtained. In the roll body, the silicone resin composition is cured to form a first intervening portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm and a maximum thickness of 300 μm provided in the first region between the PET films and a second region between the PET films. A second intervening portion having a length of 20 mm, a width of 1340 mm, and a maximum thickness of 300 μm was formed.
 実施例6で用いたPETフィルムの面内位相差Reは、実施例1で用いたアクリル樹脂フィルムの面内位相差Reと同様にして測定された。ただし、この場合には、サンプルの平均屈折率Nを1.617とした。 The in-plane retardation Re of the PET film used in Example 6 was measured in the same manner as the in-plane retardation Re of the acrylic resin film used in Example 1. However, in this case, the average refractive index N of the sample was set to 1.617.
<実施例7>
 実施例7においては、シートとしての長さ3000m、幅1340mmおよび厚み85μmのアクリル樹脂フィルム、具体的には、アクリル樹脂フィルムおよびハードコート層からなる積層体を用い、また第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーンゴム組成物を、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が0.3cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布したこと以外は、実施例3と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 7>
In Example 7, an acrylic resin film having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 85 μm as a sheet, specifically, a laminate composed of an acrylic resin film and a hard coat layer is used, and a first filling portion and a second filling portion are used. Examples except that the silicone rubber composition for forming the filling portion was linearly applied along the width direction of the winding core so that the coating amount per unit width was 0.3 cm 3 / m. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in 3.
 上記積層体は、以下のようにして形成された。まず、連続塗工機を用いて、巻き出しロールから実施例1で用いられた長さ3000m、幅1340mmおよび厚み80μmのアクリル樹脂フィルムを第1ユニットの塗工部に送り出し、上記ハードコート層用組成物1を塗布して、塗膜を形成した。その後、塗膜を乾燥部で温度70℃、60秒間乾燥し、塗膜中の溶剤を蒸発させ、硬化部で紫外線を積算光量が150mJ/cmとなるように照射して塗膜を硬化させることにより、膜厚5.0μmおよび塗工幅1300mmのハードコート層を形成し、連続成膜した長さ3000mおよび厚み85μmの積層体を得た。 The laminate was formed as follows. First, using a continuous coating machine, the acrylic resin film having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 80 μm used in Example 1 is sent from the unwinding roll to the coated portion of the first unit for the hard coat layer. Composition 1 was applied to form a coating film. After that, the coating film is dried at a temperature of 70 ° C. for 60 seconds in the drying portion, the solvent in the coating film is evaporated, and ultraviolet rays are irradiated in the cured portion so that the integrated light amount becomes 150 mJ / cm 2 to cure the coating film. As a result, a hard coat layer having a film thickness of 5.0 μm and a coating width of 1300 mm was formed, and a continuous film-formed laminate having a length of 3000 m and a thickness of 85 μm was obtained.
<実施例8>
 実施例8においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーンゴム組成物を、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が0.5cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布したこと以外は、実施例7と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 8>
In Example 8, the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion is applied along the width direction of the winding core, and the coating amount per unit width is 0.5 cm 3 / m. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the coating was linearly applied.
<実施例9>
 実施例9においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーンゴム組成物を、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が0.8cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布したこと以外は、実施例7と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 9>
In Example 9, the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion is applied along the width direction of the winding core, and the coating amount per unit width is 0.8 cm 3 / m. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the coating was linearly applied.
<実施例10>
 実施例10においては、第1充填部および第2充填部を形成するためのシリコーンゴム組成物を単位幅当たりの塗布量が1cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布したこと以外は、実施例9と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 10>
In Example 10, except that the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second filling portion was linearly applied so that the coating amount per unit width was 1 cm 3 / m. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9.
<実施例11>
 実施例11においては、第1充填部および第2介在部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度を2Pa・sとし、また単位幅当たりの塗布量を1.5cm/mとしたこと以外は、実施例9と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 11>
In Example 11, the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 2 Pa · s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9 except that the thickness was 5 cm 3 / m.
<実施例12>
 実施例12においては、第1充填部および第2介在部を形成するためのシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度を6.5Pa・sとし、また単位幅当たりの塗布量を1.2cm/mとしたこと以外は、実施例9と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 12>
In Example 12, the shear viscosity at the time of application of the silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 6.5 Pa · s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1.2 cm 3. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 9 except that / m was set.
<実施例13>
 まず、内径153mm、外径167mmおよび幅1600mmの繊維強化プラスチック製の円筒状の巻芯を巻取装置のチャッキング部材で保持して、巻取装置に固定した。その後、巻芯の幅方向に沿って、塗布材料として、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を25℃の環境下で1本塗布した。シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の粘度は、180Pa・sであり、シリコーンゴム組成物は、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が1cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布された。
<Example 13>
First, a cylindrical winding core made of fiber reinforced plastic having an inner diameter of 153 mm, an outer diameter of 167 mm and a width of 1600 mm was held by a chucking member of the winding device and fixed to the winding device. Then, along the width direction of the winding core, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4503", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) was applied as a coating material at 25 ° C. One was applied in the environment of. The viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application is 180 Pa · s, and the silicone rubber composition is linear along the width direction of the winding core so that the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. It was applied.
 その後、両面テープと2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の間の離間距離が3mmとなるように、固定部材としての長さ1380mm、幅20mmおよび厚み10μmの長方形状の両面テープを巻芯の幅方向に沿って貼り付けた。離間距離は、10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の離間距離中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の離間距離の算術平均値を求めることによって求めた。以下の実施例においても、離間距離は、このようにして求めた。 After that, a rectangular double-sided tape having a length of 1380 mm, a width of 20 mm and a thickness of 10 μm as a fixing member was wrapped in the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm. I pasted it along. The separation distance was determined by measuring 10 points and calculating the arithmetic mean value of the separation distances at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured 10 points. Also in the following examples, the separation distance was determined in this way.
 そして、シートとしての実施例7と同様の長さ3000m、幅1340mmおよび厚み85μmの積層体の長手方向の巻き始め端部を巻芯の幅方向に沿って両面テープに貼り付けて、積層体を巻芯の外周面に固定した。なお、積層体は、積層体の巻き始め端部の長手方向の先端面がシリコーンゴム組成物と接し、かつ巻芯の径方向において両面テープの第2端面とほぼ揃うように配置された。 Then, the winding start end in the longitudinal direction of the laminate having a length of 3000 m, a width of 1340 mm and a thickness of 85 μm similar to that of Example 7 as a sheet is attached to a double-sided tape along the width direction of the winding core to attach the laminate. It was fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core. The laminated body was arranged so that the tip surface of the winding start end portion of the laminated body in the longitudinal direction was in contact with the silicone rubber composition and was substantially aligned with the second end surface of the double-sided tape in the radial direction of the winding core.
 その後、積層体を巻取装置によって巻芯に巻回して、巻芯と1周目の積層体の間に位置し、かつ積層体の巻き始め端部の先端面に接する第1隙間にシリコーンゴム組成物を充填した。 After that, the laminated body is wound around the winding core by a winding device, and the silicone rubber is located in the first gap between the winding core and the laminated body on the first lap and in contact with the tip end surface of the winding start end of the laminated body. The composition was filled.
 その後、積層体を巻取装置によって1周巻き取り、中間ロール体を得た。中間ロール体においては、巻芯と1周目の積層体の間に位置し、両面テープの第1端面に接する第2隙間が形成されていた。 After that, the laminated body was wound around once by a winding device to obtain an intermediate roll body. In the intermediate roll body, a second gap was formed between the winding core and the laminated body on the first lap and in contact with the first end surface of the double-sided tape.
 中間ロール体を得た後、巻芯の幅方向に沿って中間ロール体の外周面を構成する積層体の表面に、塗布材料として、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)を25℃の環境下で塗布した。シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の粘度は、180Pa・sであり、シリコーンゴム組成物は、巻芯の幅方向に沿い、かつ単位幅当たりの塗布量が1cm/mとなるように直線状に塗布された。具体的には、シリコーンゴム組成物は、第2隙間に対応する第2領域に塗布された。 After obtaining the intermediate roll body, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL" (registered)) is applied to the surface of the laminate forming the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core as a coating material. Trademark) M 4503 ”, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curable) was applied in an environment of 25 ° C. The viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application is 180 Pa · s, and the silicone rubber composition is linear along the width direction of the winding core so that the application amount per unit width is 1 cm 3 / m. It was applied. Specifically, the silicone rubber composition was applied to the second region corresponding to the second gap.
 シリコーンゴム組成物を塗布した後、積層体全てを巻取装置によって巻芯に再度巻回して、積層体間の第2領域にシリコーンゴム組成物を介在させた。これにより、ロール体を得た。ロール体においては、シリコーンゴム組成物はそれぞれ硬化して、第1隙間に幅1340mmの第1充填部が形成され、また積層体間の第2領域に幅1340mmの第2介在部が形成されていた。 After applying the silicone rubber composition, the entire laminate was wound around the core again by a winding device, and the silicone rubber composition was interposed in the second region between the laminates. As a result, a roll body was obtained. In the roll body, each of the silicone rubber compositions is cured to form a first filling portion having a width of 1340 mm in the first gap, and a second intervening portion having a width of 1340 mm is formed in the second region between the laminates. It was.
<実施例14>
 実施例12においては、第1充填部および第2介在部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4503」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、縮合硬化性)の代わりに、2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物(製品名「ELASTOSIL(登録商標) M 4601」、旭化成ワッカーシリコーン株式会社製、付加反応性)を用いたこと以外は、実施例11と同様にしてロール体を得た。シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度は、10Pa・sであった。
<Example 14>
In Example 12, a two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion (product name “ELASTOSIL® M 4503”, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., condensation curing). Same as Example 11 except that a two-component curable silicone rubber composition (product name "ELASTOSIL (registered trademark) M 4601", manufactured by Asahi Kasei Wacker Silicone Co., Ltd., addition reactivity) was used instead of (property). And got a roll body. The shear viscosity of the silicone rubber composition at the time of application was 10 Pa · s.
<実施例15>
 実施例15においては、第1充填部および第2介在部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度を10Pa・sとし、また単位幅当たりの塗布量を0.8cm/mとしたこと、および両面テープと2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の間の離間距離を3mmとしたこと以外は、実施例13と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 15>
In Example 15, the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 10 Pa · s, and the coating amount per unit width was 0. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 13 except that the distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm, except that the thickness was 8 cm 3 / m.
<実施例16>
 実施例16においては、第1充填部および第2介在部を形成するための2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の塗布時の剪断粘度を10Pa・sとし、また単位幅当たりの塗布量を1.2cm/mとしたこと、および両面テープと2液硬化性シリコーンゴム組成物の間の離間距離を3mmとしたこと以外は、実施例13と同様にしてロール体を得た。
<Example 16>
In Example 16, the shear viscosity at the time of application of the two-component curable silicone rubber composition for forming the first filling portion and the second interposition portion was 10 Pa · s, and the coating amount per unit width was 1. A roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 13 except that the distance between the double-sided tape and the two-component curable silicone rubber composition was 3 mm, except that the thickness was 2 cm 3 / m.
<比較例1>
 比較例1においては、塗布材料を塗布しなかったこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして、ロール体を得た。
<Comparative example 1>
In Comparative Example 1, a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the coating material was not applied.
<比較例2>
 比較例2においては、アクリル樹脂フィルムの代わりに、実施例7で用いた積層体を用いたこと以外は、比較例1と同様にして、ロール体を得た。
<Comparative example 2>
In Comparative Example 2, a roll body was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 1 except that the laminate used in Example 7 was used instead of the acrylic resin film.
 実施例1~16に係るロール体において、第1充填部のエッジ厚みT1を測定した。エッジ厚みT1は、走査型光干渉式表面形状測定機(製品名「New View7300」、Zygo社製)を用いて測定した。具体的には、まず、アクリル樹脂フィルムやPETフィルム等のフィルムや積層体を全て繰り出すと、第1充填部が積層体側に付着し、巻芯から剥がれたものがあった。そして、積層体から第1充填部を含む大きさ2mm×5mmの1以上のサンプルを切り出した。サンプルは、第1充填部の先端部を含み、かつ汚れや指紋等が付着していない任意の箇所から切り出した。そして、以下の測定条件で、第1充填部のエッジ厚みT1を測定した。エッジ厚みT1は、エッジ厚みを10箇所測定し、測定された10箇所の厚み中、最大値と最小値を除いた8箇所の厚みの算術平均値を求めることによって求めた。
(測定条件)
・対物レンズ:10倍
・Zoom:1倍
・測定領域:2.17mm×2.17mm
・scan Length:5μm
・min mod:0.015
・温度:23℃
・相対湿度:50%
In the rolls according to Examples 1 to 16, the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion was measured. The edge thickness T1 was measured using a scanning light interference type surface shape measuring machine (product name "New View7300", manufactured by Zygo). Specifically, first, when all the films and laminates such as acrylic resin film and PET film were unwound, the first filling portion adhered to the laminate side and was peeled off from the winding core. Then, one or more samples having a size of 2 mm × 5 mm including the first filling portion were cut out from the laminated body. The sample was cut out from an arbitrary portion including the tip portion of the first filling portion and not attached with dirt, fingerprints, or the like. Then, the edge thickness T1 of the first filling portion was measured under the following measurement conditions. The edge thickness T1 was obtained by measuring the edge thickness at 10 points and obtaining the arithmetic mean value of the thicknesses at 8 points excluding the maximum value and the minimum value among the measured thicknesses at the 10 points.
(Measurement condition)
-Objective lens: 10x-Zoom: 1x-Measurement area: 2.17mm x 2.17mm
・ Skan Length: 5 μm
・ Min mod: 0.015
・ Temperature: 23 ℃
・ Relative humidity: 50%
<変形緩和長さ測定>
 実施例および比較例に係るロール体において、アクリル樹脂フィルムやPETフィルム等のフィルムや積層体の巻き始め端部に起因する段差および両面テープに起因する段差が緩和される長さをそれぞれ測定した。具体的には、巻き始め端部から巻き終わり端部に向けて段差が小さくなっていくため、まず段差が視認される地点までフィルムや積層体の繰り出し長さ(m)を測りながら繰り出した。そして、段差が視認される地点でフィルムや積層体を切り取った。フィルムや積層体の切り取った部分にポリビニルアルコールフィルムを貼り合せた状態で、800Lux以上2000Lux以下の室内環境下において、フィルムや積層体に白色LED灯を映り込ませた状態で反射光により目視観察を行った。そして、段差が視認されなくなった地点から巻き始め端部までの距離を測定し、これを変形緩和長さとした。ここで、フィルムや積層体に映り込んだ白色LED灯の輪郭のラインが、フィルムや積層体の他の部分と比較して歪む部分がある場合を段差が存在すると判断し、段差が存在した周辺において映り込ませた白色LED灯の輪郭のラインがフィルムや積層体の他の部分と同じと判断できる部分を段差が存在しないと判断した。白色LED灯は、白色LED灯の長手方向がフィルムや積層体の長手方向に沿うように配置した。白色LED灯の長さは、フィルムや積層体における段差が存在する部分と段差が存在しない部分とに渡った長さとした。観察の際には、白色LED灯のラインが明確に見える方を適宜選択して、白色LED灯がフィルムや積層体に映り込んでその輪郭のラインが見える状態とした。また、目視観察は、フィルムや積層体の表面の法線方向を基準(0°)として、あらゆる角度(-180°~180°)から行われた。
<Measurement of deformation relaxation length>
In the rolls according to Examples and Comparative Examples, the length at which the step caused by the winding start end of the film such as the acrylic resin film or PET film or the laminated body and the step caused by the double-sided tape were alleviated was measured. Specifically, since the step becomes smaller from the winding start end to the winding end end, the film or the laminated body is first fed while measuring the feeding length (m) to the point where the step is visually recognized. Then, the film and the laminated body were cut out at the point where the step was visually recognized. With the polyvinyl alcohol film attached to the cut-out part of the film or laminate, visually observe with reflected light in an indoor environment of 800 Lux or more and 2000 Lux or less with the white LED lamp reflected on the film or laminate. went. Then, the distance from the point where the step was no longer visible to the winding start end was measured, and this was taken as the deformation relaxation length. Here, when the outline of the outline of the white LED lamp reflected on the film or the laminate has a part that is distorted as compared with other parts of the film or the laminate, it is judged that there is a step, and the periphery where the step exists is determined. It was determined that there was no step in the portion where the contour line of the white LED lamp reflected in was the same as the other portion of the film or the laminate. The white LED lamp was arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the white LED lamp was along the longitudinal direction of the film or the laminate. The length of the white LED lamp was set to be the length over the portion of the film or laminate where the step was present and the portion where the step was not present. At the time of observation, the one in which the line of the white LED lamp was clearly visible was appropriately selected so that the white LED lamp was reflected on the film or the laminate so that the outline line could be seen. In addition, visual observation was performed from any angle (−180 ° to 180 °) with reference to the normal direction of the surface of the film or laminate (0 °).
<第4介在部の存在確認>
 実施例3、7~16において、巻き始め端部上に第4介在部が存在するか否か確認した。具体的には、まず、表面が2周目の積層体となるまでロール体から積層体を繰り出した。そして、2周目の積層体が表面となったロール体において、巻き始め端部付近を目視観察し、巻き始め端部上に着色されている部分が存在するか観察した。そして、巻き始め端部上に着色されている部分が存在する場合には、第4介在部が存在し、着色されている部分が存在しない場合には、第4介在部が存在しないとした。観察者は、15人とし、全ての観察者が巻き始め端部上に着色されている部分が存在するとした場合に第4介在部が存在すると判断した。
<Confirmation of the existence of the 4th intervening part>
In Examples 3, 7 to 16, it was confirmed whether or not the fourth intervening portion was present on the winding start end portion. Specifically, first, the laminated body was unwound from the roll body until the surface became the laminated body on the second round. Then, in the roll body whose surface was the laminated body on the second lap, the vicinity of the winding start end portion was visually observed, and it was observed whether or not there was a colored portion on the winding start end portion. Then, when the colored portion is present on the winding start end portion, the fourth intervening portion is present, and when the colored portion is not present, the fourth intervening portion is not present. The number of observers was 15, and it was determined that the fourth intervening portion was present when all the observers had a colored portion on the winding start end portion.
<L1、L1+L2、T2、S1、S1+S2、IL3傾き測定>
 実施例3、7~16に係るロール体において、第4介在部の存在が確認されなかった場合には、長さL1、厚みT2、面積S1を測定するとともに、長さL1/厚みT2、面積S1/厚みT2を求めた。また、第4介在部の存在が確認された場合には、長さL1+長さL2、厚みT1、T2、面積S1+面積S2を測定するとともに、(長さL1+長さL2)/厚みT2、(面積S1+面積S2)/厚みT2を求めた。なお、長さL1、L2、厚みT2、面積S1、S2は、図4~図8に示される部分を意味する。
<Measurement of L1, L1 + L2, T2, S1, S1 + S2, IL3 inclination>
When the presence of the fourth intervening portion is not confirmed in the roll bodies according to Examples 3 and 7 to 16, the length L1, the thickness T2 and the area S1 are measured, and the length L1 / thickness T2 and the area are measured. S1 / thickness T2 was determined. When the presence of the fourth intervening portion is confirmed, the length L1 + length L2, thickness T1, T2, area S1 + area S2 are measured, and (length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2, ( Area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2 was determined. The lengths L1 and L2, the thickness T2, and the areas S1 and S2 mean the portions shown in FIGS. 4 to 8.
 具体的には、まず、ロール体を回転させるための治具と、レーザー変位計(製品名「LK-G30」、株式会社キーエンス製)とを用意し、それぞれ所定の位置に配置した。治具は、巻芯の幅方向の孔に挿入され、ロール体を回転可能に保持した。 Specifically, first, a jig for rotating the roll body and a laser displacement meter (product name "LK-G30", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) were prepared and placed at predetermined positions. The jig was inserted into the hole in the width direction of the winding core to rotatably hold the roll body.
 レーザー変位計は、ロール体の上方に位置し、レーザー光がロール体の表面に向けて照射されるように3台配置された。レーザー変位計の配置箇所は、以下の通りとした。まず、積層体の幅を3等分する第1位置および第2位置を定めた。第1位置は、積層体の短手方向の第1端側に位置し、第2位置は、第1位置とは反対側の第2端側に位置するものであった。そして、1台目のレーザー変位計は第1位置と第1端の中点にレーザー光が照射されるように配置され、2台目のレーザー変位計は第1位置と第2位置の中点にレーザー光が照射されるように配置され、3台目のレーザー変位計は第2位置と第2端の中点にレーザー光が照射されるように配置された。 Three laser displacement gauges were arranged above the roll body so that the laser beam was emitted toward the surface of the roll body. The locations of the laser displacement meters are as follows. First, the first position and the second position that divide the width of the laminated body into three equal parts were determined. The first position was located on the first end side in the lateral direction of the laminated body, and the second position was located on the second end side opposite to the first position. The first laser displacement meter is arranged so that the laser beam is applied to the midpoint between the first position and the first end, and the second laser displacement meter is the midpoint between the first position and the second position. The third laser displacement meter was arranged so that the laser beam was irradiated to the second position and the midpoint of the second end.
 そして、ロール体を治具に取り付け、ロール体から第1充填部が露出するまでアクリル樹脂フィルムを繰り出した。その後、第1充填部が露出した状態で、温度23℃および相対湿度50%の環境下で、巻芯を回転速度30mm/sで回転させながらレーザー変位計によってサンプリング周期200μsで連続的に変位量を測定して、横軸を位置(mm)とし、縦軸を変位量(mm)とするグラフ(図40(A)~図40(C)参照)を得た。この測定は、第1充填部の先端部から先端面に接する位置に向けて行い、この測定においては、基準高さ(変位量0mmライン)を巻芯の高さとし、巻芯と第1充填部の高さの差を第1充填部の厚みとした。得られたグラフは、実質的にシートの長手方向および巻芯の径方向を含む平面を表すものである。また、このグラフは、横軸の1目盛りを5mmとし、縦軸の1目盛りを0.02mmとした。 Then, the roll body was attached to the jig, and the acrylic resin film was fed out from the roll body until the first filling portion was exposed. After that, with the first filling portion exposed, the displacement amount is continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 μs while rotating the winding core at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s in an environment of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. Was measured, and graphs (see FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C)) were obtained in which the horizontal axis was the position (mm) and the vertical axis was the displacement amount (mm). This measurement is performed from the tip of the first filling portion to the position in contact with the tip surface. In this measurement, the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is defined as the height of the winding core, and the winding core and the first filling portion are used. The difference in height was defined as the thickness of the first filling portion. The graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
 このグラフにおいて、変位量が急激に低下し始める位置変位曲線上の位置を位置E1とした。そして、第4介在部の存在が確認されなかった場合には、変位量0mmラインと位置E1の変位量の差を求めることによって、第1充填部における先端面に接する位置の厚みT2を求めた。 In this graph, the position on the position displacement curve where the displacement amount starts to decrease sharply is set as position E1. Then, when the existence of the fourth intervening portion was not confirmed, the thickness T2 of the position in contact with the tip surface of the first filling portion was obtained by obtaining the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount of the position E1. ..
 第4介在部の存在が確認された場合には、厚みT2は、以下の方法によって測定された。まず、巻き始め端部12A、第1充填部14、および2周目のシート12を含む部分が潰れないようにこの部分を含む大きさ2cm×2cmのサンプルを採取し、固定した。そして、固定されたサンプルの断面を研磨し、温度23℃および相対湿度50%の環境下で、第1充填部の厚みT2を実体顕微鏡(製品名「デジタルマイクロスコープVHX-7000」、株式会社キーエンス製)で測定した。実体顕微鏡による厚みT2の測定は、デジタルマイクロスコープの照明として同軸落射照明を選択し、倍率500倍で、暗視野および反射光で行われた。 When the presence of the fourth intervening part was confirmed, the thickness T2 was measured by the following method. First, a sample having a size of 2 cm × 2 cm including this portion was collected and fixed so that the portion including the winding start end portion 12A, the first filling portion 14, and the sheet 12 on the second lap was not crushed. Then, the cross section of the fixed sample is polished, and the thickness T2 of the first filling portion is measured with a stereomicroscope (product name "Digital Microscope VHX-7000", KEYENCE Co., Ltd.) in an environment of temperature 23 ° C. and relative humidity 50%. Made by). The measurement of the thickness T2 with a stereomicroscope was performed in a dark field and reflected light at a magnification of 500 times, selecting coaxial epi-illumination as the illumination of the digital microscope.
 また、第4介在部の存在が確認されなかった場合には、長さL1は、厚みT2と同様に位置変位曲線のグラフから求めた。具体的には、まず、グラフから上記位置E1および変位量が上昇し始める箇所における変位量0mmラインと位置変位曲線の交点を位置E2とした。次いで、上記位置E1を通り、変位量0mmラインに垂直な仮想線IL4を引いた。そして、仮想線IL4と変位量0mmラインの交点を位置E3として、位置E2と位置E3との距離を求めることにより長さL1を求めた。面積S1は、上記位置E2から位置E3までの領域において各測定点での厚みと測定点間毎の幅との積を求め、それを合計することによって算出された。なお、測定点間の幅を上記数式(3)に基づいて、サンプリング周期、巻芯の回転速度、および巻芯の外径から求めたところ、6.24μmであった。第4介在部の存在が確認された場合には、第4介在部の存在が確認されなかった場合の長さL1と同様にして、長さL1+長さL2を求めた。 Further, when the existence of the fourth intervening portion was not confirmed, the length L1 was obtained from the graph of the position displacement curve as in the thickness T2. Specifically, first, the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve at the position E1 and the position where the displacement amount starts to increase from the graph is set as the position E2. Next, a virtual line IL4 was drawn through the position E1 and perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line. Then, the length L1 was obtained by finding the distance between the position E2 and the position E3, with the intersection of the virtual line IL4 and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the position E3. The area S1 was calculated by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the region from the position E2 to the position E3 and totaling them. The width between the measurement points was calculated from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core based on the above mathematical formula (3), and was 6.24 μm. When the existence of the fourth intervening portion was confirmed, the length L1 + the length L2 was obtained in the same manner as the length L1 when the existence of the fourth intervening portion was not confirmed.
 そして、第4介在部の存在が確認されなかった場合には、求めた長さL1、厚みT2、面積S1を用いて、長さL1/厚みT2、面積S1/厚みT2を求めた。また、第4介在部の存在が確認された場合には、求めた長さL1と長さL2の合計、厚みT2、面積S1と面積S2の合計を用いて、(長さL1+長さL2)/厚みT2、(面積S1+面積S2)/厚みT2を求めた。 Then, when the existence of the fourth intervening portion was not confirmed, the length L1 / thickness T2 and the area S1 / thickness T2 were obtained using the obtained length L1, thickness T2, and area S1. When the existence of the fourth intervening portion is confirmed, the total of the obtained length L1 and length L2, the thickness T2, and the total of the area S1 and the area S2 are used (length L1 + length L2). / Thickness T2, (area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2 were obtained.
 また、上記グラフにおいて、位置E1と位置E2を通る仮想線IL3(図40(A)~図40(C)参照)を引き、この仮想線IL3の傾きを求めた。 Further, in the above graph, a virtual line IL3 passing through the positions E1 and E2 (see FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C)) was drawn, and the slope of the virtual line IL3 was obtained.
<L4、T6、S3測定>
 実施例13~16に係るロール体において、長さL4、最大厚みT6、断面積S3を測定するとともに、長さL4/最大厚みT6、断面積S3/最大厚みT6を求めた。なお、長さL4、最大厚みT6は、図27に示される部分を意味し、断面積S3は、図29に示される部分を意味する。長さL4、最大厚みT6、断面積S3は、ロール体を回転させるための治具と、レーザー変位計(製品名「LK-G30」、株式会社キーエンス製)とを用いて、測定された。具体的には、まず、長さL1等の測定と同様に、ロール体を治具に取り付けるとともに3台のレーザー変位計を所定の位置に配置した後、ロール体から第2介在部が露出するまで積層体を繰り出した。その後、第2介在部が露出した状態で、温度23℃および相対湿度50%の環境下で、巻芯を回転速度30mm/sで回転させながらレーザー変位計によってサンプリング周期200μsで連続的に変位量を測定して、横軸を位置(mm)とし、縦軸を変位量(mm)とするグラフを得た。この測定は、第2介在部の両面テープ側の第1先端とは反対側の第2先端から第1先端に向けて行い、この測定においては、基準高さ(変位量0mmライン)を巻芯の高さとし、巻芯と第2介在部の高さの差を第2介在部の厚みとした。得られたグラフは、実質的にシートの長手方向および巻芯の径方向を含む平面を表すものである。また、このグラフは、横軸の1目盛りを5mmとし、縦軸の1目盛りを0.02mmとした。
<Measurement of L4, T6, S3>
In the roll bodies according to Examples 13 to 16, the length L4, the maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 were measured, and the length L4 / maximum thickness T6 and the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 were obtained. The length L4 and the maximum thickness T6 mean the portion shown in FIG. 27, and the cross-sectional area S3 means the portion shown in FIG. 29. The length L4, the maximum thickness T6, and the cross-sectional area S3 were measured using a jig for rotating the roll body and a laser displacement meter (product name "LK-G30", manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION). Specifically, first, as in the measurement of the length L1, etc., the roll body is attached to the jig and three laser displacement meters are arranged at predetermined positions, and then the second intervening portion is exposed from the roll body. The laminate was fed out. After that, with the second interposition part exposed, the displacement amount is continuously measured by a laser displacement meter with a sampling period of 200 μs while rotating the winding core at a rotation speed of 30 mm / s in an environment of a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 50%. Was measured, and a graph was obtained in which the horizontal axis was the position (mm) and the vertical axis was the displacement amount (mm). This measurement is performed from the second tip on the side opposite to the first tip on the double-sided tape side of the second interposition portion to the first tip. In this measurement, the reference height (displacement amount 0 mm line) is used as the winding core. The difference in height between the winding core and the second intervening portion was defined as the thickness of the second interposing portion. The graph obtained substantially represents a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core. Further, in this graph, one scale on the horizontal axis is 5 mm, and one scale on the vertical axis is 0.02 mm.
 このグラフにおいて、変位量が最も高くなる位置を見付け、変位量0mmラインとこの位置の変位量の差を求めることによって、第2介在部における最大厚みT6を求めた。 In this graph, the position where the displacement amount was the highest was found, and the difference between the displacement amount 0 mm line and the displacement amount at this position was obtained to obtain the maximum thickness T6 at the second intervening portion.
 また、このグラフから変位量が上昇し始める箇所における変位量0mmラインと位置変位曲線の交点である第1位置を見付けた。次いで、上記変位量が最も高くなる位置を通り、変位量0mmラインに垂直な仮想線を引いた。そして、この仮想線と変位量0mmラインの交点を第2位置として、第1位置と第2位置との距離を求めることにより長さL4を求めた。断面積S3は、上記第1位置から第2位置までの領域において各測定点での厚みと測定点間毎の幅との積を求め、それを合計することによって算出された。なお、測定点間の幅を上記数式(3)に基づいて、サンプリング周期、巻芯の回転速度、および巻芯の外径から求めたところ、6.24μmであった。 Also, from this graph, the first position, which is the intersection of the displacement amount 0 mm line and the position displacement curve, was found at the point where the displacement amount starts to increase. Next, a virtual line perpendicular to the displacement amount 0 mm line was drawn through the position where the displacement amount was the highest. Then, the length L4 was obtained by obtaining the distance between the first position and the second position with the intersection of the virtual line and the displacement amount 0 mm line as the second position. The cross-sectional area S3 was calculated by obtaining the product of the thickness at each measurement point and the width between the measurement points in the region from the first position to the second position and totaling them. The width between the measurement points was calculated from the sampling period, the rotation speed of the winding core, and the outer diameter of the winding core based on the above mathematical formula (3), and was 6.24 μm.
 また、求めた長さL4、最大厚みT6、断面積S3を用いて、長さL4/最大厚みT6、断面積S3/最大厚みT6を求めた。 Further, the length L4 / maximum thickness T6 and the cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 were obtained by using the obtained length L4, maximum thickness T6, and cross-sectional area S3.
 以下、結果を表1~表3に示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
The results are shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
 比較例1に係るロール体は、巻き始め端部における変形緩和長さおよび両面テープにおける変形緩和長さがとともに長かった。これは、第1隙間が空洞であったので、アクリル樹脂フィルムの巻き始め端部に起因する段差が大きく、また第2隙間が空洞であったので、両面テープに起因する段差が大きかったためであると考えられる。これに対し、実施例1~12に係るロール体は、巻き始め端部における変形緩和長さおよび両面テープにおける変形緩和長さとともに比較例1に係るロール体よりも短かった。これは、実施例1~5、7~15に係るロール体においては、第1隙間に第1充填部が充填されていたので、アクリル樹脂フィルムの巻き始め端部に起因する段差が小さく、また第2隙間に第2充填部が充填され、または第2隙間に対応する領域に第2介在部が介在されていたので、両面テープに起因する段差が小さかったためであると考えられる。また実施例6においては、第1隙間に対応する第1領域に第1介在部が介在していたので、PETフィルムの巻き始め端部に起因する段差が小さく、また第2隙間に対応する第2領域に第2介在部が介在していたので、両面テープに起因する段差が小さかったためであると考えられる。 The roll body according to Comparative Example 1 had a long deformation relaxation length at the winding start end and a deformation relaxation length at the double-sided tape. This is because since the first gap was hollow, the step caused by the winding start end of the acrylic resin film was large, and because the second gap was hollow, the step caused by the double-sided tape was large. it is conceivable that. On the other hand, the roll bodies according to Examples 1 to 12 were shorter than the roll bodies according to Comparative Example 1 together with the deformation relaxation length at the winding start end and the deformation relaxation length in the double-sided tape. This is because, in the roll bodies according to Examples 1 to 5 and 7 to 15, since the first filling portion was filled in the first gap, the step caused by the winding start end portion of the acrylic resin film was small, and the step was small. It is considered that this is because the second filling portion was filled in the second gap or the second intervening portion was interposed in the region corresponding to the second gap, so that the step caused by the double-sided tape was small. Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the first intervening portion is interposed in the first region corresponding to the first gap, the step caused by the winding start end portion of the PET film is small, and the second intervening portion corresponding to the second gap is small. It is considered that this is because the step caused by the double-sided tape was small because the second intervening portion was interposed in the two regions.
 実施例3、8~16に係るロール体の第1充填部は、長さL1/厚みT2または(長さL1+長さL2)/厚みT2が90以上であり、および/または面積S1/厚みT2または(面積S1+面積S2)/厚みT2が3.0以上であったので、長さL1/厚みT2が90未満の実施例7に係るロール体よりも、巻き始め端部における変形緩和長さが短かった。 The first filled portion of the roll body according to Examples 3 and 8 to 16 has a length L1 / thickness T2 or (length L1 + length L2) / thickness T2 of 90 or more, and / or an area S1 / thickness T2. Alternatively, since (area S1 + area S2) / thickness T2 was 3.0 or more, the deformation relaxation length at the winding start end portion was larger than that of the roll body according to Example 7 in which the length L1 / thickness T2 was less than 90. It was short.
 実施例13~16に係るロール体の第2介在部は、長さL4/最大厚みT6が12以上であり、および/または断面積S3/最大厚みT6が2.5以上であったので、両面テープにおける変形緩和長さが短かった。 The second intervening portion of the roll body according to Examples 13 to 16 has a length L4 / maximum thickness T6 of 12 or more and / or a cross-sectional area S3 / maximum thickness T6 of 2.5 or more. The deformation relaxation length of the tape was short.
 実施例1、2、6、13に係るロール体においては、塗布時のシリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物の剪断粘度が60Pa・s以上であったので、巻芯とアクリル樹脂フィルムやPETフィルムの間からの上記組成物のはみ出しが塗布時および巻き取り時の圧力が加わった場合のいずれでも確認されなかった。実施例3、4、7~10に係るロール体においては、塗布時の組成物の剪断粘度が60Pa・s未満であったが、15Pa・s以上であったので、塗布時のはみ出しは無かったものの、巻き取り時の圧力が加わった場合には組成物のはみ出しが確認された。実施例5、11、12、14~16は、塗布時の組成物の剪断粘度が、15Pa・s未満であったので、巻芯とアクリル樹脂フィルムの間からの組成物のはみ出しが確認された。 In the rolls according to Examples 1, 2, 6 and 13, the shear viscosity of the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition at the time of application was 60 Pa · s or more, so that the winding core and the acrylic resin film or PET film were formed. No protrusion of the above composition from between was confirmed in either the case where pressure was applied during application and during winding. In the rolls according to Examples 3, 4, 7 to 10, the shear viscosity of the composition at the time of coating was less than 60 Pa · s, but it was 15 Pa · s or more, so that there was no protrusion during coating. However, when the pressure at the time of winding was applied, the composition was confirmed to protrude. In Examples 5, 11, 12, 14 to 16, the shear viscosity of the composition at the time of application was less than 15 Pa · s, so that the composition was confirmed to protrude from the core and the acrylic resin film. ..
 また、実施例3に係るロール体において、リワーク性試験を行った。具体的には、まず、アクリル樹脂フィルムを巻き出して、第1充填部を露出させた。そして、第1充填部の端部に巻芯を傷つけないように刃状のものできっかけを作り、指でゆっくりと巻芯から第1充填部を剥がすことを試みた。リワーク性の評価基準は、第1充填部が綺麗に剥がれた場合を良好とし、第1充填部が破断等によって一部が巻芯に残存した場合は不良とした。このような評価において、実施例3に係るロール体の第1充填部は、綺麗に剥がれたので、良好であった。なお、実施例3以外の実施例に係るロール体においても、リワーク性試験を行ったところ、リワーク性は実施例3に係る第1充填部と同様に良好であった。実施例3以外の実施例に係るロール体における第1充填部の構成材料の引張強さは3.0MPa以上5.5MPa以下であり、切断時伸びは250%以上600%以下であり、引裂強さは6N/mm以上25N/mm以下であり、デュロメータータイプAで測定した第1充填部の構成材料の硬さは、10°以上50°以下であり、第1充填部の構成材料の線収縮率は、0%以上1.0%以下の範囲内のものであった。また、表1に示されるように、実施例1~16に係るロール体の第1充填部のエッジ厚みT1は、1.5μm以上20μm以下の範囲内であった。第1充填部を剥がす際、または洗浄や拭き取る際には、エッジ厚みT1が厚めの方が、僅かだが第1充填部を剥がしやすく、または除去しやすかった。 In addition, a reworkability test was conducted on the roll body according to Example 3. Specifically, first, the acrylic resin film was unwound to expose the first filling portion. Then, a blade-shaped tool was made at the end of the first filling portion so as not to damage the winding core, and an attempt was made to slowly peel the first filling portion from the winding core with a finger. The evaluation criteria for reworkability were good when the first filling part was peeled off cleanly, and poor when a part of the first filling part remained on the winding core due to breakage or the like. In such an evaluation, the first filled portion of the roll body according to Example 3 was peeled off cleanly, which was good. When the reworkability test was performed on the rolls according to the examples other than the third example, the reworkability was as good as that of the first filled portion according to the third embodiment. The tensile strength of the constituent material of the first filling portion in the roll body according to the examples other than Example 3 is 3.0 MPa or more and 5.5 MPa or less, the elongation at the time of cutting is 250% or more and 600% or less, and the tear strength. The hardness is 6 N / mm or more and 25 N / mm or less, the hardness of the constituent material of the first filling portion measured by the durometer type A is 10 ° or more and 50 ° or less, and the linear shrinkage of the constituent material of the first filling portion. The rate was in the range of 0% or more and 1.0% or less. Further, as shown in Table 1, the edge thickness T1 of the first filled portion of the roll body according to Examples 1 to 16 was in the range of 1.5 μm or more and 20 μm or less. When the first filling portion was peeled off, or when cleaning or wiping, a thicker edge thickness T1 was slightly easier to peel off or remove the first filling portion.
 実施例1~12においては、シリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物を両面テープの第1端面および第2端面に接触するように塗布しているが、実施例1~12において、シリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物と両面テープの間の離間距離が1mmとなるようにシリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布や両面テープの配置を行ったところ、安定してロール体を製造でき、また得られたロール体もそれぞれ実施例1~12に係るロール体の上記評価結果や測定結果とほぼ同様であった。また、同様に、実施例1~12において、シリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物と両面テープの間の離間距離が3mmとなるようにシリコーン樹脂組成物やシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布や両面テープの配置を行ったところ、安定してロール体を製造でき、また得られたロール体もそれぞれ実施例1~12に係るロール体の上記評価結果や測定結果とほぼ同様であった。これらの場合、まず、シリコーン樹脂組成物等を巻芯の幅方向に沿って線状に塗布し、その後両面テープの第2端面とシリコーン樹脂組成物等との離間距離が1mmや3mmとなるように両面テープを配置し、さらに両面テープの第1端面とシリコーン樹脂組成等の間の離間距離が1mmまたは3mmとなるようにシリコーン樹脂組成物等を巻芯の幅方向に沿って線状に塗布するという順番で行った。 In Examples 1 to 12, the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition is applied so as to be in contact with the first end face and the second end face of the double-sided tape, but in Examples 1 to 12, the silicone resin composition When the silicone resin composition or silicone rubber composition is applied or the double-sided tape is arranged so that the separation distance between the silicone rubber composition and the double-sided tape is 1 mm, a roll body can be stably produced. The obtained rolls were also substantially the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Examples 1 to 12, respectively. Similarly, in Examples 1 to 12, the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition is applied or the double-sided tape is applied so that the separation distance between the silicone resin composition or the silicone rubber composition and the double-sided tape is 3 mm. When the rolls were arranged, the rolls could be stably produced, and the obtained rolls were almost the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Examples 1 to 12, respectively. In these cases, first, the silicone resin composition or the like is applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core, and then the separation distance between the second end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone resin composition or the like is 1 mm or 3 mm. A double-sided tape is placed on the surface, and the silicone resin composition or the like is linearly applied along the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the first end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone resin composition or the like is 1 mm or 3 mm. I went in the order of doing.
 さらに実施例2において、シリコーンゴムと両面テープの間の離間距離が5mmとなるようにシリコーンゴム組成物の塗布や両面テープの配置を行ったところ、安定してロール体を製造でき、また得られたロール体もそれぞれ実施例2に係るロール体の上記評価結果や測定結果とほぼ同様であった。また、エッジ厚みT1は、2μmであった。この場合、まず、シリコーンゴム組成物を巻芯の幅方向に沿って線状に塗布し、その後両面テープの第2端面とシリコーンゴム組成物との離間距離が5mmとなるように両面テープを配置し、さらに両面テープの第1端面とシリコーンゴム組成物の間の離間距離が5mmとなるようにシリコーンゴム組成物を巻芯の幅方向に沿って線状に塗布するという順番で行った。 Further, in Example 2, when the silicone rubber composition was applied and the double-sided tape was arranged so that the separation distance between the silicone rubber and the double-sided tape was 5 mm, a roll body could be stably produced and obtained. The rolls were also substantially the same as the evaluation results and measurement results of the rolls according to Example 2. The edge thickness T1 was 2 μm. In this case, first, the silicone rubber composition is applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core, and then the double-sided tape is arranged so that the separation distance between the second end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition is 5 mm. Further, the silicone rubber composition was applied linearly along the width direction of the winding core so that the separation distance between the first end surface of the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition was 5 mm.
 実施例3においては、塗布時の剪断粘度が40Pa・sのシリコーンゴム組成物を用いていたが、例えば、塗布時の剪断粘度を7Pa・sとし、また両面テープとシリコーンゴム組成物の間の離間距離を11mmとしたところ、両面テープの第1端面側に位置するシリコーンゴム組成物が両面テープ側とは反対側に流れてしまった。また、同様に、剪断粘度を250Pa・sとし、また両面テープの第1端面および第2端面に接触するようにシリコーンゴム組成物を配置したところ、アクリル樹脂フィルムを巻回したとしても、充分に流動させにくかったため、硬化後、僅かであるが、巻き始め端部に別の段差が生じてしまった。 In Example 3, a silicone rubber composition having a shear viscosity at the time of application of 40 Pa · s was used. For example, the shear viscosity at the time of application was set to 7 Pa · s, and between the double-sided tape and the silicone rubber composition. When the separation distance was set to 11 mm, the silicone rubber composition located on the first end surface side of the double-sided tape flowed to the side opposite to the double-sided tape side. Similarly, when the shear viscosity was set to 250 Pa · s and the silicone rubber composition was arranged so as to be in contact with the first end face and the second end face of the double-sided tape, even if the acrylic resin film was wound, it was sufficient. Since it was difficult to make it flow, another step was generated at the beginning and end of winding, although it was slight after curing.
10、20、30、40、50、60、70、80、90、100、110、120、130、140、150…ロール体
11…巻芯
11A…外周面
12…シート
12A…巻き始め端部
12A1…先端面
12D…第1領域
12E…第2領域
12F…第3領域
12G…端部
12H…凸部
13…第1隙間
14…第1充填部
15、52…第2隙間
16、53…第2充填部
17、51…固定部材
17A、51A…第1端面
17B、51B…第2端面
21、54…第3隙間
22、55…第3充填部
71…第1介在部
72…第2介在部
73…中間ロール体
81…第3介在部
201~207…塗布材料

 
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 ... Roll body 11 ... Winding core 11A ... Outer peripheral surface 12 ... Sheet 12A ... Winding start end 12A1 ... Tip surface 12D ... 1st region 12E ... 2nd region 12F ... 3rd region 12G ... End portion 12H ... Convex portion 13 ... 1st gap 14 ... 1st filling portion 15, 52 ... 2nd gap 16, 53 ... 2nd Filling parts 17, 51 ... Fixing members 17A, 51A ... First end faces 17B, 51B ... Second end faces 21, 54 ... Third gaps 22, 55 ... Third filling parts 71 ... First intervening parts 72 ... Second intervening parts 73 ... Intermediate roll body 81 ... Third intervening portion 201 to 207 ... Coating material

Claims (36)

  1.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、
     前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に塗布材料を塗布する工程と、
     前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部を前記外周面に配置する工程と、
     前記巻芯に前記シートを巻回して、少なくとも第1隙間に前記塗布材料を充填する工程と、を備え、
     前記塗布材料の塗布または前記巻き始め端部の配置は、前記塗布材料が前記巻き始め端部の前記長手方向に位置する先端面と接触または近接するように行われ、
     前記第1隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記先端面に接する隙間である、製造方法。
    A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A step of applying the coating material to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the width direction of the winding core, and
    A step of arranging the winding start end portion of the sheet in the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surface, and
    A step of winding the sheet around the winding core and filling at least the first gap with the coating material is provided.
    The coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the winding start end portion is performed so that the coating material is in contact with or close to the tip surface of the winding start end portion located in the longitudinal direction.
    A manufacturing method in which the first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the tip surface.
  2.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、
     前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部を前記外周面に配置する工程と、
     前記巻芯に前記シートを少なくとも1周巻回して、第1隙間を有する中間ロール体を得る工程と、
     前記中間ロール体の外周面を構成する前記シートの表面に、前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って塗布材料を塗布する工程と、
     前記塗布材料を塗布した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを再度巻回して、前記シート間に前記塗布材料を介在させる工程と、を備え、
     前記第1隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する隙間であり、
     前記塗布材料が、前記中間ロール体の前記外周面を構成する前記シートの前記表面における、前記第1隙間に対応する第1領域に塗布される、製造方法。
    A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A step of arranging the winding start end portion of the sheet in the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surface, and
    A step of winding the sheet around the winding core at least once to obtain an intermediate roll body having a first gap.
    A step of applying the coating material along the width direction of the winding core to the surface of the sheet forming the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body, and
    After applying the coating material, the sheet is wound around the winding core again, and the coating material is interposed between the sheets.
    The first gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the tip surface located at the winding start end in the longitudinal direction.
    A manufacturing method in which the coating material is applied to a first region corresponding to the first gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body.
  3.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、
     前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に、前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定するための、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有する固定部材を配置する工程と、
     前記巻芯の前記幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に塗布材料を塗布する工程と、
     前記固定部材を介して前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定する工程と、
     前記塗布材料を塗布し、かつ前記巻芯に前記シートの一部を固定した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを巻回して、第2隙間および第3隙間の少なくともいずれかに前記塗布材料を充填する工程と、を備え、
     前記塗布材料の塗布または前記固定部材の配置は、前記塗布材料が前記第1端面側または前記第2端面側に位置し、かつ前記塗布材料が前記第1端面または前記第2端面に接触または近接するように行われ、あるいは前記塗布材料が前記第1端面側および前記第2端面側のそれぞれに位置し、かつ前記塗布材料が前記第1端面および前記第2端面と接触または近接するように行われ、
     前記第2隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記第1端面に接する隙間であり、
     前記第3隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記第2端面に接する隙間である、製造方法。
    A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a first end surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the width direction of the winding core. The process of arranging the fixing member having the second end surface on the opposite side to the
    A step of applying the coating material to the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the width direction of the winding core, and
    A step of fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core via the fixing member, and
    After applying the coating material and fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core, the sheet is wound around the winding core to fill at least one of the second gap and the third gap with the coating material. With the process of
    The coating of the coating material or the arrangement of the fixing member is such that the coating material is located on the first end surface side or the second end surface side, and the coating material is in contact with or close to the first end surface or the second end surface. Or such that the coating material is located on the first end face side and the second end face side, respectively, and the coating material is in contact with or close to the first end face and the second end face. I,
    The second gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the first end surface.
    A manufacturing method in which the third gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface.
  4.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体の製造方法であって、
     前記巻芯の幅方向に沿って前記巻芯の前記外周面に、前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定するための、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有する固定部材を配置する工程と、
     前記固定部材を介して前記シートの一部を前記巻芯に固定する工程と、
     前記巻芯に前記シートを少なくとも1周巻回して、第2隙間および第3隙間を有する中間ロール体を得る工程と、
     前記中間ロール体の外周面を構成する前記シートの表面に、前記巻芯の前記幅方向に沿って塗布材料を塗布する工程と、
     前記塗布材料を塗布した後に、前記巻芯に前記シートを再度巻回する工程と、を備え、
     前記第2隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する隙間であり、
     前記第3隙間が、前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する隙間であり、
     前記塗布材料は、前記中間ロール体の前記外周面を構成する前記シートの前記表面における、前記第2隙間に対応する第2領域および前記第3隙間に対応する第3領域の少なくともいずれかに塗布される、製造方法。
    A method for manufacturing a roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a first end surface for fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core on the outer peripheral surface of the winding core along the width direction of the winding core. The process of arranging the fixing member having the second end surface on the opposite side to the
    A step of fixing a part of the sheet to the winding core via the fixing member, and
    A step of winding the sheet around the winding core at least once to obtain an intermediate roll body having a second gap and a third gap.
    A step of applying a coating material to the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body along the width direction of the winding core, and a step of applying the coating material.
    A step of rewinding the sheet around the winding core after applying the coating material is provided.
    The second gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member.
    The third gap is a gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member.
    The coating material is applied to at least one of a second region corresponding to the second gap and a third region corresponding to the third gap on the surface of the sheet constituting the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate roll body. The manufacturing method to be done.
  5.  前記塗布材料が、流動性を有する、請求項1ないし4のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The production method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the coating material has fluidity.
  6.  前記塗布材料が、硬化性高分子組成物である、請求項1ないし5のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The production method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the coating material is a curable polymer composition.
  7.  前記塗布材料が、着色材料または発光材料を含んでいる、請求項1ないし6のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The production method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the coating material contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
  8.  前記シートが、樹脂フィルムを有する、請求項1ないし7のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The manufacturing method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the sheet has a resin film.
  9.  前記シートが、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、またはシクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む、請求項1ないし7のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The production method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the sheet contains an acrylic resin, a polyester resin, or a cycloolefin polymer resin.
  10.  前記シートの厚みが、15μm以上300μm以下である、請求項8または9に記載の製造方法。 The manufacturing method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the thickness of the sheet is 15 μm or more and 300 μm or less.
  11.  前記シートが、基材と、前記基材に積層された1以上の機能層とを有する積層体である、請求項1ないし10のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The production method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the sheet is a laminate having a base material and one or more functional layers laminated on the base material.
  12.  前記シートが、光学フィルム、偏光板、または表示装置に用いられる、請求項1ないし11のいずれか一項に記載の製造方法。 The manufacturing method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the sheet is used for an optical film, a polarizing plate, or a display device.
  13.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記1周目の前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する第1隙間と、
     前記第1隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1充填部と、
     を備える、ロール体。
    A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A first gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the tip surface located in the longitudinal direction at the winding start end of the sheet on the first lap in the longitudinal direction.
    A first filling portion that is filled in the first gap and extends in the width direction of the winding core,
    A roll body.
  14.  前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面とは反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、
     前記第2隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2充填部、および前記第3隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3充填部の少なくともいずれかと、をさらに備える、請求項13に記載のロール体。
    It is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, has a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core, and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface, and with respect to the winding core. A fixing member that fixes a part of the sheet and
    A second gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member.
    A third gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member.
    At least one of a second filling portion filled in the second gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core and a third filling portion filled in the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core. The roll body according to claim 13, further comprising.
  15.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記1周目の前記シートの長手方向の巻き始め端部における前記長手方向に位置する先端面に接する第1隙間と、
     1周目以降の前記シート間における少なくとも前記第1隙間に対応する第1領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1介在部と、
     を備える、ロール体。
    A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    A first gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first lap and in contact with the tip surface located in the longitudinal direction at the winding start end of the sheet on the first lap in the longitudinal direction.
    A first intervening portion provided in a first region corresponding to at least the first gap between the sheets after the first lap and extending in the width direction of the winding core, and a first intervening portion.
    A roll body.
  16.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面と反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、
     前記第2隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2充填部、および前記第3隙間に充填され、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3充填部の少なくともいずれかと、
     を備える、ロール体。
    A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    It is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, has a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface, and has the said to the winding core. A fixing member that fixes a part of the seat and
    A second gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member.
    A third gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member.
    At least one of a second filling portion filled in the second gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core and a third filling portion filled in the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
    A roll body.
  17.  巻芯と、前記巻芯の外周面に巻回された長尺状のシートとを備えるロール体であって、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に設けられ、前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第1端面および前記第1端面と反対側の第2端面を有し、かつ前記巻芯に対し前記シートの一部を固定する固定部材と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第1端面に接する第2隙間と、
     前記巻芯と1周目の前記シートの間に位置し、かつ前記固定部材の前記第2端面に接する第3隙間と、
     1周目以降の前記シート間における、前記第2隙間に対応する第2領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第2介在部、および1周目以降の前記シート間における、前記第3隙間に対応する第3領域に設けられ、かつ前記巻芯の幅方向に延びる第3介在部の少なくともいずれかと、
     を備える、ロール体。
    A roll body including a winding core and a long sheet wound around the outer peripheral surface of the winding core.
    It is provided between the winding core and the sheet on the first round, has a first end surface extending in the width direction of the winding core and a second end surface opposite to the first end surface, and has the said to the winding core. A fixing member that fixes a part of the seat and
    A second gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the first end surface of the fixing member.
    A third gap located between the winding core and the sheet on the first round and in contact with the second end surface of the fixing member.
    The second intervening portion provided in the second region corresponding to the second gap between the sheets after the first lap and extending in the width direction of the winding core, and the sheets between the sheets after the first lap. At least one of the third intervening portions provided in the third region corresponding to the third gap and extending in the width direction of the winding core.
    A roll body.
  18.  前記第1充填部に連設され、かつ1周目の前記シートと2周目の前記シートの間に介在した第4介在部をさらに備える、請求項13または14に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 13 or 14, further comprising a fourth intervening portion that is connected to the first filling portion and is interposed between the sheet on the first lap and the sheet on the second lap.
  19.  前記第1充填部に連設され、かつ1周目の前記シートと2周目の前記シートの間に介在した第4介在部が存在しない場合には、前記第1充填部における前記先端面に接する位置での厚みT2に対する前記第1充填部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL1の比が、90以上であり、前記第4介在部が存在する場合には、前記第1充填部における前記先端面に接する位置での厚みT2に対する前記第1充填部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL1および前記第4介在部における前記シートの前記長手方向に沿った長さL2の合計の比が、90以上である、請求項13または14に記載のロール体。 If there is no fourth intervening portion that is connected to the first filling portion and is interposed between the sheet on the first lap and the sheet on the second lap, the tip surface of the first filling portion When the ratio of the length L1 of the sheet in the first filling portion along the longitudinal direction to the thickness T2 at the contacting position is 90 or more and the fourth intervening portion is present, the first filling portion is present. The length L1 of the sheet in the first filling portion along the longitudinal direction and the length L2 of the sheet in the fourth intervening portion along the longitudinal direction with respect to the thickness T2 at the position in contact with the tip surface of the portion. The roll body according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the total ratio of the above is 90 or more.
  20.  前記第4介在部が存在しない場合には、前記第1充填部の前記厚みT2に対する、前記シートの前記長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第1充填部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S1の比が、3.0以上であり、前記第4介在部が存在する場合には、前記第1充填部の前記厚みT2に対する、前記シートの長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第1充填部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S1および前記巻芯の前記外周面と前記第4介在部の表面で挟まれる領域の面積S2の合計の比が、3.0以上である、請求項19に記載のロール体。 When the fourth intervening portion is not present, the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and the outer peripheral surface of the winding core in a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion. When the ratio of the area S1 of the region sandwiched by the surface of the 1 filling portion is 3.0 or more and the fourth intervening portion is present, the length of the sheet with respect to the thickness T2 of the first filling portion. The area S1 of the region sandwiched between the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and the surface of the first filling portion in the plane including the direction and the radial direction of the winding core, and the outer peripheral surface of the winding core and the surface of the fourth intervening portion. The roll body according to claim 19, wherein the ratio of the total of the areas S2 of the regions sandwiched by the two is 3.0 or more.
  21.  前記第2介在部の厚みを前記シートの長手方向に沿って測定したとき、前記第2介在部の最大厚みT6に対する、前記長手方向において前記第2介在部における前記固定部材側の第1先端とは反対側の第2先端から前記第2介在部の前記最大厚みT6となる位置までの長さL4の比が、12以上である、請求項17に記載のロール体。 When the thickness of the second intervening portion is measured along the longitudinal direction of the sheet, the first tip of the second intervening portion on the fixing member side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second interposing portion. The roll body according to claim 17, wherein the ratio of the length L4 from the second tip on the opposite side to the position where the maximum thickness T6 of the second intervening portion is 12 or more.
  22.  前記第2介在部の最大厚みT6に対する前記シートの前記長手方向および前記巻芯の径方向を含む平面における前記第2介在部の前記第2先端から前記最大厚みT6となる位置までの前記第2介在部の断面積S3の比が、2.5以上である、請求項21に記載のロール体。 The second from the second tip of the second interposition portion to the position where the maximum thickness T6 is obtained in a plane including the longitudinal direction of the sheet and the radial direction of the winding core with respect to the maximum thickness T6 of the second interposition portion. The roll body according to claim 21, wherein the ratio of the cross-sectional area S3 of the intervening portion is 2.5 or more.
  23.  前記シートが、前記シートの前記長手方向に沿って延びる両端部に、前記巻芯の径方向に突出した凸部をそれぞれ有する、請求項15または請求項17に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 15 or 17, wherein the sheet has convex portions protruding in the radial direction of the winding core at both ends extending along the longitudinal direction of the sheet.
  24.  前記シートが、樹脂フィルムを有する、請求項13ないし23のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to any one of claims 13 to 23, wherein the sheet has a resin film.
  25.  前記シートが、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、シクロオレフィンポリマー系樹脂を含む、請求項13ないし23のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to any one of claims 13 to 23, wherein the sheet contains an acrylic resin, a polyester resin, and a cycloolefin polymer resin.
  26.  前記シートの厚みが、15μm以上300μm以下である、請求項24または25に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the thickness of the sheet is 15 μm or more and 300 μm or less.
  27.  前記第1充填部が、着色材料または発光材料を含む、請求項13に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 13, wherein the first filling portion contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
  28.  前記第2充填部および前記第3充填部が、それぞれ着色材料または発光材料を含む、請求項14または16に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 14 or 16, wherein the second filling portion and the third filling portion contain a coloring material or a light emitting material, respectively.
  29.  前記第1介在部が、着色材料または発光材料を含む、請求項15に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 15, wherein the first intervening portion contains a coloring material or a light emitting material.
  30.  前記第2介在部および前記第3介在部が、それぞれ着色材料または発光材料を含む、請求項17に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 17, wherein the second intervening portion and the third interposing portion contain a coloring material or a light emitting material, respectively.
  31.  前記第1充填部が、硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項13に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 13, wherein the first filling portion contains a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
  32.  前記第2充填部および前記第3充填部が、それぞれ硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項14または16に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 14 or 16, wherein the second filling portion and the third filling portion each contain a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
  33.  前記第1介在部が、硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項15に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 15, wherein the first interposition portion contains a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
  34.  前記第2介在部および前記第3介在部が、それぞれ硬化性高分子組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項17に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to claim 17, wherein the second interposition portion and the third interposition portion each contain a cured product of a curable polymer composition.
  35.  前記シートが、基材と、前記基材に積層された1以上の機能層とを有する積層体である、請求項13ないし34のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。 The roll body according to any one of claims 13 to 34, wherein the sheet is a laminated body having a base material and one or more functional layers laminated on the base material.
  36.  前記シートが、光学フィルム、偏光板、または表示装置に用いられる、請求項13ないし35のいずれか一項に記載のロール体。

     
    The roll body according to any one of claims 13 to 35, wherein the sheet is used for an optical film, a polarizing plate, or a display device.

PCT/JP2020/026863 2019-07-09 2020-07-09 Manufacturing method for roll body, and roll body WO2021006314A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020227003825A KR20220029738A (en) 2019-07-09 2020-07-09 Roll body manufacturing method and roll body
CN202080054223.XA CN114223081A (en) 2019-07-09 2020-07-09 Method for manufacturing roll body and roll body

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019127551 2019-07-09
JP2019-127551 2019-07-09
JP2020-007594 2020-01-21
JP2020007594 2020-01-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021006314A1 true WO2021006314A1 (en) 2021-01-14

Family

ID=74114519

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/026863 WO2021006314A1 (en) 2019-07-09 2020-07-09 Manufacturing method for roll body, and roll body

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2021107286A (en)
KR (1) KR20220029738A (en)
CN (1) CN114223081A (en)
TW (1) TW202108488A (en)
WO (1) WO2021006314A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011201634A (en) * 2010-03-25 2011-10-13 Maxell Sliontec Ltd Step trace-reducing structure of roll-like object and method of manufacturing roll-like object
JP2016155619A (en) * 2015-02-23 2016-09-01 プロマティック株式会社 Roll material and method of manufacturing the same

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005075521A (en) 2003-08-29 2005-03-24 Murazumi Kk Core and roll-like material using the core
JP5088567B2 (en) * 2008-03-31 2012-12-05 東レフィルム加工株式会社 Web winding core and web winding method
JP5623453B2 (en) 2012-03-26 2014-11-12 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymer film roll, optical film, and polymer film roll manufacturing method
JP2014151985A (en) * 2013-02-05 2014-08-25 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Winding core and winding body
WO2014178393A1 (en) * 2013-05-02 2014-11-06 日本発條株式会社 Core for film winding
JP6472077B2 (en) * 2015-03-23 2019-02-20 グラフテック株式会社 Roll paper width regulating rod and printing system having the same
CN205177930U (en) * 2015-12-17 2016-04-20 吉安力莱新能源科技有限公司 Prevent short circuit battery

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011201634A (en) * 2010-03-25 2011-10-13 Maxell Sliontec Ltd Step trace-reducing structure of roll-like object and method of manufacturing roll-like object
JP2016155619A (en) * 2015-02-23 2016-09-01 プロマティック株式会社 Roll material and method of manufacturing the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202108488A (en) 2021-03-01
KR20220029738A (en) 2022-03-08
JP2021107286A (en) 2021-07-29
CN114223081A (en) 2022-03-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI528056B (en) Method for producing polarizing plate
JP6852967B2 (en) Polarizing film with adhesive layer, optical members, and image display device
KR102004172B1 (en) Anisotropic adhesive sheet
WO2009087942A1 (en) Polarizer
JP2012144690A (en) Active energy ray-curing adhesive agent composition, polarization plate, optical film and image display device
TWI569048B (en) Method for manufacturing optical members with adhesive
WO2018221232A1 (en) Optical film, release method, and method for manufacturing optical display panel
US9932500B2 (en) Adhesive tape
US20220184937A1 (en) Transfer sheet and manufacturing method for same, method for manufacturing molded body using said transfer sheet and molded body, and front plate using said molded body and image display device
JP2015508339A (en) Modified release coating for optically clear films
WO2021006314A1 (en) Manufacturing method for roll body, and roll body
JP6872485B2 (en) A web winding roll having a microsphere-treated edge and a method for producing the same.
JP2003027019A (en) Self-adhesive film for protecting optical sheet
JP2004029204A (en) Optical sheet protecting adhesive film
WO2022025289A1 (en) Roll body
JP5089144B2 (en) Double-sided adhesive tape for affixing rubbing cloth and roller formed by adhering it
JP2015199265A (en) Release film for substrate-less double-sided adhesive sheets
JP2013237849A (en) Active energy ray-curing adhesive agent composition, polarization plate, optical film, and image display device
JP7258497B2 (en) transparent adhesive film
JP2002173650A (en) Pressure-sensitive adhesive film for protecting optical sheet
JP7154002B2 (en) POLARIZING FILM, POLARIZING FILM WITH ADHESIVE LAYER, AND IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE
JP2018028104A (en) Anisotropic adhesive sheet
WO2017138449A1 (en) Method for manufacturing layered optical film
JP2020052170A (en) Optical laminate
JP2020033441A (en) Double-sided adhesive tape

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20837504

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20227003825

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20837504

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1